Академический Документы
Профессиональный Документы
Культура Документы
Design Reference
Manual
Fourth Edition
A Truly Unique Outside Plant Manual
With the release of this 4th edition of BICSI’s Customer-Owned Outside Plant (CO-OSP) Design
Manual, the name has been changed to Outside Plant Design Reference Manual (OSPDRM). In the
opinion of both the writers and the BICSI Technical Information and Methods (TI&M) Committee as a whole,
this name change reflects a broader applicability of the information contained in the manual. In today’s OSP
marketplace, the lines between customer-owned and other information transport systems (ITS) infrastructure
have blurred. Following this same trend, the need for a design reference manual specifically focused on
customer-owned facilities has become less important. The information contained within this new fourth edition
is useful for anyone who is involved in the design or construction of OSP projects. The TI&M Committee,
BICSI’s Board of Directors, and the writers of the new edition all agree that we invite a broader and more
appropriate readership by changing the name for this latest edition. With this in mind, the new 4th edition of the
OSPDRM is truly unique in many ways.
First of all, it is the next in a series of BICSI manuals revised to address global best practices, which makes it
more accommodating and beneficial not only to our United States members but to our large international
membership as well. The use of the term “BICSI best practices” rather than country specific references should
clearly indicate the efforts to achieve this goal. Please note that relevant codes and standards applying to each
chapter are listed at the backs of each, and a full and comprehensive listing of all codes, standards, and
regulations for the entire manual appear in a new Appendix A at the back of the manual.
Secondly, I had a talented Subject Matter Expert (SME) volunteer team possessed with a wealth of OSP
knowledge and a true dedication to making the fourth edition a success. Their creativeness, respect for opinions,
and common cause attitude was indeed a pleasure to witness. Please see page i of the Preface for a listing by
chapter of all their names, credentials, and organizations.
Third, and of utmost importance, is the new Chapter 2: Legal Considerations for the OSP Designer. This chapter
was a blessing in that it provides the reader with some of the potential issues and problems that the OSP
designer may encounter. As we have stated many times before, OSP is inherently dangerous and good designers
need to protect themselves and their clients from physical as well as legal damages.
And last, but certainly not least, was the excellent support of BICSI’s Publications staff, who knew enough to
stay out of the technical jargon but were also wise enough to tighten the reins when we needed it. Those
talented individuals were Lead Editor Karen Jacob; Co-Editors Joan Hersh and Nermina Miller (under
contract); Senior Editor Clarke Hammersley; and Publications Design Facilitators John Ditzel and Danielle
Fernandez. Their attitude and skills, coupled with the talent of the OSP SME team, created the dream that we
all had in the beginning: the best OSP manual ever.
However, I’d be remiss if I didn’t recognize the talents of those individuals who produced the past OSP
manuals. Their efforts created the foundation of our new manual to which we further expanded upon.
The reader will also notice that the air pressure section has been relocated to the new Chapter 13: Special
Design Considerations. This subject matter wasn’t moved to indicate that air pressure isn’t still around.
Although air pressure is not recommended for new OSP design, it still must be recognized because it’s still
out there and therefore must be addressed.
Chapter 3: Cable Types contains new charts and illustrations to further accent the use of optical fiber cable,
yet still addresses the needs and concerns of those designers that choose to use other media such as coaxial
or copper twisted-pair cables.
Chapter 7: Grounding, Bonding, and Protection inevitably had to be changed for several reasons. The first
objective was to match the new 11th edition of the BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods
Manual (TDMM) grounding and bonding chapter as closely as possible. And next, to address some of
the changes to the world of “black magic.”
Chapter 11: Cost Estimating also was revisited to update some of the methods and drawings to make for a
clearer picture for the new designer or estimator. This section should greatly improve the thoroughness of
future proposals.
And finally, Chapter 13: Special Design Considerations should be extremely beneficial to those designers with
limited experience overbuilding existing infrastructure. This chapter is an excellent beginning in an attempt to
better understand why overbuilds are not as easy as we had previously thought.
In closing, the OSP SME volunteer team hopes in some small way that this fourth edition of the OSP manual
will make the reader more aware of the complexity of OSP design and installation and that the knowledge
gained by using this new manual becomes an asset to you and your customers.
Respectfully,
John C. Adams
RCDD/OSP Specialist
TI&M OSP SMETL
Thank you for ordering the Outside Plant Design Reference Manual, 4th edition, 2007. Please place the
chapter tabs in front of the title page for each chapter. The section tabs should be inserted in front of the
following pages:
4th Edition
BICSI®, Tampa, FL 33637
© 2007 by BICSI®
All rights reserved.
Fourth edition published 2007
First printing February 2007
Printed in the United States of America
All brand names, trademarks, and registered trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
No part of this manual may be used, reproduced, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic
or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any information storage and retrieval system,
without prior agreement and written permission from the publisher.
The contents of this manual are subject to revision without notice due to continued progress in
methodology, design, and manufacturing in the information transport systems (ITS) industry.
THIS MANUAL IS SOLD AS IS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, RESPECTING THE
CONTENTS OF THIS MANUAL, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED
WARRANTIES FOR THE MANUAL’S QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY,
OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. BICSI SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO THE
PURCHASER OR ANY OTHER ENTITY WITH RESPECT TO ANY LIABILITY, LOSS, OR
DAMAGE CAUSED DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY BY THIS MANUAL.
As an ITS association, BICSI serves the industry by providing excellent opportunities to learn new
technologies through the Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD®) registration program,
Network Transport Systems (NTS), OSP, and Wireless Design (WD) Specialty enhancements,
telecommunications distribution design and installation courses, and several educational conferences each
year.
If you have questions about BICSI and its services, please contact our office at 800.242.7405 (USA and
Canada toll-free) or +1 813.979.1991; fax: +1 813.971.4311. You also may contact BICSI via e-mail
(www.bicsi.org) and our Web site (bicsi@bicsi.org). We welcome your comments about the OSPDRM.
To do so, simply complete the Reader’s Comment Form on the last page of the Preface of this manual and
return it to BICSI. Our goal is to make BICSI publications the most important design and reference tools
in your office.
It is the responsibility of the user of this manual to determine the use of the applicable local, regional, state,
or international safety and health practices associated with outside plant (OSP) installation and design
practices. BICSI shall not be liable to the purchaser or any other entity with respect to any liability, loss or
damage caused directly or indirectly by application or use of this manual. No project is so important, nor
any completion deadline so critical, to justify nonconformance to OSP industry standards. This manual
does not address safety issues associated with its use. It is the OSP professional’s responsibility to use
established and appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of all regulatory
issues.
Acknowledgments
BICSI’s Technical Information and Methods (TI&M) Committee serves to coordinate the information within
all of BICSI’s technical publications. BICSI officers, membership, and staff wish to thank the TI&M
Committee and the many Subject Matter Expert (SME) volunteer contributors who helped in the
development of the fourth edition of BICSI’s Outside Plant Design Reference Manual (OSPDRM).
The following dedicated Subject Matter Expert Team Leaders (SMETLs) and SMEs provided the
key expertise required for the development of this manual:
Chapter 2 Chapter SMETL: Meg Gibson-Henlin, BICSI Member, N2N Networks Limited
Legal Consider-
ations for the SME Contributors: Jerry L. Bowman, RCDD/NTS, CISSP, CPP, CommScope
OSP Designer Enterprise Solutions
The following BICSI Professional Development staff members produced this manual at BICSI World
Headquarters, Tampa, FL.
BICSI technical manuals primarily follow the modern metric system, known as the
International System of Units (SI). The SI is intended as a basis for worldwide standardization
of measurement units. Generally, units of measurement in this manual are expressed in SI
terms, followed by an equivalent imperial (U.S. customary) unit of measurement in
parentheses (see exceptions listed below):
• In general, SI units of measurement are converted to an imperial unit of measurement
and placed in parentheses. Exception: When the reference material from which the value
is pulled is provided in imperial units only, the imperial unit is the benchmark.
• In general, soft (approximate) conversions are used in this manual. Soft conversions
are considered reasonable and practicable; they are not precise equivalents. In some
instances, precise equivalents (hard conversions) may be used when it is a:
– Manufacturer requirement for a product.
– Standard or code requirement.
– Safety factor.
• For metric conversion practices, refer to SI 10-02 American Society for Testing and
Materials (ASTM)/Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers® (IEEE) SI 10,
American National Standard for Use of the International System of Units (SI):
The Modern Metric System.
• Trade size is approximated for both metric and nonmetric purposes. Example: 100 mm
(4 trade size).
• American wire gauge (AWG) and plywood are not assigned dual designation SI units.
Dimensions shown in association with AWGs represent the equivalent solid conductor
diameter. When used in association with flexible wires, AWG is used to represent
stranded constructions whose cross-sectional area (circular mils) is approximately
equivalent to the solid wire dimensions provided.
• In some instances (e.g., optical fiber media specifications), the physical dimensions
and operating wavelengths are designated.
• When Celsius temperatures are used, an equivalent Fahrenheit temperature is placed
in parentheses.
BICSI membership is your key to a successful career in the ITS industry. Member benefits
extend into the technical, legislative, and even the financial realms of this competitive industry.
Membership offers ample opportunities for professional networking and career development
and advancement. Membership is open to individuals and corporations serving the ITS and
building industries. Join BICSI and combine your expertise with your colleagues in the
network of ITS professionals.
Member Benefits
International Credentials
BICSI’s professional registration programs are internationally recognized.
Training
BICSI presents leading-edge technical training in all phases of ITS distribution design and
installation. These vendor-neutral courses are offered at hundreds of locations across the
country and around the world, including almost 100 BICSI Authorized Training Facilities (ATFs).
In addition, BICSI can bring its first-class training to your location. All BICSI courses are
available for on-site training. BICSI also offers a number of online courses.
BICSI members gain knowledge and continuing education credits (CECs) by attending BICSI
courses and conferences and classes.
Educational Conferences
Each year, BICSI hosts design conferences in North America, as well as regularly scheduled
conferences held in other BICSI Districts and Regions worldwide. Conferences include
presentations by leaders in the ITS industry and opportunities to network with your peers.
Technical Publications
Become a member and you will receive substantial discounts on BICSI’s highly acclaimed
manuals—long considered the definitive reference source of the industry. BICSI’s manuals
serve as valuable reference tools and detailed study guides for BICSI courses and exams.
Also available on CD-ROM, BICSI manuals are now based on global best practices that
follow and, in many cases, exceed the requirements of recognized international codes,
standards, and regulations. Our most popular publications include the Telecommunications
Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM), Network Design Reference Manual (NDRM),
Electronic Safety and Security Design Reference Manual (ESSDRM), Outside Plant
Design Reference Manual (OSPDRM), Information Transport Systems Installation
Manual (ITSIM), Wireless Design Reference Manual (WDRM), Residential Network
Cabling Manual (RNCM), AV Design Reference Manual (AVDRM) [a joint publication
with InfoComm International®]), and BICSI Information Transport Systems (ITS)
Dictionary. BICSI publishes many workbooks to complement selected manuals.
For information on how to use this manual, see the following page.
To submit comments about the BICSI Outside Plant Design Reference Manual
(OSPDRM) or for further information about BICSI, please complete the Readers
Comment Form in this section or contact:
Section Heading
Topic Heading
Figure 1.1
Title
Table of Contents
Chapter 1: Overview
Overview .................................................................................................... 1-1
Purpose ...................................................................................................... 1-3
Professionalism ......................................................................................... 1-8
SECTION 5: SPACES
Spaces .................................................................................................. 5-199
Handholes (HHs) ...................................................................................... 5-218
Pedestals, Cabinets, and Vaults ................................................................. 5-221
Controlled Environment Vault (CEV) ............................................................ 5-225
Concrete Universal Enclosure (CUE) ............................................................ 5-226
Marinas .................................................................................................. 5-227
References ............................................................................................. 5-234
Chapter 8: Right-of-Way
Right-of-Way .............................................................................................. 8-1
Property Descriptions ................................................................................... 8-9
Methods of Describing Property .................................................................... 8-10
Real Estate Law ......................................................................................... 8-27
Chain of Title ............................................................................................ 8-34
Restrictions, Covenants, and Conditions ........................................................ 8-35
Liens and Encumbrances ............................................................................. 8-36
Contents of the Private Easement Document .................................................. 8-42
Permit Information ..................................................................................... 8-43
Glossary
Index
Figures
Chapter 8: Right-of-Way
Figure 8.1 Method of township numbering ............................................ 8-11
Figure 8.2 Theoretical township numbering ........................................... 8-12
Figure 8.3 Section subdivision ............................................................ 8-14
Tables
Chapter 8: Right-of-Way
Table 8.1 Specifications for steel casing ............................................. 8-54
Examples
Chapter 8: Right-of-Way
Example 8.1 Typical state permit application ........................................... 8-44
Table of Contents
Overview
BICSI strongly advises the readership of this manual to heed the following warning.
WARNING: It is the responsibility of the user of this manual to determine and use the
applicable local safety and health practices associated with outside plant
(OSP). OSP is inherently dangerous. BICSI shall not be liable to the
purchaser or any other entity with respect to any liability, loss, or damage
caused directly or indirectly by the application or use of this manual. No
project is so important, or completion deadline so critical, to justify
nonconformance with industry standards. This manual does not address
safety issues associated with its use. It is the designer’s responsibility to use
established and appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the
applicability of all regulatory agencies.
Definition
BICSI defines OSP as the telecommunications infrastructure designed for installation exterior
to buildings and typically routed into the entrance facility (EF).
OSP may include:
• Balanced twisted-pair cabling.
• 75 ohm coaxial cabling.
• Optical fiber cabling.
• Supporting structures required to link serving facilities to outlying locations to provide for
voice, data, video, and other low-voltage systems.
Introduction
OSP became a requirement with the placement of a first telegraph system. It consisted of a
wire or a pair of wires linking two stations. From this simple beginning, OSP has expanded into
a vast global telecommunications infrastructure.
OSP facilities are designed, installed, and maintained by local access providers (APs) serving
specific geographic areas. OSP facilities located on private properties or in areas not covered
by a local AP become the customer’s responsibility. Private companies offer OSP design,
engineering, and construction and augment the construction forces of local APs.
In some countries, the AP (i.e., the provider of the physical connection) is also the service
provider (SP [i.e., the provider of the desired service]) and can be the same company.
Introduction, continued
Telecommunications deregulation gives independent contractors access to OSP contracts and
creates opportunities for qualified information transport systems (ITS) distribution designers in
today’s open and competitive market.
The designer is responsible for designing not only the intrabuilding infrastructure but also the
interbuilding infrastructure. The designer should have knowledge of the following OSP
aspects:
• Pathways and spaces
• Cabling (i.e., cable and connecting hardware)
• Grounding and bonding
• Right-of-way (R/W)
• System documentation
• Codes and standards
Purpose
Introduction
Advances in technology and high levels of technical expertise in all of the aspects of the ITS
industry have increased the importance of training. Based on current standards for OSP
network design, the methodology presented in this manual provides a useful reference to the
end users seeking design assistance or training.
Standardization
OSP networks may differ due to:
• Topography.
• Climate.
• Choice of cabling.
• Economics.
• Local code requirements.
• Network functionality.
• Current and future types of supported equipment.
• Customer requirements.
The specifics of telecommunications infrastructure may be unique; however, overall OSP
network components and methods used to complete and maintain installations are relatively
standard. Standardizing cabling installations is necessary to ensure successful performance of
increasingly complex arrangements.
Standards are beneficial because they:
• Promote design and installation consistency.
• Impose conformance to physical and transmission line requirements.
• Provide a structured telecommunications facility that enables efficient system expansion
and other changes.
• Provide for uniform documentation.
Planning
Planning the construction of an OSP network may require:
• Completing a needs assessment.
• Determining the capacity of an existing network.
• Calculating transmission requirements.
• Coordinating with APs, local authorities, and utility companies.
• Ensuring compliance with safety regulations and practices.
• Determining the need for R/W.
• Selecting the physical topology.
• Selecting a route.
• Selecting the desired cable type.
• Preparing and sending a request for information (RFI) and evaluating the responses.
Work Prints
After making planning decisions, construction drawings and specifications must be generated.
They typically consist of:
• A plan view of the area showing obstacles, control points, and other utilities.
• Notification of known hazardous conditions.
• Measurements for facility placement.
• R/W limits.
• Support structures, including:
– Conduit sizes and profile views of proposed routing.
– Maintenance holes (MHs).
– Handholes (HHs).
– Poles, support strands, and guying information.
• Media, including:
– Cable sizes, types, and gauges.
– Cable identification and pair/strand counts.
– Direction of cable placement.
– Reel identifications for cables.
• Protection, including:
– Overvoltage and overcurrent protection systems.
– Grounding and bonding plans.
Right-of-Way (R/W)
If an OSP network is going to extend beyond the property owned or controlled by the
customer:
• Leased lines from the AP may be obtainable.
• A franchise may be purchased.
• The need for R/W arises.
To continue an OSP network outside the boundaries of a customer’s property, the customer
must either buy the strip of land or obtain written permission:
• To attach to a utility provider’s pole line.
• To use a utility provider’s conduit.
• From the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) to use public R/W or other AP or utility
easements.
• From a private party to use their land.
Cabling
Cable selection depends on the customer’s needs. OSP cabling can consist of one or more of
the following cables:
• Balanced twisted-pair
• Coaxial
• Optical fiber
OSP cables are specifically designed for one or more of the following installation types:
• Aerial (e.g., lashed or self-supporting)
• Direct-buried
• Underground
Professionalism
Introduction
Keeping up with professional developments requires a designer’s commitment. A competent
designer must possess both management and business skills to be able to monitor the design
and construction of an OSP project. Some of the items that should be considered are
addressed below.
Industry-Related Organizations
To stay current, a designer should maintain a membership or certification in one or more
industry-related organizations. Following is a partial list of national and international
organizations involved in the OSP portion of telecommunications:
• American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
• American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
• BICSI®
• Comité Européen de Normalisation Electrotechnique (European Committee for
Electrotechnical Standardization [CENELEC])
• Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.® (IEEE®)
• Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (ICEA)
• International Organization for Standardization/International Electrotechnical
Commission (ISO/IEC)
• International Telecommunication Union (ITU)
• National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
• Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
• Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers, Inc. (SCTE)
• Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA)
A description of these organizations is included in Appendix A.
Table of Contents
Legal Issues
Liability in Contract
Liability in contract may be purely contractual or result from negligence. The liability in either
case is restricted to the duties as defined in the contract between or among the parties to the
contract. This is primary liability. Contracts may be oral or written. The rules of evidence
relating to contractual liability are strict.
The general rule is that written contracts cannot be varied by oral or other external evidence.
This is usually referred to as the four corners rule, or the entire contract doctrine, or an
integrated contract. This means that discussions, negotiations, and understandings accom-
plished prior to the execution of the contract are not admissible to vary the terms of the
written document.
There are circumstances in which the court may admit evidence to show that an ambiguity
exists or that other terms are incorporated by reference to other documents or discussions.
With this in mind, the designers should incorporate all of their contract terms in writing,
attaching an entire agreement or integration agreement clause. By doing so, they will ensure
that no duties other than those agreed between the designer and the client are imposed. This is
what the court will look to confirm the intention of the parties at the time of contracting.
However, the designer should keep in mind that contracts are very often premised on implied
terms. These implied terms are known as warranties. A warranty will not be found to exist in
all cases. Courts do not necessarily acknowledge an implied warranty that the design would
be suitable for the intended purpose when appropriate assurances are missing. In such a case,
the claimant has to show that the designer has been aware of the circumstances and still gave
an assurance or undertaking in the specific terms of the lawsuit.
NOTE: This kind of contractual liability exposes the design professional to third-party
liability, because warranty liability is not limited to negligent performance.
This is an area in which the doctrine of privity of contract has been eroded. The result is an
increased exposure of the design professional to third-party claims.
Warranty liability is premised on representations that the work would be done in a professional
manner—that it would not be defective and it would conform to the contract documents. The
warranty theory establishes a standard of performance rather than a standard of care
exercised by the designer and installer as the basis for liability. This liability is best understood
by recognizing the changing role of the designer and is more applicable where the designer is
a hybrid of consultant/installer, designer/installer, or an installer.
Mediation
Mediation is a nonbinding, facilitated, negotiation process. Its aim is to produce voluntary and
acceptable settlement agreements between or among the parties that are involved in a dispute.
Although the process starts out as nonbinding, once an agreement is reached and duly signed
by the parties, it becomes binding.
A mediator is a person who is trained in dispute resolution, including negotiation techniques,
and is familiar with the art of making a deal. Mediators are neutral and do not offer legal
advice, although they are actively engaged in the discussion process, including narrowing
down the issues, offering alternatives, and directing the parties toward a settlement of the
dispute.
Mediation is less expensive in part because preparing for the mediation, including the
mediator’s fees, costs less than the regular court process (e.g., the filing of pleadings,
disclosure of documents, attendance for depositions). Mediation offers more flexibility insofar
as it is not restricted or bound by the rules of law or legal precedents. Making agreements is
thus broader and less laden by the rules.
Arbitration
Arbitration is more rule-laden than mediation. In arbitration, the arbitrator is required to apply
the law relating to the particular subject matter. Although having one arbitrator is not unusual,
it is more common to have a panel of three arbitrators. At least one arbitrator is a lawyer,
whereas the others may be drawn from among the persons familiar with the dispute’s subject
matter.
References
Agostini, John. “Legal Aspects of Risk Management of Design/Build Contracts.” Web article.
a/e ProNet, 1996. www.aepronet.org/pn/vol9-no1.html (accessed January 3, 2007).
American Arbitration Association. “Dispute-WiseSM Business Management: Is Your Company
Dispute-Savvy? Study Reveals Positive Outcomes of Effective Conflict Management. Web
article. American Arbitration Association, 2004. www.adr.org/dw (accessed January 3, 2007).
Dixon, Sheila (ed.). Lessons in Professional Liability, DPIC’s Loss Prevention Handbook
for Design Professionals. Monterey, CA: DPIC, 1996.
Gumbiner, Kenneth J. “Alternative Dispute Resolution: There is a Better Way.” Web article.
a/e ProNet, 1995. www.aepronet.org/pn/vol8-no1.html (accessed January 3, 2007).
Table of Contents
Figures
Tables
Example
Example 3.1 Optical fiber attenuation margin calculations worksheet .................... 3-9
Cabling
Introduction
The information transport systems (ITS) outside plant (OSP) designer must assess customer
requirements before selecting the type and size of cabling for a proposed OSP project. These
requirements include the:
• Number of work areas and users.
• Types of equipment.
• Information to be transmitted by:
– Voice.
– Video.
– Data.
• Other low-voltage systems.
• Distance involved.
• Future growth.
• Environmental conditions.
Selecting the appropriate type and size of cable is critical to the success of an OSP design.
To determine the requirements for a job, the designer must:
• Talk with the customer. The customer should know how many users or work areas will
be served by the OSP facilities. If not, the customer or consultant must initiate a survey.
• Calculate the pair/strand requirements. Once the information is tabulated, all of the
requirements should be added back to the beginning of the route (see Figure 3.1). The
designer should begin with the building or work area point farthest from the main cross-
connection. The cable should be sized to include a growth factor of 15 to 20 percent.
Introduction, continued
Figure 3.1
Cable sizing
110 152
72 101
Bldg E Bldg D
300-pair cable
200-pair 200-pair
cable cable
65 262 155
51 173 85
Bldg G Bldg B
100-pair 200-pair
600-pair cable
cable cable
482
Once the requirements have been tabulated, the designer can then determine:
• If optical fiber cable, balanced twisted-pair cable, or both are appropriate.
• How many pairs of balanced twisted-pair or strands of optical fiber are required.
• If there is a need for coaxial cable.
This chapter discusses the types of cable available along with their transmission
characteristics, construction specifications, cable coding descriptions, and advantages and
disadvantages. Methods for selecting the suitable optical fiber, balanced twisted-pair, or
coaxial cable also are addressed.
Recognized Cable
Cable Types
With the myriad of telecommunications services available, one particular cabling plan may not
be suitable to serve all of the resulting needs. Time, money, performance, and equipment
specifications become the determining factors in the selection process.
Currently, recognized cable includes:
• Singlemode optical fiber (OS1).
• 50/125 μm multimode optical fiber (OM2 and OM3).
• 62.5/125 μm multimode optical fiber (OM1).
• 100 ohm balanced twisted-pair.
• 75 ohm coaxial.
Introduction
Optical fiber technology is economically feasible and beneficial for use in most telecommu-
nications systems, especially when cabling extends between buildings on a campus. While
balanced twisted-pair cabling often is placed between buildings to support and provide
telephony (voice) applications services, optical fiber cabling often is used to supplement the
balanced twisted-pair cabling to support other high-bandwidth applications.
In campus backbone environments, optical fiber is used between buildings for:
• Voice.
• Video.
• Data.
• Audio.
• CATV.
• Security and fire alarms.
In campus applications, it is an advantage to use optical fiber in backbones because of its
ability to serve several different transmission protocols and topologies by offering:
• Increased distance.
• Higher bandwidth applications.
• All-dielectric cable.
• Less susceptibility to EMI and lightning.
• No crosstalk.
• No grounding (earthing) requirement for all-dielectric cable.
A properly planned system can anticipate growth and provide network flexibility and longevity
for:
• Voice.
• Data.
• Video.
• Audio.
• CATV.
• Multimedia.
Often, a backbone comprising both multimode and singlemode optical fiber is recommended
to satisfy present and future needs in the backbone.
Introduction, continued
For backbone applications, the components in Table 3.1 are recognized.
Table 3.1
Optical fiber cable performance by type
Classification Optical Fiber Type Performance
Introduction, continued
Connectors must meet applicable requirements and environmental conditions for areas where
they are installed (e.g., Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard [FOCIS]). The
subscriber connector (SC) interface, both duplex (568SC) and simplex (SC), is recognized
by many cabling standards for use as backbone and horizontal connectivity (see Figure 3.2).
Alternate connector designs such as small form factor (SFF) connectors and adapters that
meet applicable cabling standards requirements also may be used.
Figure 3.2
Duplex subscriber connector interface
Simplex connectors
B A A B A
Horizontally mounted
B
B A
A B
B
Vertically mounted OR
Duplex connector A
Pa A
B pa tch
ne B
A l
Cabling side
User side
= Position A
= Position B
Multimode fibers frequently are referred to by the core and cladding diameter in micrometers
(μm). For example, a multimode optical fiber with a core diameter of 62.5 μm and a cladding
diameter of 125 μm typically is designated as 62.5/125 μm optical fiber.
Attenuation
The maximum permissible end-to-end system attenuation in a given link is determined by the
average transmitter power and receiver sensitivity. To analyze a system’s attenuation and
determine if the proposed electronics will operate over the cable plant, the steps illustrated in
Table 3.2 and Example 3.1 should be used and then the minimum system loss should be
checked.
NOTE: Ensure the test setup simulates the actual system. (Use the jumpers or at least
include their losses in final calculations.)
Table 3.2
Calculating the optical fiber attenuation margin
Attenuation, continued
Example 3.1
Optical fiber attenuation margin calculations worksheet
Step
1 Calculate optical fiber loss Cable distance 1.5 km
at operating wavelength Individual optical fiber loss × 1.5 dB/km
Total fiber loss 2.25 dB
2 Calculate connector loss Connector pair loss 0.75 dB
(exclude transmit and Number of connector pairs × 4
receive connectors) Total connector loss 3.0 dB
3 Calculate splice loss Individual splice loss 0.3 dB
Number of splices × 3
Total splice loss 0.9 dB
4 Calculate other components Total components (none) 0.0 dB
loss
5 Calculate total passive Total fiber loss 2.3 dB
cable system attenuation Total connector loss + 3.0 dB
Total splice loss + 0.9 dB
Total components + 0.0 dB
Total system attenuation 6.2 dB
Attenuation, continued
Example 3.1
Optical fiber attenuation margin calculations worksheet, continued
Step
5 Example manufacturer’s System wavelength 1300 nm
electronic specifications Fiber type 62.5/125 μm
multimode
Average transmitter output – 18.0 dBm
Receiver sensitivity (109 BER) – 31.0 dBm
Receiver dynamic range 11.0 dB
6 Calculate system gain Average transmitter power 18.0 dBm
Receiver sensitivity – 31.0 dBm
System gain 13.0 dB
7 Determine power penalties Operating margin (none stated) 2.0 dB
Receiver power penalties + 0.0 dB
(none stated)
Repair margin (2 fusion + 0.6 dB
splices at 0.3 dB each)
Total power penalties 2.6 dB
8 Calculate link loss budget System gain 13.0 dB
Power penalties – 2.6 dB
Total link loss budget 10.4 dB
Part C. Verifying Performance
9 Calculate system performance Link loss budget 10.4 dB
margin to verify adequate Passive cable system attenuation – 6.2 dB
power System performance margin 4 .2 dB
NOTE: 4.2 is greater than 0. Therefore, the system will operate as installed.
Attenuation, continued
Attenuation, continued
Table 3.3
Calculating losses
Optical fiber cable loss Multiply the length of the proposed link by the
normalized cable attenuation in dB/km for the optical
fiber at the operating system wavelength.
NOTE: Temperature may affect the loss of the
optical fiber cable. See Effects of
Temperature on Optical Fiber Loss.
Connector loss Add the individual attenuation values in dB for
every connector pair along the optical fiber route,
from transmitter to receiver, excluding the transmitter
and receiver connectors (see Connector Loss Values).
NOTE: When choosing link lengths that require more
than two connectors, selecting the lowest
loss connector may be important in order to
stay within the loss budget.
Splice loss Add the individual local attenuation values in dB
for every splice along the optical fiber route, from
transmitter to receiver (see Splice Loss Values).
Other component Add the attenuation values of any other components
(e.g., passive stars) that contribute to losses in the
optical fiber route, from transmitter to receiver.
dB = Decibel
k m = Kilometer
Add the values for each of these losses to get the total passive cabling.
NOTE: Example calculations for the passive cabling system attenuation and its four
components are shown in Example 3.1.
Attenuation, continued
Table 3.4
Splice loss values in decibels
Multimode Singlemode
Splice Type Average Maximum Average Maximum
Attenuation, continued
Table 3.5 explains how to calculate the system gain, power penalties, and link loss budget.
Table 3.5
System gain, power penalties, and the link loss budget calculations
System gain Subtract the receiver sensitivity in dBm from the transmitter
average power in dBm. This gives the maximum allowable loss in
dBm between the transmitter and receiver.
Power penalties Add the loss values for the:
• Operating margin*—This loss accounts for:
– Variations in transmitter center wavelength.
– Changes in transmitter average power and
receiver sensitivity that result from age.
– Variations in component temperature within the
operating range of the system.
• If the system manufacturer does not specify the
operating margin, use values of:
– 2 dB for light-emitting diodes (LEDs).
– 3 dB for lasers.
• Receiver power penalty*—Some manufacturers may specify
other power penalties (dispersion, jitter, bandwidth, or clock
recovery) that must be subtracted from the system gain. If these
are provided, they must be subtracted from the available system
gain.
• Repair margin*—If the cable is located where it could be cut or
damaged by accident, allow sufficient loss margin in the design
to accommodate at least two repair splices. If the cable is in a
high-risk area or an area where rerouting is anticipated, the
designer may decide to allow for more than two splices.
Link loss budget* Subtract the total value in dB for all of the power penalties from the
system gain. The result is the link loss budget.
dB = Decibel
dBm = Decibel milliwatt
* In some cases, the electronics manufacturer already will have calculated the link loss
budget. In these instances, it is usually safe to assume the operating margin (i.e.,
transmitter aging) and receiver power penalties have been included in the manufacturer’s
calculations. However, the repair margin usually is not included in a manufacturer’s link loss
budget calculations, unless the product documentation specifically states a repair margin.
When the manufacturer does not state a repair margin, the system designer must subtract it
from the system gain to determine the link loss budget.
Attenuation, continued
Attenuation, continued
Table 3.6
Minimum system loss
If additional loss is required in a given link, it is easy to add an appropriate link attenuator to
the system. Attenuators are devices that can be inserted into optical fiber transmission
systems, usually at a point where there is a connector, to introduce additional loss. The two
types of attenuators are:
• Fixed attenuators, which can cause a specific level of additional loss.
• Variable attenuators, which can be tuned to a given link.
Final Analysis
The designer can determine whether the minimum loss criteria are met by measuring the
attenuation of each link after it is installed.
Attenuation, continued
Table 3.7
Supportable distances and channel insertion loss for optical fiber applications by optical fiber type
Attenuation, continued
Table 3.7
Supportable distances and channel insertion loss for optical fiber applications by optical fiber type,
continued
1 A worst-case source coupling loss of 4.7 dB is used when coupling 50/125 μm optical fiber to an LED source
optimized for use with 62.5/125 μm optical fiber. This coupling loss is based on the theoretical maximum
coupling loss. 10BASE-FL specifies 5.7 dB maximum coupling loss into 50/125 μm optical fiber. Token ring,
FDDI (low cost), FDDI, and 100BASE-FX specify 5.0 dB maximum coupling loss into 50/125 μm optical fiber.
2 NST (nonstandard) entries indicate where this standard does not specify support for the media, but where
equipment is commonly available to convert the native application signals to a form compatible with the non-
native media.
3 300 m (984 ft) capability specified in Fibre Channel update, FC-PH-2.
4 For 62.5/125 μm optical fiber, IEEE specifies 220 m (721 ft) for 160/500 MHz•km modal bandwidth and
275 m (902 ft) for optical fiber with 200/500 MHz•km modal bandwidth.
5 For 50/125 μm optical fiber, IEEE specifies 500 m (1640 ft) for 400/400 MHz•km modal bandwidth and 550 m
(1804 ft) for 500/500 MHz•km modal bandwidth.
6 Power budget and distance capability depend on classification option of transmitter and receiver. Distance
specified is for the highest power budget option.
7 This is a laser-based application. When not so noted, multimode applications are LED-based.
8 Maximum channel insertion loss based on channel insertion loss plus unallocated margin from IEEE 802.3z.
NOTE: Distances for specific implementations should be verified with application standards.
Attenuation, continued
Table 3.8
Supportable distances and channel insertion loss for optical fiber applications by fiber type
850 nm 850 nm
Laser-Opt. Laser-Opt.
62.5/125 50/125 50/125 62.5/125 50/125 50/125
μm μm μm 3 μm μm μm 3
10/100BASE-SX 850 300 300 300 NST 4.0 4.0 4.0 NST
10GBASE-S 850 26 4 82 5 300 NST 2.6 6,7 2.3 6,8 2.6 NST
10GBASE-L 1310 NST NST NST 10 000 9
NST NST NST 6.0
10GBASE-E 1550 NST NST NST 40 000 NST NST NST 11.0 10
10GBASE-LX4 1300 300 300 11 300 — 2.5 6,12 2.0 6,12 2.0 6,12 —
10GBASE-LX4 1310 — — — 10 000 — — — 6.6 6
dB = Decibel
m = Meter
nm = Nanometer
1 NST (nonstandard) entries indicate where this standard does not recognize use of the media, but
where equipment may be available to convert the native application signals to a form compatible with the
nonnative media.
2 Specifications shown in this table are for ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 recognized optical fiber types. Specifications
for other nonrecognized types of optical fibers are included in these footnotes where applicable.
3 850-nm laser-optimized 50/125 μm multimode optical fiber supports the same maximum channel distances
and insertion losses as 500/500 MHz•km 50/125 μm multimode optical fiber for applications specified within
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
4 For 62.5/125 μm optical fiber, IEEE specifies 26 m (85 ft) for optical fiber with 160/500 MHz•km modal
bandwidth and 33 m (108 ft) for optical fiber with 200/500 MHz•km modal bandwidth.
5 For 50/125 μm optical fiber, IEEE specifies 66 m (216 ft) for optical fiber with 400/400 MHz•km modal
bandwidth and 82 m (269 ft) for optical fiber with 500/500 MHz•km modal bandwidth.
6 Includes maximum channel insertion loss plus additional allowable insertion loss.
7 For 62.5/125 μm multimode optical fiber, IEEE specifies 2.6 dB for optical fiber with 160/500 MHz•km modal
bandwidth and 2.5 dB for optical fiber with 200/500 MHz•km modal bandwidth.
8 For 50/125 μm multimode optical fiber, IEEE specifies 2.2 dB for optical fiber with 400/400 MHz•km modal
bandwidth and 2.3 dB for optical fiber with 500/500 MHz•km modal bandwidth.
9 Channels are specified within ANSI/TIA/EIA-TIA-568-B.1 up to 3 km (9840 ft). Distances provided within this
table are the maximum distances specified within IEEE 802.3 and invoke cabling specifications that may
differ from 568B.3.
10 10GBASE-E channels are specified to have a minimum of 5 dB and maximum of 11 dB channel insertion
loss.
11 For 50/125 μm multimode optical fiber, IEEE specifies 240 m (787 ft) for optical fiber with 400/400 MHz•km
modal bandwidth and 300 m (984 ft) for optical fiber with 500/500 MHz•km modal bandwidth.
12 The maximum channel insertion loss is allowed to be up to 0.5 dB higher than the value shown when
including loss from mode conditioning patch cords.
Figure 3.3
Loose tube cable cross section
Central member
Fiber bundle
Tensile strength
member
Inner sheath
Outer sheath
(optional)
Tight-Buffered Cables
Tight-buffered fibers generally have a 900 μm coating applied directly to the optical fiber.
Some applications for tight-buffered cable are:
• Intrabuilding backbone.
• Horizontal distribution.
• Patch cords and equipment cables.
• Armored constructions for use in direct-buried applications.
• All dielectric constructions for use in aerial and underground applications.
• Limited listings for use within buildings according to some national codes, standards, and
regulations as qualified by NRTL requirements.
Tight-buffered cables are usually more sensitive to adverse temperatures and outside forces
than loose tube cables and are desirable because of their:
• Increased physical flexibility.
• Smaller bend radius for low optical fiber count cables.
• Easier handling characteristics in low optical fiber counts.
• Readiness for connectorization.
Two typical constructions of tight-buffered cables (see Figure 3.4) are:
• Distribution design, which has a single jacket protecting all the tight-buffered optical
fibers.
• Breakout design, which has an individual jacket for each tight-buffered optical fiber.
The distribution design cables are recommended for typical installations because of lower cost
and smaller diameter. Generally, large optical fiber count distribution cables are constructed in
a unitized design in which an inner jacket is placed around units of 6 or 12 fibers.
In outdoor environments, cables recommended by the manufacturer for outdoor use should be
used. Loose tube cables often are recommended because they:
• Are rugged.
• Are specified to operate over a wide temperature range.
• Allow higher optical fiber densities per sheath size than tight-buffered designs. Where
duct space is limited, this becomes a significant factor.
Figure 3.4
Tight-buffered cables
Fiber
Fiber
Buffer
Buffer
Tensile strength
Tensile member
strength
member Subunit
jacket
Tensile strength
member
Outer Outer
Central jacket jacket
Central
member member
Ribbon Fiber
Ribbon fiber designs can be single tube or multitube, much like the designs for bundled fiber.
The only difference is that the fiber is bound in a flat array or ribbon.
This design incorporates several fibers, usually 12, into a ribbon. One or more of these ribbons
are enclosed inside a water-blocked central tube. Water blocking may be accomplished by gel
or water-blocking tapes or powders.
Water-blocking strength members surround the central tube to provide tensile strength.
Strength members may be dielectric or metallic. A protective outer jacket is applied overall.
Armor and jacket options make the design suitable for use in indoor and outdoor, direct burial,
underground conduit, and aerial installations.
Some advantages of this design are that:
• It is suitable for mass fusion splicing.
• The design has a high fiber density and compact size.
• It provides excellent mechanical protection of fibers.
• It is a mature, proven design.
A disadvantage of the design is a higher initial cost due to the added step of ribbonizing.
Blown Fiber
A blown fiber network utilizes a point-to-point infrastructure of microtubes used in lieu of
traditional innerduct and conduit systems to form the topology between buildings and within
buildings. The tubes (tube cables) are left empty in order to blow any type of fiber bundles
when and where they are needed via compressed air. Fiber bundles can be blown into any
route of connected tubes.
Figure 3.5
Tube cable
Polyethylene outer
jacket
5 mm (0.2 in) OD
3.5 mm (0.14 in) ID
Co-extruded low
friction linear
ID = Inside diameter
in = Inch
mm = Millimeter
OD = Outside diameter
OSP = Outside plant
Most blown fiber systems publish maximum blowing distances of 1 km (3280 ft) without
employing advanced blowing techniques. Advanced blowing techniques, such as a midspan
blow, will enable a fiber unit to be blown much greater distances.
1. Fiber bundle design—Being a nondark fiber system, the first question that needs
to be addressed is how many fibers will be lit day one. Designing the number of
fiber units to the lit fibers day one is crucial, for this system does not require an
overbuild of dark fibers.
2. Tube cable design—Crucial to the system life cycle, first map the tube cable to
the installation environment; second, design dark tubes for the future and moves,
adds, or changes (MACs). Typically, a 3:1 ratio (i.e., three tubes to every fiber
unit) at a minimum will satisfy any charted or uncharted growth.
3. Tube distribution hardware—TDEs or TDUs should be installed wherever two or
more tube cables meet, except at in-line or straight-through splices. The
enclosure must represent the installation and environmental requirements.
4. Tube cable plant interconnection design—This ensures a successful end-to-end
cabling system design and route identification of dark tubes and lit blown fiber
tubes. The interconnection plan enables fewer MACs.
5. Fiber distribution hardware—Fiber distribution hardware can be wall or rack
mounted units typically used in conventional optical cable. Action must be taken
to provide protection for the fiber units.
6. Miscellaneous parts, tools, and equipment—Depending on the application,
installation environment, local or national codes, and other issues, this section
should list any miscellaneous concerns.
7. Overall costs.
Since a blown fiber system is a long-term investment, providing increased system life cycle
versus conventional optical cable, it is the designer’s responsibility to be able to articulate the
total installed costs, including materials, installation, termination, maintenance, and MACs.
Hybrid Cables
Hybrid cables, often referred to as composite cables, can contain combinations of copper
pairs, optical fibers, coaxial cables, and other low-voltage conductors. Environments for hybrid
cables are:
• Long haul.
• Premises.
• Campus.
OSP cables for long-haul applications are available with voice-grade balanced copper twisted-
pairs. These pairs may be used for convenience in long-haul situations with a remotely located
splice point or to power network equipment. As premises applications are relatively short,
these pairs usually are not required.
Cable Specifications
Manufacturer-specific specifications generally allow ordering of optical fiber cable with the
following characteristic options:
• Optical fiber design:
– Multimode
– Singlemode
– Singlemode, dispersion shifted
– Singlemode, dispersion unshifted
– Singlemode, low water peak
– Singlemode, zero water peak (ZWP)
• Cable core design:
– Filled
– Dry water block
– Nonfilled
• Sheath design:
– Optical power ground wire (OPGW)
– All-dielectric self-support (ADSS)
– Dielectric
– Self-supporting
– Armored self-supporting
– Metallic
Color Coding
Individual optical fibers are identifiable by established color codes. An example of a common
color-code scheme is shown in Table 3.9.
Table 3.9
Example of color coding—individual optical fibers
Fiber Color
1 Blue
2 Orange
3 Green
4 Brown
5 Slate
6 White
7 Red
8 Black
9 Yellow
10 Violet
11 Rose
12 Aqua
In this example of loose tube optical fiber cables with more than 12 fibers, the fibers are
grouped within color-coded tubes. Each tube contains a specified number of fibers, typically
6, 8, 12, or 24. The tubes are color coded using the same color code for optical fiber (e.g., the
first tube is blue, the second is orange). The fibers within the tube would use the specified
color code. When a cable contains both singlemode and multimode optical fibers, singlemode
fibers typically are contained within the first group of tubes unless otherwise requested.
NOTE: In cables with 24 optical fibers, some manufacturers use a white and a black or
gray tube. The first group of fibers, or the singlemode fibers, may be grouped within
the white tube.
For tight-buffered cables with more than 12 optical fibers, the fibers are grouped within
sequentially numbered tubes typically containing either 6 or 12 fibers. The fibers within the
tube use the color code shown in Table 3.9. Where the cable contains both singlemode and
multimode fibers, the singlemode fibers typically are grouped within sequentially numbered
yellow tubes, while the multimode fibers are grouped within sequentially numbered orange
tubes.
Introduction
Balanced twisted-pair copper cabling is feasible and applicable for a wide range of
telecommunications systems, including telephony, data, premises, and special applications.
In interbuilding backbone environments, balanced twisted-pair cabling is used between
buildings for:
• Voice.
• Data.
• Security and fire alarms.
Selection Criteria
Resistance Design
Traditional balanced twisted-pair cable selection is based on resistance design of the cable.
Balanced twisted-pair cable exhibits a resistance to current flow, measured in ohms; they
typically are available in up to four sizes that may be defined in American wire gauge (AWG)
or metric equivalent sizes: 19 AWG [0.91 mm (0.036 in)], 22 AWG [0.64 mm (0.025 in)],
24 AWG [0.51 mm (0.020 in)], and 26 AWG [0.41 mm (0.016 in)]. The gauge of the wire is
proportionate to its resistance per unit length at a specified temperature.
The length of a cable loop from the switch to a customer depends on three factors:
• Resistance of the cable in ohms
• Signaling limits of the telephone and terminating device switch in ohms
• Pair loading
Since every customer in a loop (see Table 3.10) potentially could require a different resistance
design, the telephone industry developed a transmission design standard known as gauge
coding area number (GACAN).
GACAN was developed to eliminate individual circuit design and to identify distances that a
specific gauge or combination of gauges could serve. The use of a resistance design
worksheet is typical for traditional copper loop design. GACAN limits usage to no more than
two cable gauges.
Table 3.10
Loop gauging table
26
26 24
24
24 22
1 2 3 4 5
1300 2.4 (7.8) 4.8 (15.6) 6.0 (19.8) 7.4 (24.4) 9.0 (29.6)
The second factor in loop design is the transmission signaling limits of the switch. These limits
are based on the switch’s ability to deliver signaling at various loop lengths. Earlier switch
platforms could service loops that exhibited resistance of up to 1300 . Depending on the cable
AWG makeup, the resistance of the loop length would vary. As switch technology evolved, the
resistance design limits increased to 1500, 1800, and 2100 , allowing greater loop lengths.
The third factor impacting loop design is pair loading. A load coil is a device designed to
counter the effect of capacitance buildup in loop lengths over 5.5 km (3.4 miles [mi]). The
capacitance buildup within a pair is the primary reason for the manufacturing of low
capacitance (cap) cable. The effect of pair loading has become a major reason for the
development of current serving area design parameters for local loops.
Table 3.11
Cable transmission characteristics
Insulation
OSP cables are available in many configurations. Insulation types for conductors are listed in
Table 3.12.
Table 3.12
Insulation types
Table 3.13
Cable composition types
Table 3.13
Cable composition types, continued
NOTE: Lead-based cables are no longer available for purchase but are still in service in
some outdoor areas.
© 2007 BICSI® 3-37 OSP Design Reference Manual, 4th edition
Chapter 3: Cable Types
Table 3.14
Cable sheath compositions
Table 3.14
Cable sheath compositions, continued
Table 3.15
Cable usage guide
ALVYN No No No Yes
ALPETH, CALPETH, Yes No No No
CUPETH
Filled ALPETH, Yes Yes* Yes No
Filled GOPETH
Self-support Yes No No No
Reinforced self-support Yes No No No
Filled self-support Yes No No No
PASP Yes Yes Yes No
Filled ASP, Filled CASP Yes Yes Yes No
STALPETH No No Yes No
Ductpic No No Yes No
*Suitable for direct burial installation in areas where the risk of damage from rodents or
environmental hazards is low. If you have questions regarding the suitability of a specific cable
design for your application, consult the manufacturer.
Table 3.16
Common color code
Number Pair Color Code 25-Pair Group (or Subgroup)
Sequence Tip Ring Binder Color Code
NOTE: Copper cables in excess of 900 pairs will utilize various color schemes to identify
super groups. See specific manufacturer for color-coding schemes. A super group
consists of 600 pair increments. A master group consists of 3000 pair increments.
Aerial Cable
The three methods for placing cable on pole lines are to:
• Lash new cable to a new support strand.
• Overlash new cable to an existing support strand/cable.
• Use a self-supporting type cable that contains a support strand.
Placing new cable on an existing pole line is typically the least expensive method compared
with direct-buried and underground.
The ALPETH cable shown in Figure 3.6 is used primarily in aerial applications. The use of air
core cables in nonpressurized underground installations is discouraged in areas where moisture
is present.
ALPETH consists of:
• Solid annealed bare copper in 19 AWG [0.91 mm (0.036 in)], 22 AWG [0.64 mm
(0.025 in)], 24 AWG [0.51 mm (0.020 in)], or 26 AWG [0.41 mm (0.016 in)].
• Color-coded PIC insulation.
• Pairs of conductors assembled with varying twists to minimize crosstalk.
• Color-coded unit binders.
• Nonhygroscopic dielectric core wrap.
• A 0.2 mm (0.008 in) aluminum tape wrapped along the length of the cable.
• Periodic markings on the cable that include a telephone handset icon, cable code, pair size,
AWG, date of manufacture, and sequential length marking.
Figure 3.6
ALPETH cable
Polyethylene
jacket
Solid
insulated
conductors
Corrugated
Core aluminum
wrap shield
Table 3.17
ALPETH cable
Nominal Nominal
Outside Approximate Outside Approximate
Pair Diameter Weight Pair Diameter Weight
Count mm (in) kg/km (lbs/kft) Count mm (in) kg/km (lbs/kft)
BHBA - 19 AWG [0.90 mm (0.036 in)] BKTA - 26 AWG [0.41 mm (0.016 in)]
25 21 (0.81) 483 (324) 25 12 (0.46) 140 (94)
50 27 (1.07) 882 (592) 50 15 (0.60) 231 (155)
100 37 (1.47) 1700 (1141) 100 19 (0.73) 399 (268)
200 51 (1.99) 3226 (2166 200 24 (0.96) 721 (484)
300 61 (2.39) 4726 (3173) 300 28 (1.10) 1037 (696)
BHAA- 22 AWG [0.64 mm (0.025 in)] 400 32 (1.24) 1345 (903)
25 15 (0.61) 273 (183) 600 39 (1.52) 2005 (1346)
50 20 (0.78) 478 (321) 900 47 (1.84) 2921 (1961)
100 26 (1.03) 873 (586) 1200 53 (2.09) 3897 (2576)
200 36 (1.42) 1683 (1130) 1500 59 (2.31) 4744 (3185)
300 43 (1.69) 2446 (1642) 1800 63 (2.47) 5643 (3788
400 49 (1.91) 3195 (2145) 2100 68 (2.69) 6533 (4384)
600 58 (2.30) 4689 (3148) 2700 77 (3.05) 8316 (5583)
900 72 (2.84) 6895 (4629)
BKMA - 24 AWG [0.51 mm (0.020 in)]
25 13 (0.52) 194 (130)
AWG = American Wire Gauge
50 17 (0.66) 329 (221) in = Inch
kft = Kilofoot
100 22 (0.88) 587 (394) kg = Kilogram
km = Kilometer
200 29 (1.13) 1084 (728) lb = Pound
mm = Millimeter
300 35 (1.38) 1616 (1085)
400 39 (1.54) 2103 (1412)
600 46 (1.83) 3066 (2058)
900 56 (2.21) 4494 (3017)
1200 66 (2.60) 5920 (3974)
1500 73 (2.88) 7329 (4920)
1800 78 (3.08) 8734 (5863
Self-Supporting Cable
The self-supporting cable shown in Figure 3.7 is intended for aerial applications. It is
sometimes referred to as figure eight cable. Its benefits include:
• Lower installation costs compared with lashing non-self-supporting cable.
• Reduced chance for corrosion of the support strand. In self-supporting cables, the support
strand becomes an integral part of the cable. The support strand is attached to the basic
cable by a web formed during the jacketing process. This makes it more suitable for
applications where corrosive atmospheres exist (e.g., industrial complexes, coastal areas).
Self-supporting cable consists of:
• Solid annealed bare copper in 19 AWG [0.91 mm (0.036 in)], 22 AWG [0.64 mm
(0.025 in)], 24 AWG [0.51 mm (0.020 in)], or 26 AWG [0.41 mm (0.016 in)].
• Color-coded PIC insulation.
• Pairs of conductors assembled with varying twists to minimize crosstalk.
• Color-coded unit binders.
• Nonhygroscopic dielectric core wrap
• A 0.2 mm (0.008 in) aluminum tape wrapped along the length of the cable. As an
alternative, cables larger than 20 mm (0.8 in) in diameter may utilize a copolymer coated
aluminum shield that fuses to the jacket.
• A high-strength support strand with flooding compound, typically 6.3 mm (0.25 in)
galvanized steel.
• A black polyethylene jacket that joins the cable and strand together.
• Periodic markings on the cable that include code, pair size, date, length, manufacturer, and
telephone handset
Figure 3.7
Self-supporting cable
Polyethylene
jacket
Support
strand
Corrugated
Core aluminum
wrap
Solid
insulated
conductors
Table 3.18
Self-supporting cable
Nominal
Outside Diameter Approximate
Part Pair mm (in) Weight
Number Count Minor Major kg/km (lbs/kft)
Figure 3.8
Reinforced self-supporting cable
Polyethylene
self-support
jacket
Polyethylene
Support
strand
Corrugated
steel
Corrugated
aluminum
Plastic
core wrap
Solid
insulated
conductors
Table 3.19
Reinforced self-supporting cable
Nominal
Outside Diameter Approximate
Pair mm (in) Weight
Count Minor Major kg/km (lbs/kft)
Direct-Buried Cable
Overview
Direct-buried OSP cables are subject to different and harsher environmental conditions than
those of aerial or underground (in conduit) cables. Moisture, rodent damage, and lightning are
some areas that must be addressed when installing direct-buried cables. These designs require
that the jacket’s raw material be a suitable grade polyethylene containing an antioxidant to
provide long-term stabilization and a concentration of furnace black for protection against
ultraviolet (UV) rays.
Variations to the designs shown may or may not alter the expected performance of the cable.
Product designs should be verified as suitable for the intended environment. The cable
manufacturer should be contacted for questions regarding product suitability in specific
environments.
Following guidelines address materials commonly used in direct-buried OSP environments.
Various shielding systems suitable for direct burial installations types are discussed. Variations
in designs (e.g., cellular versus solid polyolefin insulation, flat versus corrugated shields, or
coated versus bare metallic shield tapes) are not significant for most installations. The designs
discussed here are mature, proven designs and have been utilized for many years. When
installed in locations having a low to moderate risk of damage from the environment, typical
OSP cables are designed for a life expectancy of 30 years. It is common for cables to provide
trouble free service for much longer.
Figure 3.9
PASP type design
Outer
polyethylene
Inner jacket
polyethylene
jacket
Solid
insulated
conductors
Corrugated steel
with copolymer
adhesive coating
Corrugated
Core aluminum
wrap shield
Table 3.20
PASP cables
Nominal Approximate Nominal Approximate
Pair Outside Diameter Weight Pair Outside Diameter Weight
Count mm (in) kg/km (lbs/kft) Count mm (in) kg/km (lbs/kft)
BHBH - 19 AWG [0.91 mm (0.036 in)] BKTH - 26 AWG [0.41 mm (0.016 in)]
25 24 (0.95) 611 (410) 25 15 (0.59) 212 (142)
50 30 (1.18) 1062 (713) 50 18 (0.70) 325 (218)
100 40 (1.58) 1962 (1317) 100 22 (0.87) 526 (353)
200 56 (2.20) 3611 (2424) 200 28 (1.09) 898 (603)
300 66 (2.60) 5209 (3497) 300 32 (1.25) 1283 (861)
BHAH - 22 AWG [0.64 mm (0.025 in)] 400 36 (1.42) 1647 (1106)
25 19 (0.77) 371 (249) 600 42 (1.65) 2346 (1575)
50 23 (0.91) 611 (410) 900 50 (1.97) 3347 (2347)
100 30 (1.18) 1062 (713) 1200 57 (2.25) 4335 (2910)
200 41 (1.60) 1965 (1319) 1500 63 (2.49) 5306 (3562)
300 47 (1.87) 2805 (1883) 1800 67 (2.65) 6282 (4217)
400 53 (2.10) 3612 (2475) 2100 79 (3.10) 7214 (4843)
600 63 (2.49) 5222 (3506) 2400 80 (3.12) 8141 (5465)
900 75 (2.97) 7567 (5080) 2700 80 (3.30) 8706 (5850)
1200 86 (3.40) 9833 (6601)
BKMH - 24 AWG [0.51 mm (0.020 in)] AWG = American Wire Gauge
in = Inch
25 17 (0.66) 277 (186) kft = Kilofoot
kg = Kilogram
50 21 (0.81) 439 (295) km = Kilometer
lb = Pound
100 26 (1.01) 740 (493) mm = Millimeter
Figure 3.10
Filled ASP type cable
Polyethylene
jacket
Conductor
filling
compound
Corrugated
coated steel
Corrugated
coated
Foam skin Core
aluminum
insulated wrap
conductors
Table 3.21
Filled ASP type cable
Nominal Nominal
Outside Approximate Outside Approximate
Pair Diameter Weight Pair Diameter Weight
Count mm (in) kg/km (lbs/kft) Count mm (in) kg/km (lbs/kft)
ANBW - 19 AWG [0.91 mm (0.036 in)] ANMW - 24 AWG [0.51 mm (0.020 in)]
25 23 (0.91) 666 (447) 25 15 (0.59) 276 (185)
50 29 (1.16) 1168 (784) 50 18 (0.70) 450 (302)
100 40 (1.58) 2161 (1451) 100 24 (0.95) 767 (515)
200 55 (2.16) 4070 (2732) 200 32 (1.25) 1363 (915)
300 66 (2.60) 5921 (3975) 300 38 (1.50) 1978 (1328)
ANAW - 22 AWG [0.64 mm (0.025 in)] 400 42 (1.64) 2553 (1714)
25 18 (0.70) 386 (259) 600 51 (2.00) 3702 (2485)
50 22 (0.87) 646 (434) 900 60 (2.38) 5386 (3616)
100 29 (1.16) 1137 (763) 1200 69 (2.70) 7177 (4818)
200 38 (1.50) 2111 (1417) 1500 77 (3.04) 8851 (5944)
300 45 (1.75) 3051 (2048) 1800 83 (3.28) 10,528 (7068)
400 52 (2.04) 3968 (2664) 2100 89 (3.50) 12,127 (8141)
600 63 (2.49) 5774 (3876) ANTW - 26 AWG [0.40 mm (0.016 in)]
900 77 (3.04) 8440 (5666) 25 13 (0.52) 210 (141)
1200 88 (3.46) 11,132 (7473) 50 16 (0.63) 329 (221)
100 20 (0.80) 535 (359)
Direct-Buried, continued
Some of the more common types of filled solid ALPETH cables are described in Table 3.22.
Table 3.22
PE 39—Filled solid ALPETH cable
Nominal Nominal
Outside Approximate Outside Approximate
Pair Diameter Weight Pair Diameter Weight
Count mm (in) kg/km (lbs/kft) Count mm (in) kg/km (lbs/kft)
Underground Cable
Overview
OSP cables installed in underground conduit are often referred to as underground cables.
Underground conduit provides a protected environment for the cable eliminating the need for
physically robust shielding systems required for direct-buried installations.
These cable designs may utilize solid PIC or DEPIC style insulation. They may utilize coated
or bare metal tapes applied flat or with corrugations. They must be capable of providing
adequate mechanical protection for this environment. A filled cable design is highly
recommended for this environment as moisture continues to be a concern. Nearly all conduits
contain water or will contain water at some point. Designs well suited for underground conduit
installations are described below.
Figure 3.11
Filled ALPETH type cable
Polyethylene
jacket
Filling
Solid compound
insulated
conductors
Coated
Core corrugated
wrap aluminum
Table 3.23
Filled ALPETH type cable
Nominal Approximate
Pair Outside Diameter Weight
Count mm (in) kg/km (lbs/kft)
Figure 3.12
Underground (ductpic) cable
Extruded
polyethylene
jacket
Corrugated
aluminum
shield
Foam skin
insulated
conductors
Copolymer coated
corrugated steel
Core
wrap
Table 3.24
Bonded STALPETH/ductpic cable
Nominal Approximate
Pair Outside Diameter Weight
Count mm (in) kg/km (lbs/kft)
Figure 3.13
Air core screened cable
Aluminum
Z-screen
Outer
polyethylene
Inner
jacket
Solid polyethylene
insulated jacket
conductors
Aluminum
screen Corrugated steel
with copolymer
adhesive coating
Corrugated
Core aluminum
wrap shield
Cable
core
Figure 3.14
Filled screened cable
Aluminum
Z-screen
Polyethylene
jacket
Conductor
filling compound
Corrugated
steel
Corrugated
Core aluminum
wrap shield
Cable
core
Coaxial Cabling
Cable Selection
Coaxial cable is capable of delivering full-motion video, digital, and analog signals with full-
duplex transmission of data, as well as voice, over long and short distances (see Figure 3.15).
NOTE: Customer requirements should be determined before proceeding with the design.
To determine the size of coaxial cable for any application, it is necessary to define and
understand cable properties. By definition, a coaxial cable consists of two metallic conductors
sharing the same axis, hence the term coaxial. Coaxial cable has a metallic center conductor,
coaxially positioned within an outer metallic conductor, with the two separated by a dielectric
(nonconducting) material.
Figure 3.15
Coaxial cable
Outer
Center
sheath conductor
When determining the size and type of coaxial cable, the two major factors a designer has to
consider are attenuation margin and cost.
Mechanical Factors
Coaxial cable is available in many different physical configurations, with variations in center
conductors, dielectric materials, outer conductors, and jackets. Coaxial cable also comes in
semirigid, flexible, and super flexible styles, with differing loss characteristics for each.
Coaxial cable sizes range from 6.3 mm (0.25 in) round and can be as large as 127 mm (5 in).
Typical sizes are 9.5 mm (0.375 in); 12.7 mm (0.5 in); 16 mm (0.63 in); 22 mm (0.87 in);
32 mm (1.25 in); and 41 mm (1.6 in).
The following describes the different environmental conditions and the types of coaxial cable
commonly used.
Center Conductor
The center conductor may be solid, stranded, or tubular. Coaxial cables with solid center wires
or tubes typically will have the lowest attenuation factor but are the least flexible. Stranded
center wires will afford more flexibility but increased attenuation. Tube construction allows for
a lighter weight cable for larger overall outer diameters.
Dielectric
The dielectric provides the necessary spacing between the inner (or center) and outer
conductors. The spacing allows for propagation of the signal down the coaxial line. The
dielectric materials range from air to air and foam (cellular or extruded polyethylene).
Extruded polyethylene is the cheapest, most commonly used dielectric that provides high
strength combined with a low dielectric constant and good attenuation margin at low
temperatures.
Outer Conductor
The outer conductor, or shield, can be either metal braid or corrugated or straight tubing.
Braiding is more common for flexible applications and can come in single or adjacent
configurations. Two adjacent shields offer better shielding. The braids generally are made
from copper, tinned-copper, or silver-plated copper. Tubular construction is used where
strength and a high degree of shielding are required along with low signal attenuation.
Jackets
Insulating jackets protect the coaxial cable. Different jacket materials protect the cable from
corrosion and inclement weather and come in varying temperature ranges from –55 °Celsius
(C [(–67 °Fahrenheit [F])]) and as high as 250 °C (482 °F). Each material has its own
classifications for environment settings and soil and air conditions. The designer should consult
with the client to determine the specific application and choose the correct jacket accordingly.
Electrical Factors
A designer has to consider the following electrical characteristics when choosing coaxial
cable:
• Capacitance
• Inductance
• Impedance
• Bandwidth
• Direct current (dc) resistance
• Attenuation
• Structural return loss
Relative capacitance and inductance from differing cable sizes do not vary much.
For example, a 12.7 mm (0.5 in) foam dielectric coaxial cable has a capacitance of
23.1 picofarads per foot (pF/ft), while 32 mm (1.25 in) foam dielectric coaxial cable has a
capacitance of 22.9 pF/ft. Similarly, the relative inductance for 12.7 mm (0.5 in) and 32 mm
(1.25 in) coaxial cable is 0.058 microhenrys per foot (H/ft) and 0.056 H/ft, respectively.
The characteristic input impedance for coaxial cables from the manufacturer is typically either
50 ohm or 75 ohm. The designer needs to verify the application with the client to determine
which input impedance is best.
As mentioned before, the velocity of propagation, or phase velocity, is expressed as a
proportion of the speed of light in a vacuum and is inversely proportional to the square root of
the effective dielectric constant:
Ideally, the ratio would be 100 percent, but realistically, manufacturers provide coaxial cables
in the 85 to 90 percent range.
The two most pertinent factors that change from one cable size to another are dc resistance
and attenuation. These specifications are easily attainable from manufacturers.
The cable manufacturer’s information usually lists dc resistance three ways—center
conductor, outer conductor, and loop resistance. This information, along with cable lengths and
amplifiers, is valuable in calculating the powering of the network. Power calculations are
usually made after the cabling system layout is complete. The cable dc loop resistance is the
specification used for this calculation.
Attenuation is a phenomenon that is dependent on the cable size, the dielectric material, length
of cable, and frequency of the system. The longer the length of cable, the greater the
attenuation. The higher the frequency, the greater the attenuation. For a given dielectric, the
larger the cable OD, the lower the attenuation. Attenuation is the key factor that a designer
must keep in mind when considering coaxial cable. It determines how often the signal has to
be amplified in the network.
Aerial Applications
See Figure 3.16 for examples of bare aluminum, jacketed, and self-support aerial coaxial
cables:
• Bare aluminum—This is the simplest type of coaxial cable. All others are variations of
this type. It consists of a seamless aluminum tube (outer conductor) foam dielectric and
center conductor, which is usually made of copper clad aluminum or steel. This cable is
best used in moderate climates.
• Jacketed—This is the same as the bare aluminum cable except that it is encased in a high
molecular weight polyethylene outer jacket. This cable is best used in hostile climates. It
offers protection from salt oxidation and ice.
• Self-support—This cable is identical to jacketed cable except that there is a supporting
strand wire fused to the outer jacket. The purpose of this wire is to eliminate the hanging
of strand as well as the lashing of cable to the strand. This type of cable lowers plant
construction costs but inhibits the future possibility of overlashing a second cable onto the
existing constructed plant.
Figure 3.16
Aerial coaxial cables
Bare aluminum
Jacketed
Self-support
Direct-Buried Applications
Flooded and armored cables are known as semirigid (hard-line) cables:
• Flooded—This cable is a jacketed cable with a “flooding” compound between the jacket
and the aluminum outer conductor. The flooding offers protection from nicks and tears of
the outer jacket during the construction process.
• Armored/flooded—This cable is a flooded cable with a metallic armor encasing the jacket,
an additional layer of flooding compound, and a final outer polyethylene jacket (see Figure
3.17). This protective covering provides additional defense from the construction process
as well as rodents and cuts from digging and excavation.
Figure 3.17
Armored cable
Armored
These cables typically are available in the following sizes: 12.7 mm (0.5 in), 16 mm (0.63 in),
22 mm (0.87 in), 32 mm (1.25 in), and 41 mm (1.6 in). Larger sizes are available but are very
difficult to acquire and are not widely used. Coaxial is measured by the OD of the aluminum
or copper outer conductor and not the jacket (see Table 3.25).
Table 3.25
Cable attenuation at VSWR = 1.0, 50 ohm foam dielectric and ambient 20 °C (68 °F)
450 MHz 1000 MHz 2000 MHz
Diameter (OD) dB/100 m dB/100 m dB/100 m
mm (in) (dB/100 ft) (dB/100 ft) (dB/100 ft)
Design Criteria
Selection of different types of cables should be based on the losses per unit length for specific
point-to-point distances, untapped and unspliced. Table 3.26 shows the attenuation of various
size cables at the given frequencies expressed per kilometer or per mile.
Table 3.26
Coaxial attenuation at 20 °C (68 °F) over long distances
450 MHz 1000 MHz 2000 MHz
Diameter (OD) dB/100 m dB/100 m dB/100 m
mm (in) (dB/100 ft) (dB/100 ft) (dB/100 ft)
Figure 3.18
Trunk and feeder system
Return
Trunk
Feeder
Figure 3.19
Standard shield and quad shield construction (drop cable)
Dielectric Dielectric
Aluminum-braided shield
Jacket
Table 3.27
Drop cable and attenuation
Size 450 MHz 550 MHz 750 MHz
(JAN) dB/100 m dB/100 m dB/100 m
(dB/100 ft) (dB/100 ft) (dB/100 ft)
Table 3.28
Drop cable and attenuation at maximum drop length
Table 3.29
Generic impedance for video infrastructure components
Description 550 MHz 1000 MHz
The following are useful rules of thumb to use in analog video infrastructure design:
• Amplifiers should be added to compensate for losses. For CATV systems, link losses of
–10 to –13 dB should not need amplification, assuming the CATV input signal handoff is
of sufficient strength (see Figure 3.20).
• When installing an amplifier, it should be sized to compensate for calculated losses and
avoid overdriving the signal. Overdriving a system can damage equipment. When possible,
an amplifier with variable gain and slope control should be selected as opposed to a fixed
gain or a few predetermined selections.
• Components with a return signaling path should be selected, especially in new designs.
This includes splitters and amplifiers. This return path is used by many devices to
communicate with the headend equipment of the client or the signal provider.
• When detailing video splitters, always specify self-terminating ports. If they do not have
self-terminating ports, then specify the placement of 75 terminating caps for all unused
ports.
Figure 3.20
Video link loss
Input signal
1000 MHz
-4.75 dB
Backbone
RG-11
-0.15 dB 375
-0.15 dB -15.9 dB TR
-8.25 dB
Loss Calculation
-0.15 dB connector -0.15 dB
-4.75 dB 2-way splitter -0.15 dB
-0.15 dB connector
-15.9 dB backbone cable (MC [CD] to TR)
-0.15 dB connector Distribution
-8.25 dB 4-way splitter RG-6
-0.15 dB connector 225 Outlet
-14.6 dB distribution cable (TR to outlet) -0.15 dB
-14.6 dB
-0.15 dB connector
db = decibel
MC (CD) = Main cross-connect (campus distributor)
MHz = Megahertz
RG = Radio grade
TR = Telecommunications room
Twinaxial Cabling
Introduction
Twinaxial cable is a configuration with two center conductors. Each individual conductor is
surrounded by a dielectric material, usually a hard or soft foam polymer, depending upon the
installation design specification and application. The dielectric material of both conductors is
wrapped with a continuous aluminum-polyester shield and tinned copper braid or other
shielding configurations (see Figure 3.21).
Figure 3.21
Twinaxial cable
Dielectric
Braided shield
Fiber coaxial telecommunications systems utilize both optical fiber cables and coaxial cabling
(see Figure 3.22). The signal, whether it represents data, video, or voice light, is digitally
generated. It is sent to a master signal converter within the base station where it is converted
to a light signal. It is then transmitted over a pair of singlemode or multimode optical fiber
cables from the master signal converter to a remotely located signal converter. The light signal
is then reconverted and transmitted to antennas via coaxial cabling.
The benefit of using both mediums is to transmit the signal by optical fiber over long distances
to multiple remote localized areas and then to broadcast it to several antennas via coaxial
cable. This system allows for greater channel capacities and smaller quantities and sizes of
cabling as well as for the use of centrally located switching equipment. Transmitting the signal
over coaxial cable only would not be a viable option because of the large cable diameter
required. Additionally, the signal would be severely attenuated over the long distance. Optical
fiber cable alone is not a good option either because of the increased numbers of fibers and
hardware needs. The combination of these media provides a much more cost-effective
system.
Figure 3.22
Optical fiber coaxial system
Remote Antennas
signal (via couplers)
converter
Tx
1
Rx
Optical fiber Coaxial
Communications Fiber Master cable cable Tx
switch signal 2
equipment converter
Rx
Tx
X
Rx
Rx = Receiver
Tx = Transmitter
System Requirements
Space Allocation
The designer needs to consider the specific application of fiber coaxial systems and determine
the customer’s needs. The heart of the system is the switch or base station. These fiber
coaxial systems may be fed from concrete universal enclosures (CUEs), controlled
environment vaults (CEVs), or cabinets. There must be significant space to accommodate the
switching equipment along with the master signal converter unit within those spaces. To feed
the remote locations, routing must be determined via conduit, cable tray, or free air, if feasible.
Spare conduits or tray space must be identified or available space in the overhead or
underground must be determined if new conduits are to be installed.
For both optical fiber and coaxial cable, the bend radii and conduit fill code requirements must
be known and innerduct or sleeving should be used to facilitate the installation. Pulling
distances and tensions must be kept within specifications. The size and type of cable, along
with the conduit system, will determine the maximum pulling lengths. Although most
manufacturers offer flexible models, coaxial cable is typically rigid. Conduit should be
oversized to allow smooth installation without kinking or flattening the coaxial cable, which
may result in signal degradation and unwanted reflections. There also must be adequate space
in the various remote locations for installing remote signal converters, allowing space around
them for cooling and for splice enclosures.
Power
Power requirements must be determined at both remote and base locations. The designer
must determine if the remote units should be powered from the central base station location or
if each remote signal converter should receive power local to the units. Some benefits of
centralized power are adding a battery backup uninterruptible power supply (UPS) to the
system for more reliable operation and total control over remote power (i.e., no inadvertent
powering off of remote units). Benefits of powering each unit locally are decreased length of
power cabling back to the base station and elimination of power conduits.
Applications
Fiber coaxial cabling systems provide a variety of telecommunications applications. These
systems work particularly well for in-building solutions where there may be problems with
interference and long distances. Routing optical fiber cables from a central switch location
throughout campus environments and from building to building allows for expanded
communications. Positioning remote equipment and antennas from floor to floor within
dormitories provides easy access to the system.
Applications, continued
This type of system allows students to access the Internet for class information and to
communicate with professors and fellow classmates. It also allows administrators to distribute
informational video throughout the campus. Airports and hospitals are other prime candidates
for fiber coaxial cabling systems. The central switching equipment can be placed in a secure
area, and the fiber coaxial cable backbone can be used to feed the remote antennas. Several
airline terminals can be connected for internal security communication. Different floors of a
hospital can be linked to the communication system to better correspond in emergency
situations.
Table 3.30
RUS acceptance cable-coding plan
Sheath
Core Type and Gauge Code RUS- Pair Size
Cable Design Conductor Insulation Designation Acceptance
W B 9 A R 0100
Table 3.31 lists and defines Western Electric Codes used in ordering a RUS type cable.
Table 3.31
Description of codes
Cable Code K W
AWG 19 22 24 26
Sheath Code A C J S W
References
American National Standards Institute. ANSI J-STD-607-A. Commercial Building
Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications. Arlington, VA:
Telecommunications Industry Association, 2002.
American National Standards Institute/Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic
Industries Alliance. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Commercial Building Telecommunications
Cabling Standard, Part 1: General Requirements. Arlington, VA: Telecommunications
Industry Association, 2001.
———. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1-3.Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard, Part 1: General Requirements: Addendum 3–Supportable Distances and
Channel Attenuation for Optical Fiber Applications by Fiber Type. Arlington, VA:
Telecommunications Industry Association, 2003.
———. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3. Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard. Arlington,
VA: Telecommunications Industry Association, 2000.
———. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3-1. Optical Fiber Cabling Component Standard–
Addendum 1–Additional Transmission Performance Specification for 50/125 μm Optical
Fiber Cables. Arlington, VA: Telecommunications Industry Association, 2002.
———. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B. Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications
Pathways and Spaces. Arlington, VA: Telecommunications Industry Association, 2004.
———. ANSI/TIA/EIA-598-B. Optical Fiber Cable Color Code. Arlington, VA:
Telecommunications Industry Association, 2001.
———. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A. Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunica-
tions Infrastructure. Arlington, VA: Telecommunications Industry Association, 2002.
———. ANSI/TIA/EIA-758-A. Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications
Infrastructure Standard. Arlington, VA: Telecommunications Industry Association, 2004.
BICSI®. Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, 11th edition. Tampa, FL:
BICSI, 2006.
Construction Specifications Institute. MasterFormat™. Divisions 1, 25, 27, and 28.
Alexandria, VA: Construction Specifications Institute, 2004.
Insulated Cable Engineers Association. ANSI/ICEA P-61-694. Coding Guide for Copper
Outside Plant and Riser Telecommunications Cables. Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable
Engineers Association, 1999.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-84-608. Telecommunications Cable Filled, Polyolefin Insulated,
Copper Conductor. Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association, 2002.
References, continued
———. ANSI/ICEA S-85-625. Telecommunications Cable Aircore, Polyolefin Insulated,
Copper Conductor Technical Requirements. Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable Engineers
Association, 2002.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-86-634. Buried Telecommunications Wire Filled, Polyolefin
Insulated, Copper Conductor Technical Requirements. Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable
Engineers Association, 2004.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-89-648. Standard for Aerial Service Wire Technical Requirements.
Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association, 2000.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-91-674. Coaxial and Coaxial/Twisted Pair Composite Buried
Service Wires Technical Requirements. Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable Engineers
Association, 2006.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-98-688. Broadband Twisted Pair Telecommunications Cable,
Aircore, Polyolefin Insulated, Copper Conductors Technical Requirements. Carrollton,
GA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association, 1997.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-99-689. Broadband Twisted Pair Telecommunications Cable,
Filled, Polyolefin Insulated, Copper Conductors Technical Requirements. Carrollton, GA:
Insulated Cable Engineers Association, 1997.
International Electrotechnical Commission. IEC 60794-5. Optical Fibre Cables—Part 5:
Sectional Specification—Microduct Cabling for Installation by Blowing. Geneva,
Switzerland: International Electrotechnical Commission, 2006.
National Fire Protection Association, Inc. NFPA 70. National Electrical Code®, 2005 edition.
Quincy, MA: National Fire Protection Association, 2005.
Telecommunications Industry Association. TIA-526-7. OFSTP-7— Measurement of Optical
Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant. Arlington, VA: Telecommunica-
tions Industry Association, 2002.
———. TIA-526-14-A. OFSTP-14—Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed
Multimode Fiber Cable Plant. Arlington, VA: Telecommunications Industry Association,
1998.
U.S. Government Printing Office. Bulletin 1753F-204. REA Specification for Aerial Service
Wires (PE-7). Washington, DC: Rural Utilities Service, 1996.
———. Bulletin 1753F-205. REA Specification for Filled Telephone Cables (PE-39).
Washington, DC: Rural Utilities Service, 1993.
———. Bulletin 1753F-206. REA Specification for Filled Buried Wire (PE-86).
Washington, DC: Rural Utilities Service, 1993.
References, continued
———. Bulletin 1753F-208. REA Specification for Filled Telephone Cables with
Expanded Insulation (PE-89). Washington, DC: Rural Utilities Service, 1993.
———. Bulletin 1753F-601. REA Specification for Filled Fiber Optic Cables (PE-90).
Washington, DC: Rural Utilities Service, 1994.
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. GR-110-CORE. Thermoplastic Insulated Steam-Resistant
Metallic Cable. Piscataway, NJ: Telcordia Technologies, Inc., 1994, 2003.
———. GR-111-CORE. Thermoplastic Insulated Riser Cable. Piscataway, NJ: Telcordia
Technologies, Inc., 1995.
———. GR-421-CORE. Generic Requirements for Metallic Telecommunications Cables.
Piscataway, NJ: Telcordia Technologies, Inc., 1998.
———. GR-492-CORE. Generic Requirements for Metallic Telecommunications Wire.
Piscataway, NJ: Telcordia Technologies, Inc., 1994.
———. GR-1069-CORE. Generic Requirements for Non-Metallic Reinforced Aerial
Service Wire. Piscataway, NJ: Telcordia Technologies, Inc., 1998.
———. GR-1398-CORE. Coaxial Drop Cable. Piscataway, NJ: Telcordia Technologies,
Inc., 1996.
Table of Contents
Introduction........................................................................................ 4-1
Outside Plant (OSP) ..................................................................................... 4-1
Figures
Introduction
Topology
Star Topology
A star topology generally is deployed for OSP cabling. Star configurations allow all buildings to
be cabled directly from the main cross-connect (MC [campus distributor (CD)]). These
configurations centralize the physical management of the backbone network.
A star topology directly links all buildings requiring connection to the MC (CD). See
Figure 4.1. These direct links between the MC (CD) and the intermediate cross-connect
(IC [building distributor (BD)]) sometimes are referred to as home runs. The cross-connect in
each building then becomes the IC (BD), linking the telecommunications rooms (TRs) from
their associated horizontal cross-connects (HC [floor distributors (FDs)]) in each building to
the MC (CD).
By centralizing the physical management of the backbone cabling at the MC (CD), the owner
has the opportunity to connect the network to a remote location or campus. For example, this
connection can be made via microwave, satellite, or leased lines.
Figure 4.1
Star topology
MC
(CD)
Building A
Figure 4.2
Hierarchical star topology
Building F Building A
IC (BD) MC (CD)
Level 2
Figure 4.3
Physical star/logical ring topology
Node C
Node B
IC (BD)
IC (BD)
MC (CD)
IC (BD)
Node D
IC (BD)
Node A
This topology allows for concentration of backup systems, maintenance, and performance
monitoring personnel to be located at the MC (CD). This creates economies of scale in
network operational costs and upgrades by concentrating a majority of the network hardware
at a central location. The downside, however, is a single point of failure.
Figure 4.4
Buildings connected by a physical ring topology
IC (BD)
IC (BD)
See note
MC
(CD)
IC (BD)
IC (BD)
IC (BD)
IC (BD)
The typical optical fiber cores/strands design for a cabling system that provides physical ring
routing would dedicate some of the optical fiber core strands to a ring and some to a star by
splicing through the ICs (BDs) back to the MC (CD).
NOTE: This generally is not recommended without direct connection to an MC (CD).
Figure 4.5 gives the end user the best cabling system configuration. However, the designer
must have a significantly detailed definition of present and future telecommunications
requirements before designing this kind of arrangement.
Figure 4.5
Main backbone ring and redundant backbone star combined
MC (CD)
IC ( B D ) 1 IC ( B D ) 3
= 6 Ring fibers
= 12 Star fibers
= Optical fiber patch panel
= Optical fiber splice center
= Splices
IC (BD) = Intermediate cross-connect (building distributor)
MC (CD) = Main cross-connect (campus distributor)
Figure 4.6
Clustered star topology with physical star/logical ring
Bldg 4
Bldg 3
Bldg 5
Node site B
Bldg 2
Bldg 6
Bldg 7
Node site A
Bldg 8
At the node site, the buildings are served via a physical star topology. The node sites have the
ability to be either a star or ring configuration. This topology allows a designer to provide for
fault-tolerant redundant routing at the node locations. At the same time, the designer can
reduce the design costs for electronics and OSP cable from the node sites to the buildings via
a ring or a star network topology. This configuration also takes advantage of the concentration
of electronic equipment in a common location for network management operations and
efficiency.
Figure 4.7
Optical fiber ring topology (simplified)
Node A
Node D
Node B
Ring signaling
direction
Node C
Optical fiber ring topologies are increasingly becoming the normal design architecture for OSP
operations because they can support high bandwidth transport applications. Ring topologies
provide the following benefits:
• Fault-tolerant redundant routing
• Greater reliability and significantly less cabling service downtime
• Flexible architecture
Bus Topology
A bus topology is a linear configuration of cabling that has limited application if the designer is
looking for fault-tolerant redundancy (see Figure 4.8). A bus topology is adequate if the route
is secure (protected from breaks), redundancy is not required, and the system traffic is not of
a significantly critical nature to require alternate routing. All points along the cable route are in
communication with each other. If the route should suffer a break, all network communica-
tions would be lost.
Figure 4.8
Bus topology
Building B
IC (BD)
MC (CD)
IC (BD)
Building C
Building A
ER
Building D
ER = Equipment room
IC (BD) = Intermediate cross-connect (building distributor)
MC (CD) = Main cross-connect (campus distributor)
Figure 4.9
Tree and branch topology
Bldg
A
Typical
Bldg
B
MC
(CD) Bldg Bldg
C D
Bldg
E
Bldg
F
Bldg
G
NOTE: Locations such as this in a cabling system can take on many different configura
tions depending on the type of cabling system. For cabling in general, this point
could be a handhole (HH) with one cable from the MC (CD) through the HH to
Building A, and one cable from the MC (CD) through the HH to Building B. If this
is a balanced twisted-pair cable, this could be a 100-pair cable from the MC (CD)
to a maintenance hole (MH) with a splice. The splice could have the first binder
group run to Building B, the second binder group run to Building A, and the third and
fourth binder groups as spares for future requirements. If this were a CATV cable,
this could be a feeder or trunk cable to an HH and a tap, sending one cable to
Building A and one cable to Building B. This also could be an optical fiber network
with a cable from the MC (CD) to an MH and spliced into an optical fiber cable to
Building A and one to Building B.
Table of Contents
SECTION 5: SPACES
Spaces ............................................................................................ 5-199
Introduction ............................................................................................ 5-199
Confined Spaces ...................................................................................... 5-199
Maintenance Holes (MHs) .......................................................................... 5-200
Choosing Precast or Site-Poured Maintenance Hole (MH) ................................ 5-206
Maintenance Hole (MH) Size Extensions ....................................................... 5-206
Selecting Maintenance Hole (MH) by Duct Entrance ...................................... 5-207
Maintenance Hole (MH) Types .................................................................... 5-210
Cable Racking Provisions ........................................................................... 5-214
Administration ......................................................................................... 5-215
Sealing Ducts .......................................................................................... 5-215
Openings, Covers, and Frames ................................................................... 5-215
Maintenance Hole (MH) Extension Rings ....................................................... 5-217
Figures
Figure 5.72 Setting pole using A-frame line truck ......................................... 5-174
Figure 5.73 Sighting pole to ensure it is level and plumb ................................ 5-175
Figure 5.74 Raising pole using manpower, pole pikes,
and a deadman pole support .................................................... 5-178
Figure 5.75 Raking pole prior to tamping ..................................................... 5-180
Figure 5.76 Plank footing for pole .............................................................. 5-181
Figure 5.77 Plank footing and catenary design ............................................. 5-182
Figure 5.78 Plank and log footing and catenary design .................................. 5-183
Figure 5.79 Platform support ..................................................................... 5-184
Figure 5.80 Side guys and platform support ................................................. 5-185
Figure 5.81 Platform support at H fixture .................................................... 5-186
Figure 5.82 Log ground brace ................................................................... 5-188
Figure 5.83 Measuring for push brace ......................................................... 5-191
Figure 5.84 Push brace on single pole ......................................................... 5-193
Figure 5.85 Push brace on H fixture ........................................................... 5-194
Figure 5.86 Double push brace .................................................................. 5-195
Figure 5.87 Push-pull brace ...................................................................... 5-197
Figure 5.88 Typical maintenance hole (cutaway side view) ............................ 5-201
Figure 5.89 Maintenance hole diagram ........................................................ 5-202
Figure 5.90 Maintenance hole frame, cover, and collar .................................. 5-203
Figure 5.91 Center conduit tray ................................................................ 5-204
Figure 5.92 Splayed conduit entry ............................................................. 5-204
Figure 5.93 Basic A precast maintenance hole ............................................. 5-205
Figure 5.94 Type A maintenance hole with center conduit window (plan view) .. 5-210
Figure 5.95 Type A maintenance hole with splayed window (plan view) ........... 5-210
Figure 5.96 Type J maintenance hole with center conduit window (plan view) .. 5-211
Figure 5.97 Type J maintenance hole with splayed conduit windows (plan view) 5-211
Figure 5.98 Type L maintenance hole with center conduit window (plan view) .. 5-212
Figure 5.99 Type L maintenance hole with splayed conduit window (plan view) . 5-212
Figure 5.100 Type T maintenance hole with center conduit window (plan view) .. 5-213
Figure 5.101 Type T maintenance hole with splayed conduit window (plan view) 5-213
Figure 5.102 Typical cable maintenance hole ................................................. 5-214
Figure 5.103 Typical handhole .................................................................... 5-219
Figure 5.104 Pedestals and cabinets ............................................................ 5-224
Figure 5.105 Modular floating dock layout ..................................................... 5-231
Figure 5.106 Sample marina layout .............................................................. 5-233
Tables
Table 5.1 Uniform color code for utility flagging, painting, or marking ................ 5-5
Table 5.2 Domestic and international one-call locate company
telephone numbers ..................................................................... 5-9
Table 5.3 Clearances .............................................................................. 5-21
Table 5.4 Conduit formations .................................................................... 5-25
Table 5.5 Straight lengths of individual conduit ........................................... 5-26
Table 5.6 Rigid bends for 100 mm (4 trade size) individual conduit .................. 5-26
Table 5.7 Galvanized rigid steel conduit sizes .............................................. 5-30
Table 5.8 Coefficient of friction ................................................................ 5-36
Table 5.9 Cable pulling tension ................................................................. 5-41
Table 5.10 Cubic yards of concrete per 30.5 m (100 ft) of trench .................... 5-51
Table 5.11 Cubic yards of compacted fill per 30.5 m (100 ft) of trench ............. 5-52
Table 5.12 Minimum trench shoring requirements ........................................... 5-56
Table 5.13 Ice, wind, and temperature ........................................................ 5-90
Table 5.14 Pole class and transverse breaking strength .................................. 5-92
Table 5.15 Pole resistance moments ........................................................... 5-94
Table 5.16 Rated fiber strength for pole species ........................................... 5-94
Table 5.17 Resistance moments for various sizes of poles ............................... 5-95
Table 5.18 Pole setting depth required for various heights .............................. 5-99
Table 5.19 Transverse load on pole (kg/m per lb/ft of span length) ................ 5-103
Table 5.20 Load imposed by pole attachment ............................................. 5-105
Table 5.21 Minimum pole class to support vertical load ................................. 5-108
Table 5.22 Maximum span lengths for self-supporting cable .......................... 5-111
Table 5.23 Pole span length/tension .......................................................... 5-112
Table 5.24 Weight for ALPETH cable .......................................................... 5-113
Table 5.25 Cable weight for self-supporting cable ....................................... 5-115
Table 5.26 Cable weight for self-supporting cable reinforced sheath .............. 5-116
Table 5.27 Typical attachment clearances ................................................. 5-121
Table 5.28 Minimum vertical clearances of cables above ground or
rails at midspan crossing .......................................................... 5-125
Table 5.29 Minimum vertical clearance of cable runs along and
within limits of public highways ................................................. 5-125
Table 5.30 Strand sizes .......................................................................... 5-127
Table 5.31 Calculating pull when angle is known .......................................... 5-135
Examples
Route Design
Introduction
The outside plant (OSP) designer should select routes to preclude the need for future pathway
relocation. Important factors to consider when planning a route include:
• Safety.
• Location.
• Topography.
• Local restrictions.
• Cost.
• Existing infrastructure
• Future (i.e., proposed) development.
If discrepancies are found between records and observable field conditions, the designer
should request verification from utilities and possibly use test holes to determine existing
conditions. When foreign lines, pipes, or structures (i.e., not appearing on the records) are
discovered, the designer should determine ownership and contact the owner.
If existing facilities present an obstacle, the designer may change the proposed route or
elevation.
Preliminary investigations also allow the designer to consider:
• Traffic conditions.
• Building construction.
• Road improvement or repair operations.
• Landscaping.
• Safety conditions.
• Work site equipment access.
• Future maintenance.
Site Survey
Site survey is one of the most important parts of any project. It allows the designer to take the
time to look at the overall picture and resolve any possible conflicts that could delay or stop
the project. At this stage, the designer gathers general information about the existing OSP
conditions and begins to determine where the proposed OSP facilities will be placed. The
designer also draws detailed notes about the existing field conditions. Upon the completion of
this phase, all corrective information is also provided.
Route Construction
In planning for OSP cabling, cable infrastructure must be determined first. The choices are
aerial, direct-buried, and underground.
Typically, aerial plant (e.g., poles, cable, hardware, guys) has an expected life of approximate-
ly 30 years. Direct-buried plant has a similar or shorter lifespan, depending on different
conditions (e.g., the cable has no external protection from vermin damage or construction
unearthing other than its own sheath and armoring.)
Table 5.1
Uniform color code for utility flagging, painting, or marking
A test hole is located within the tolerance zone. This zone varies between 305 millimeters (mm
[12 inches (in)]) to 914 mm (36 in) from the marked obstacle. Local ordinances or state laws
should be checked for tolerances and advance notice requirements. If the zone is not
identified by law or code, the measured zone should be 457 mm (18 in) measured horizontally
from each side of the facility.
When an obstacle is located, a plan and profile drawing should be created to identify its
location. The route can be plotted using this information.
Documentation
A record should be made of the proposed route details (e.g., path, quantity, size, depth) with
references to a fixed point, showing the condition of road surfaces and various adjoining
structures. This record may be valuable if it becomes necessary to challenge future property
damage claims. A videotape record or dated and notarized photographs showing preinstallation
and postinstallation also may be useful for this purpose.
Right-of-Way (R/W)
When working on public or private R/W (see Chapter 8: Right-of-Way), necessary permits
and easements should be obtained before beginning construction. If construction is planned
on a:
• Public R/W, permits should be obtained from an appropriate authority having jurisdiction
(AHJ [e.g., federal, state, county, city, or park]) for use of the proposed route.
• Private R/W or easement, the right to use the property must be negotiated with each land
owner.
Pathways
Introduction
This section addresses design criteria that require attention by the designer when designing
OSP, including:
• Underground pathways and spaces.
• Direct-buried pathways and spaces.
• Aerial pathways and spaces.
IMPORTANT: No cutting that may affect a building structurally can be performed without
a prior approval by the architect/building owner. No structural members
can be cut or coring/sleeves installed without a prior approval by a
professional engineer licensed in the jurisdiction where the work is
performed.
Underground
The advantages of underground cable systems are that they:
• Provide out-of-sight service and maintain the property’s aesthetic appearance.
• Are adaptable for future facility placement or removal.
• Provide additional physical cable protection.
The disadvantages of underground cable systems are that they:
• Have a high initial installation cost.
• Require more detailed route planning.
• Provide a possible path for unwanted water or gases to enter buildings.
Direct-Buried
The advantages of direct-buried cable systems are that they:
• Provide out-of-sight service and maintain the property’s aesthetic appearance.
• Have a low initial installation cost when compared to underground.
• Can easily bypass obstructions.
Direct-Buried, continued
The disadvantages of direct-buried cable systems are that they:
• Are not flexible for future service reinforcements or changes.
• Do not provide the same physical protection for the cable sheath as conduit.
• May be difficult to locate in the case of all dielectric optical fiber cable.
• Provide a possible path for unwanted water or gases to enter buildings.
Aerial
The advantages of aerial systems are that they:
• Usually have the lowest installation costs.
• Are readily accessible for maintenance.
The disadvantages of aerial systems are that they:
• Are aesthetically displeasing.
• Create potential clearance problems.
• Are susceptible to environmental damage.
• Are more susceptible to damage by the public, with potential liability to the owner.
• May have a higher cost of ongoing maintenance.
Underground Pathways
Introduction
Underground conduit structures are pathways used for placing telecommunications cable
between access points such as MHs, handholes (HHs), and building entrances.
Before selecting a route, the designer can perform a field survey to determine if any
construction problems exist and whether any cost savings could be realized by selecting a
different route. Sound judgment should be used when planning a conduit route to obtain the
best location for construction, maintenance, and cable placing and ensure the optimum design.
NOTE: The shortest route is not necessarily the optimum design.
The number of ducts required in a proposed conduit system addition or extension depends on
the number of cables necessary to provide for the installed service and its expected growth
and maintenance. Cables required for growth may include facilities necessary to cutover and
relieve an existing cable that is at maximum capacity.
The designer should not attempt a detailed conduit system design until compiling and carefully
considering facts that might influence the final placement location. To allow ample time for
preliminary plan changes, necessary investigations should be performed well in advance.
The most desirable location for the conduit structure and MHs can be determined after a
careful review of the proposed main conduit routes, approximate MH locations, and
alternative routes. This data must be supplemented with field surveys and information obtained
from other subsurface users (i.e., other utilities). Every effort should be made to avoid
exposing or coming into contact with the existing underground facilities owned by other
utilities. In many areas, public utilities have developed underground facility damage prevention
systems. See Table 5.2 for locating center’s telephone numbers.
Table 5.2
Domestic and international one-call locate company telephone numbers
Area Phone Number Region Covered
Alabama 800-292-8525 Statewide
Alaska 800-478-3121 Statewide
Arizona 800-782-5348 Statewide
Arkansas 800-482-8998 Statewide
California 800-227-2600 North
800-422-4133 South
Colorado 800-922-1987
or 800-833-9417 Statewide
Connecticut 800-922-4455 Statewide
Delaware 800-282-8555
or 800-441-8355` Statewide
Florida 800-432-4770 Statewide
Georgia 800-282-7411 Statewide
Introduction, continued
Table 5.2
Domestic and international one-call locate company telephone numbers, continued
Area Phone Number Region Covered
Hawaii 800-227-2600 Statewide
Idaho 800-626-4950 Bonner, Boundary
800-822-1974 Northern area
800-428-4950 Kootenai
800-398-3285 Shoshone and Benewah
800-424-5555 Clearwater, Idaho, Lewis, and Nez Perce
800-342-1585 All other counties
Illinois 800-892-0123 Statewide except Chicago
312-744-7000 Chicago
Indiana 800-382-5544 Statewide
Iowa 800-292-8989 Statewide
Kansas 800-344-7233 Statewide
Kentucky 800-752-6007 Statewide
Louisiana 800-272-3020 Statewide
Maine 888-344-7233 Statewide
Maryland 800-257-7777
800-282-8555 Eastern shore
Massachusetts 888-344-7233 Statewide
Michigan 800-482-7171 Statewide
Minnesota 800-252-1166 Statewide
Mississippi 800-227-6477 Statewide
Missouri 800-344-7483 Statewide
Montana 800-424-5555 Statewide
800-551-8344 Northwest
Nebraska 800-331-5666 Statewide
Nevada 800-227-2600 Statewide
New Hampshire 888-344-7233 Statewide
New Jersey 800-272-1000 Statewide
New Mexico 800-321-2537 Statewide
888-526-0400 Dona Ana, Lascruces
New York 800-962-7962 Statewide except NYC and Long Island
800-272-4480 NYC and Long Island
North Carolina 800-632-4949 Statewide
Introduction, continued
Table 5.2
Domestic and international one-call locate company telephone numbers, continued
Area Phone Number Region Covered
North Dakota 800-795-0555 Statewide
Ohio 800-362-2764 Statewide
or 800-925-0988
Oklahoma 800-522-6543 Statewide
or 800-654-8249
Oregon 800-332-2344 Statewide
Pennsylvania 800-242-1776 Statewide
Rhode Island 888-344-7233 Statewide
South Carolina 888-721-7877 Statewide
or 800-922-0983
South Dakota 800-781-7474 Statewide
Tennessee 800-351-1111 Statewide
Texas 800-245-4545 Statewide
800-344-8377 Statewide
800-669-8344 Statewide
Utah 800-662-4111 Statewide
Vermont 888-344-7233 Statewide
Virginia 800-552-7001 Statewide
Washington 800-424-5555 Statewide
West Virginia 800-245-4848 Statewide
Wisconsin 800-242-8511 Statewide
Wyoming 800-849-2476 Statewide
District of 800-257-7777 District-wide
Columbia
Australia 61-3-9217-2833 Victoria, Tasmania, NSW, S. Australia,
Australian Capital and Northern
61-8-9424-8116 Western Australia
61-2-9365-7582 NSW, Australian Capital
61-7-3217-6332 Queensland
08-8230-5024 South Australia and Northern
Introduction, continued
Table 5.2
Domestic and international one-call locate company telephone number, continued
To enable optimum use of the conduit structure for subsequent cable placing operations,
particular care should be given to the MH locations and spacing. A conduit system should be
designed with a minimum number of horizontal and vertical directional changes. The ideal
structure is essentially straight runs between MHs with a grade drop for water runoff.
The designer can ensure a structure’s usefulness regardless of reel location by calculating the
expected pulling tensions for cable pulled from either direction and using the larger value for
design purposes. (See Section Length/Diameter Considerations for information regarding
conduit sizing and pull tension calculations.) Maximum lengths of cables that can be placed on
a reel should be considered when placing MHs.
Additionally, it is important for the designer to recognize that conduit bend locations and the
geometry of each bend (horizontal and vertical) are important factors to be considered
throughout the conduit design.
Economics
When conduit construction is required, the designer should design the most economical plant
possible, keeping in mind the costs associated with:
• R/W.
• Materials (e.g., conduit, select backfill, concrete).
• Labor, freight, and other costs that vary depending upon the jobsite location.
• Subsurface conditions (e.g., rock, sand, obstructions).
• Restoration of landscape.
• Roads.
• Railroads (RRs).
• Water crossings.
• Surface restoration.
• Protection from traffic.
• Type of duct formation.
• Operations and maintenance expenses.
• Environmental impact.
Figure 5.1
Lateral and subsidiary conduits
Bldg
A
Lateral
duct
MH MH
Subsidiary duct
MH = Maintenance hole
At times, placing all of the conduits during the initial conduit system installation is desirable, if
not mandatory. Because they are difficult to access, all conduits should be placed during initial
installation when working at locations such as railroad crossings, bridges, and freeways.
Clearances
The minimum recommended separations between telecommunications conduit systems and
outside surfaces of foreign structures (see Table 5.3) are:
• 152 mm (6 in) when crossing pipes (e.g., gas, water, oil).
• 305 mm (12 in) when parallel to pipes (e.g., gas, water, oil).
For example, in the United States, the following clearances are required by the NESC.
Table 5.3
Clearances
Structure Minimum Clearance
Power or other 76 mm (3 in) concrete foreign conduit
101 mm (4 in) masonry
305 mm (12 in) of well-tamped earth
Power conduit Separate poles, if possible; if the same pole is used,
it should preferably be terminated on pole 180 degrees
but not less than 90 degrees.
Railroads When crossing 1.27 m (50 in) below top of rail
Street railways 914 mm (36 in) below top of rail
in = Inch
m = Meter
mm = Millimeter
Conduit Depth
It is the designer’s responsibility to be aware of any unusual depth requirements that are
established for subsurface structures.
Installing conduit improperly can result in conduit deformations, sinking of the backfill, and
subsequent collapse of the road surface.
The 50-year frost line should be considered when calculating conduit depth.
The top of the conduit should be located at a sufficient depth (normally 610 to 762 mm
[24 to 30 in]) below surface grade so both live and dead loads can be sustained by the conduit
structure. Live or dynamic loads have a greater effect on conduit than dead or earth loads.
Figure 5.2
Live or dynamic load dispersal
Load
Lines of Depth
load dispersal
Figure 5.3
Dead or earth load dispersal
Lines of Depth
load dispersal
Tensile Stresses
Tensile stresses in the conduit structure can cause conduit units to separate at the joints.
The causes for tensile stresses include:
• Trench irregularities.
• Unstable soil conditions.
• Conduit structure damage.
Placement of reinforcement bars within the concrete encasement, along the base of the
structure, could prevent these stresses.
Drain Slope
Installing underground conduit so that a slope exists at all points of the run allows drainage and
prevents the accumulation of water. A drain slope towards the MH from the center of the
conduit run or from the building of no less than 10 mm per meter (0.125 inches per foot).
Conduit Formations
Design conduit formations to facilitate orderly cable racking within the MH and ensure
minimal change in the formation when entering a MH. The following recommendations allow
for the design of the most efficient cable formation.
• Preferably, main conduit formations should enter the end walls of the MH at a point
approximately halfway between the floor and ceiling.
• For wall racking considerations, design splayed ductbank entrances at the end walls rather
than center placement (see Figures 5.89 and 5.90).
• If the total number of conduits being placed is significantly less than the capacity of the
terminating MH or cable entrance, conduits should enter at the lowest level within the
MH. The upper space should be reserved for future conduit additions.
• The conduit entrance into the MH should be sized for the ultimate number of conduits to
prevent the need for future wall breakouts.
Table 5.4
Conduit formations
Table 5.5
Straight lengths of individual conduit
Weight kg/m (lb/ft)
Material Length Type B Type C Type D Type E
Plastic 6 m (20 ft)* 0.3–0.6 0.6–0.7 0.5–0.8 N/A
Table 5.6
Rigid bends for 100 mm (4 trade size) individual conduit
Material Angle (Degrees) Radius Length
B, C, or D Plastic 7 4.6 m (15 ft) 0.71 m (2.33 ft)
30*** 4.6 m (15 ft) 2.54 m (8.33 ft)
30*** 3.7 m (12 ft) 2.06 m (6.76 ft)
45*** 2.74 m (9 ft) 2.31 m (7.58 ft)
45*** 2.74 m (9 ft) 1.60 m (5.25 ft)
45*** 0.91 m (3 ft) 0.86 m (2.82 ft)
90*** 0.91 m (3 ft) 1.60 m (5.25 ft)
E Plastic* 90**/*** 0.91 m (3 ft) 1.83 m (6 ft)
64*** 0.91 m (3 ft) 1.17 m (3.84 ft)
Types of Conduit
Types of conduit include:
• EB-20—For encasement in concrete.
• EB-35—For encasement in concrete.
• DB-60—For direct burial.
• DB-100—For direct burial.
• DB-120—For direct burial.
• Rigid nonmetallic conduit Schedule 40—For direct burial or encasement in concrete.
• Rigid nonmetallic conduit Schedule 80—For direct burial or encasement in concrete.
• Multiple plastic duct (MPD)—For direct burial or installation in conduit.
• Rigid metal conduit—For direct burial or encasement in concrete.
• Galvanized rigid steel conduit—For direct burial.
• Intermediate metal conduit—For direct burial or encasement in concrete.
• Fiberglass duct—For direct burial or encasement in concrete.
• Innerduct polyvinyl chloride (PVC)—For installation in conduit.
• Multiple celled conduit—For optical fiber and other small diameter cables.
• High-density polyethylene (HDPE) roll pipe—Directional boring or direct buried.
• Other specialty conduits.
NOTES: Encased buried and direct-buried must meet the requirements of the National
Electrical Manufacturers Association® (NEMA®) TC-6 and TC-8.
Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 rigid nonmetallic conduit must meet the requirements
of NEMA TC-2.
Additional specifications can be found in the American Society for Testing and
Materials (ASTM) F512-06, Standard Specification for Smooth-Wall (Polyvinyl
Chloride [PVC]) Conduit and Fittings for Underground Installation.
These conduit classifications differ based on the type of material and the pipe wall thickness.
Thin-walled conduit may require encasement in concrete to protect the structure from being
crushed by traffic load or from dead load from the earth. Conduit with a thicker wall may be
direct-buried. However, if it cannot be buried deeply enough, it may also be encased in
concrete. Once built, the conduit should remain usable for 75 to 100 years and fulfill design
specifications.
Table 5.7
Galvanized rigid steel conduit sizes
Trade Plain End
Size OD mm (in) ID mm (in)
1 33.53 (1.32) 26.67 (1.05)
1-1/2 48.26 (1.90) 40.89 (1.61)
2 60.45 (2.38) 52.58 (2.07)
3 88.90 (3.50) 77.98 (3.07)
3-1/2 101.60 (4.00) 90.17 (3.55)
4 114.30 (4.50) 102.36 (4.02)
ID = Inside diameter
in = Inch
mm = Millimeter
OD = Outside diameter
NOTE: BICSI’s recommended size for galvanized rigid steel is trade size 4.
A disadvantage of steel conduit is that it tends to choke current flow in a cable. To overcome
this choke effect, the steel conduit must be bonded to the cable shield at both ends of the
conduit run. Refer to Chapter 7: Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection.
Conduit Construction
Past conduit construction methods have contained joints that allowed silt to leak into the duct.
In many instances, this duct must be cleaned in a process commonly called rodding and
mandreling, before cables can be installed. In some cases, dig-ups may be required to clear
obstructions. To prevent these types of expenses, certain operational considerations should be
examined when selecting conduit material, including the:
• Conduit’s susceptibility to silting.
• Coefficient of friction as it affects cable pulling tensions.
• Smoothness and strength of bends or grade changes to minimize winch-line cutting.
• Encasement.
Using Innerduct
The use of innerduct will enhance conduit capacity and utilization for optical fiber and smaller
balanced twisted-pair cable placement. Innerduct allows a maximum number of cables to be
placed in various types of conduit systems.
Innerduct comes in standard corrugated PE or PVC type pipe, typically with 25 or 32 mm
(1 or 1.25 in) diameter. The corrugated design facilitates easy wire pulling, and its flexibility
eliminates the need for bending equipment.
A fabric mesh type of innerduct, which can further increase a duct system’s cable placement
capacity, is also available. The fabric mesh has a smaller duct fill rate footprint compared with
standard innerduct and is designed to minimize pulling tensions.
Conduit Casings
It may be a requirement to place conduit in large steel tubes (casings) as a means of
protection or to facilitate a crossing where an open trench cannot be provided (e.g., at
railroads, major state highways or freeways, river or stream crossings). For additional
requirements on casing lengths, refer to Chapter 8: Right-of-Way.
This type of protection usually requires that the tubing is placed by boring. It is an expensive
operation and should be specified only when other methods are not practical.
Typical installations under railroads and highways are shown in Figures 5.4 and 5.5. Local
AHJs should be contacted regarding specific measurements, including wall thicknesses and
conduit specifications.
Figure 5.4
Conduit casings under railroads
0.91 m
(3 ft)
Ditch
Roadbed
CL CL
Track Track
1.7 m
1.4 or 1.7 m 0.91 m (5.5 ft)
0.91 m (3 ft) (4.5 or 5.5 ft) (3 ft)
Sand fill
Casing Conduits
CL = Center line
ft = Foot
m = Meter
NOTE: After conduit installation is complete, casings should be filled with fine sand, blown
in under air pressure, and sealed at both ends with a 76 mm (3 in) concrete wall.
Figure 5.5
Conduit casings under highway
Roadway structure
1.52 m
Roadway
(5 ft)
Shoulder
Pavement
Unpaved
ditch
Base Subbase 1.28 m (4 ft)
0.91 m (3 ft)
0.91 m (3 ft)
Conduits
Casing
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Table 5.8
Coefficient of friction
Coefficient of Friction
High-Density Low-Density
Polyethylene Polyethylene
Conduit Material Dry Lubricant Dry Lubricant
Polyvinyl chloride 0.31 0.13 0.36 0.16
Concrete 0.48 0.37 0.57 0.41
Corrugated plastic 0.22 0.13 0.40 0.13
NOTE: Coefficients of friction are unitless and work in both metric and imperial
calculations.
Optical fiber cable is usually pulled into a smooth bore or corrugated duct, or fabric mesh, all
of which are commonly known as innerduct. The coefficient of friction for pulling lubricated
cable into a:
• Smooth bore innerduct is 0.25.
• Corrugated innerduct is 0.20.
• Fabric mesh innerduct is 0.16 .
When installing optical fiber cable, use suitable innerduct to maximize the length of optical
fiber cable that can be placed in a single pull.
Figure 5.6
Forces acting on cable pulled through straight conduit
T T
0
Pulling direction
Fr
SOLUTION: Assuming a tail load of 890 N (200 lbf) is caused by the friction of the cable
reel supports, and using the coefficient of friction of 0.31 from Table 5.8, the
calculation is as follows:
T = T0 + f w s
T = 200 + (0.31 × 7.6 × 100)
T = 436 lbf
In metric units:
T = 890 + [0.31 × (9.8 × 11.3) × 30.5]
T = 1937 N
NOTE: Final answers should be rounded to two significant digits.
For level conduit having only shallow slope for conduit drainage, it may be
acceptable to ignore h.
Figure 5.7
Inclined straight conduit
T
0
x
Conduit
B
Radius of
curvature
r
s
Displacement
angles
Simple bend
A cable-pulling tension table was constructed from this formula and can be used to determine
the tension that develops in a conduit bend. Table 5.9 lists the results of the trigonometric
functions sin h and sin h-1 used in Equation 2. Equation 2 is modified to simplify the terms:
T = w r sin h {sin h-1 [T0 / (w r)] + (f θ / 57.3)}
T / (w r) = sin h {sin h-1 [T0 / (w r)] + (f θ / 57.3)}
PTR = sin h [sin h-1 (BTR) + RUB / 57.3]
Where:
PTR (pulling tension ratio) = T / w r
BTR (back tension ratio) = T0 / w r
RUB (resistance under bend) = f θ
To use the following table:
1. Calculate BTR and RUB.
2. Look up the result PTR in Table 5.9. If not using interpolation with this table, round BTR
and RUB up to the closest higher value for a worst-case result.
3. Calculate the pulling tension T = (w r) PTR.
NOTE: Using interpolation with this table will provide a more accurate result.
A scientific calculator may be used to calculate the result from Equation 2.
Table 5.9
Cable pulling tension
PTR RUB
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
0.2 0.29 0.38 0.48 0.58 0.68 0.79 0.90 1.02 1.15 1.29 1.44 1.59 1.76 1.95
0.4 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.81 0.92 1.05 1.18 1.32 1.47 1.63 1.80 1.99 2.19 2.41
0.7 0.81 0.92 1.05 1.18 1.32 1.47 1.63 1.80 1.99 2.19 2.41 2.65 2.90 3.18
1.1 1.23 1.38 1.53 1.70 1.88 2.07 2.28 2.50 2.75 3.01 3.30 3.62 3.96 4.33
1.8 1.99 2.19 2.41 2.64 2.90 3.18 3.48 3.81 4.17 4.56 4.99 5.45 5.96 6.51
2.8 3.07 3.36 3.68 4.03 4.41 4.82 5.27 5.76 6.29 6.87 7.50 8.19 8.95 9.77
4.5 4.92 5.38 5.88 6.42 7.01 7.66 8.36 9.13 10.0 10.9 11.9 13.0 14.1 15.4
6.5 7.10 7.75 8.47 9.24 10.1 11.0 12.0 13.1 14.3 15.6 17.1 18.6 20.3 22.2
9.3 10.2 11.1 12.1 13.2 14.4 15.7 17.2 18.7 20.4 22.3 24.3 26.6 29.0 31.6
12.0 13.1 14.3 15.6 17.0 18.6 20.3 22.1 24.2 26.4 28.8 31.4 34.2 37.4 40.8
16.0 17.5 19.1 20.8 22.7 24.8 27.0 29.5 32.2 35.1 38.3 41.8 45.6 49.8 54.3
20.0 21.8 23.8 26.0 28.4 31.0 33.8 36.9 40.2 43.9 47.9 52.3 57.0 62.2 67.9
BTR
24.5 26.7 29.2 31.8 34.7 37.9 41.4 45.1 49.3 53.7 58.7 64.0 69.8 76.2 83.2
30.0 32.7 35.7 39.0 42.5 46.4 50.6 55.3 60.3 65.8 71.8 78.4 85.5 93.3 102
37.0 40.4 44.1 48.1 52.5 57.2 62.5 68.2 74.4 81.2 88.6 96.6 105 115 126
45.0 49.1 53.6 58.5 63.8 69.6 76.0 82.9 90.5 98.7 108 118 128 140 153
54.0 58.9 64.3 70.2 76.6 83.5 91.2 99.5 109 118 129 141 154 168 183
65.0 70.9 77.4 84.5 92.2 101 110 120 131 143 156 170 185 202 221
77.0 84.0 91.7 100 109 119 130 142 155 169 184 201 219 239 261
89.0 97.1 106 116 126 138 150 164 179 195 213 232 254 277 302
100 109 119 130 142 155 169 184 201 219 239 261 285 311 339
PTR
BTR = Back tension ratio
PTR = Pulling tension ratio
RUB = Resistence under bend
Example 5.1
Tension worksheet form
T
PTR (wr) =
r
w
PTR
Curved Segment
BTR
r
T0/(wr) =
w
0
T
RUB
q
fq =
f
T
Straight Segment
T0 + w [(fx) ± h] =
h
x
f
w
0
T
Example 5.2
Conduit run layout
40°
r = 12 m (40 ft) 30.5 m (100 ft)
° = Degree
ft = Foot
m = Meter
PROBLEM: Determine the pulling tension on a DCMZ-24 cable (11.3 kg/m [7.6 lb/ft])
being pulled into a horizontal plastic conduit run from point A to B. Assume a
tail load of 890 N (200 lbf) and a friction coefficient of 0.31. See worksheets
A to B (see Example 3.3) and B to A (see Example 3.4).
1. Determine the pull tension on the cable for the first segment as it reaches the end of the
200 ft straight segment of conduit.
T = T0 + f w s = 200 + (0.31 × 7.6 × 200) = 671 lbf
This is entered as the first straight segment tension and as the first curved segment T0
(both in the first row of the table).
2. Calculate the resistance under bending:
RUB = f θ = 0.31 × 30 = 9.3
Using the value of tension from Step 1, find the back tension ratio for the 30° curved
segment.
BTR = T0 / (w r) = 671 / (7.6 × 40) = 2.2
From the table (using RUB = 10, BTR = 2.8):
PTR = 3.36
T = (w r) PTR = 1021 lbf
This is entered as the first curved segment tension (in the first row) and as the second
straight segment T0 (in the second row).
Example 5.3
Worksheet A to B (imperial and metric)
Imperial
Metric
Straight Segment Curved Segment
T0 = w [(fx) ± h] + fq = T0 /(wr) = PTR(wr) =
T RUB BTR T
T0 w f x h f q T0 w r PTR w r
890 111 0.31 61 0 2989 0.31 30 9.3 2989 111 12 2.2 3.36 111 12 4476
4476 111 0.31 45 0 6024 0.31 40 12.4 6024 111 18 3.0 5.88 111 18 11750
NOTE: Many manufacturers of pulling lubricants offer online or direct assistance in calcu-
lating expected pulling tensions. Software programs can also be purchased from
them.
Example 5.4
Worksheet B to A (imperial and metric)
Imperial
Metric
Straight Segment Curved Segment
T0 = w [(fx) ± h] + fq = T0 /(wr) = PTR(wr) =
T RUB BTR T
T0 w f x h f q T0 w r PTR w r
890 111 0.31 30.5 0 1940 0.31 40 12.4 1940 111 18 .97 1.53 111 18 3057
3057 111 0.31 45 0 4605 0.31 30 9.3 4605 111 12 3.46 5.38 111 12 7166
7166 111 0.31 61 0 9300
NOTE: Many manufacturers of pulling lubricants offer online or direct assistance in calcu-
lating expected pulling tensions. They also offer software programs.
Microduct
A microduct system houses dedicated channels enclosed in a protected jacket, which is
designed for installation in indoor and outdoor environments (see Figure 5.9.) Microduct
systems can be installed into empty or occupied duct structures via jetting, blowing, or pulling
installation methods. With this infrastructure in place, very small optical fiber cables
(i.e., microcables) can be installed inside the microduct by the same methods. Small units are
used to blow up to 900 m (3000) ft of optical fibers in place into microducts.
Advantages of microduct include:
• Rapid deployment of optical fiber once the initial micro tube infrastructure is in place.
• Reduced labor costs.
• Minimized splicing and closure costs.
• Easy moving, rerouting, or replacing of optical fibers upon installation.
• Improved restoration time.
Disadvantages of microduct include:
• High initial cost.
• Difficult administration.
• Manufacturer-specific products.
Figure 5.9
Microduct
Figure 5.10
Typical concrete-encased conduit structure
Ground line
Warning tape
610 mm
(24 in) min*
25 mm (1 in)
38 mm (1.5 in)
25 mm (1 in)
38 mm (1.5 in)
in = Inch
mm = Millimeter
Table 5.10
Cubic yards of concrete per 30.5 m (100 ft) of trench
Trade 2 Conduit 3 Conduit 4 Conduit
Size 4 Wide Wide Wide
2 conduit high 2.7 3.7 4.8
3 conduit high 3.7 5.0 6.4
4 conduit high 4.6 6.4 8.1
Figure 5.11
Typical compacted fill conduit structure
Selected material
free of large stones,
frozen material, etc.
Ground line
Warning tape
305 mm
(12 in) min*
Compacted
sand or
305 m (12 in)
granular
backfill
25 mm (1 in)
25 mm (1 in)
51 mm
(2 in)
25 mm 25 mm (1 in) Typical
(1 in)
in = Inch
m = Meter
mm = Millimeter
Table 5.11
Cubic yards of compacted fill per 30.5 m (100 ft) of trench
Trade 2 Conduit 3 Conduit 4 Conduit
Size 4 Wide Wide Wide
2 conduit high 6.4 8.7 11.0
3 conduit high 7.4 10.1 12.8
4 conduit high 8.5 11.6 14.5
Trench Work
For all excavations deeper than 1.52 m (5 ft) in which a person must enter or work, in the
United States, for example, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
requires the walls be shored, sheeted, braced, or otherwise supported except when:
• Working in solid rock, hard shale, or hard slag.
• The side walls are cut to an approved slope.
Requirements may vary with soil type and location. The designer should consult OSHA and
local regulations. Other safety precautions include:
• Shoring trenches less than 1.52 m (5 ft) deep if they present a hazardous work
environment.
• Assigning an individual at the surface of an excavation to monitor persons working in the
trench.
NOTE: The person must be in sight of the monitor at all times.
Prefabricated trench boxes or shields have become lighter and are available in a variety of
materials. Manufacturer specifications will vary and must be qualified for design purposes.
Typical shoring arrangements are shown in Figures 5.12, 5.13, and 5.14; see also Table 5.12.
Figure 5.12
Typical trench shield
Loose soil
NOTE: If depths are greater than 6 m (20 ft), it is recommended that shoring construction
should be designed by a qualified professional engineer.
Figure 5.13
Typical trench with shoring in unstable ground
101 mm x 152 mm
(4 in x 6 in)
cross brace
(or trench jack) 51 mm x 152 mm
(2 in x 6 in) tight
1.83 m spaced uprights
(6 ft)
Loose soil
1.2 m
(4 ft)
101 mm x 152 mm
(4 in x 6 in)
stringer
Trench depth
3 m (10 ft)
or less
(See NOTE)
ft = Foot
in = Inch
m = Meter
mm = Millimeter
NOTE: Leave 101 mm (4 in) to 152 mm (6 in) working space between brace and conduit.
Figure 5.14
Typical trench with shoring in stable ground
51 mm x 152 mm 1.8 m
(2 in x 6 in) upright (6.0 ft)
101 mm x 101 mm
(4 in x 4 in)
cross brace
(or trench jack)
51 mm x 152 mm
(2 in x 6 in) upright
1.2 m
(4 ft) Hard, compact soil
101 mm x 101 mm
(4 in x 4 in)
cross brace
(or trench jack)
Trench depth
3 m (10 ft)
or less
(See NOTE)
Cleat
Sharpen toe
Trench width of uprights
1.83 m (6.0 ft)
or less
ft = Foot
in = Inch
m = Meter
mm = Millimeter
NOTE: Leave 101 mm (4 in) to 152 mm (6 in) working space between brace and conduit.
Table 5.12
Minimum trench shoring requirements
C Tight 4×6
4×6 6×6 6×8 8×8
D Tight 6×8
3–4.6 (10–15) A 1.2 (4) 4×6
4×6 6×6 6×8 8×8
B 3 × 4 or 2 × 6 0.6 (2) 4×6
C Tight 4×6
6×6 6×8 8×8 8 × 10
D 3×6 Tight 8 × 10
4.6–6 (15–20) All 3×6 Tight 4 × 12 6×8 8×8 8 × 10 10 × 10
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Subsurface Space
The amount of subsurface space required for the conduit structure is dependent on the type,
size, and number of ducts to be installed.
Where sheeting or shoring is not required, the amount of required subsurface space is based
on the width of the conduit formation plus the space needed for:
• Working.
• Backfill.
• Concrete encasing.
The depth of the trench is the height of the conduit formation plus 610 mm (24 in) of cover
and any top protection or bedding requirement. The NESC requires 610 mm (24 in); however,
local requirements may differ.
NOTE: Where shoring or plywood sheeting is required, the width must include the dimen-
sions of the material used.
Figure 5.15
Bell end conduit slip sleeve
Bridge structure
Bridge abutment
Figure 5.16
Expansion joints
Abutment
ft = Foot
m = Meter
NOTE: An expansion joint is not placed at bridge abutment due to possible misalignment.
Figure 5.17
Angle bracing
Anchor point
hanger
Strut bolted to
threaded insert
in bridge deck
51 mm (2 in) x 51 mm (2 in)
frame member
in = Inch
mm = Millimeter
Figure 5.18
Longitudinal bracing and load forces
Direction of
Support conduit run
Vertical Weight of
direction conduit
Transverse load or
normal direction of wind
Longitudinal
bracing Direction of expansion
frictional force
Longitudinal direction
Direction of load
on stranding
Anchor points experience the same loading as intermediate-type supports except forces due to
friction. Anchor points must also withstand cable pulling force and longitudinal strand loads.
The total longitudinal stranding load will be the summation of the intermediate loads on the
strand. See Figure 5.19 for anchor and plug.
Figure 5.19
Anchor and plug
Expander plug
Anchor
Figure 5.20
Back-to-back expansion joint units
30.5 m (100 ft) 30.5 m (100 ft) 30.5 m (100 ft) 30.5 m (100 ft)
Anchor-type ft = Foot
support m = Meter
Expansion
joint
Intermediate-
type support
Stop-ring
restraint
point
Figure 5.21
Back-to-back expansion joint
Anchor point
ft = Foot
m = Meter
In some cases, spans of 91 m (300 ft), 152 m (500 ft), and 213 m (700 ft) require combining
the back-to-back system with one in-line single expansion joint assembly (see Figure 5.22).
Figure 5.22
In-line single-expansion joint over 30.5 m (100 ft)
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Figure 5.23
Expansion joint under 30.5 m (100 ft)
ft = Foot
m = Meter
In installations under 30.5 m (100 ft), normally only one expansion joint is required for each
conduit line. It can be installed near the center of the bridge in between two supports (see
Figure 5.24).
Figure 5.24
Single expansion joint
Cement Nipple
Conduit
Single-action
Second
Support expansion Cement
support
joint sleeve
Figure 5.25
Angle bracing into stranded area
Back-to-back
expansion joints
Longitudinal
bracing with
wire strand
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Figure 5.26
Conduit installed in sidewalk portion of bridge
Sidewalk Roadway
Figure 5.27
Conduit installed by hanging under sidewalk portion of bridge
Sidewalk Roadway
Figure 5.28
Conduit run attached to side of bridge with steel brackets
Steel brackets
Figure 5.29
Conduit runs attached to steel I-beams
I-Beam
Tunnels
Introduction
New or existing tunnels may be the only means available to provide service into or throughout
a building. Three general types of tunnels are:
• Utility tunnels.
• Pedestrian tunnels.
• Vehicular tunnels.
Utility Tunnels
Utility tunnels are spaces/pathways that house various utilities. Some of the utilities housed
are steam, power, gas, water, sanitary sewer, and telecommunications. Designing space
configurations for these tunnels is of prime concern for the designer. Power cables located in
tunnels can produce electromagnetic interference (EMI). Gas lines can produce a hazardous
atmosphere. Steam lines can damage the telecommunications plant if it is located too close
to the steam lines. Water lines may create a humid atmosphere along with the steam lines.
Sanitary sewer lines can create a biological hazard if ruptured. Storm drains that feed into the
tunnels can cause flooding. See Figure 5.30 for a breakdown of a typical shallow tunnel.
Figure 5.30
Typical shallow tunnel section
3.4 m
(11 ft)
Monorail
Steam
Telephone
1.2 m
(4 ft) 3.4 m
(11 ft)
Low voltage
power
High voltage
power
Water Gas
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Pedestrian Tunnels
Pedestrian tunnels are used for passage of personnel from one part of a campus to another,
usually under streets, railways, or other thoroughfares. These tunnels are usually environmen-
tally conditioned and contain spaces that can efficiently house pathways for information
transport systems (ITS). They tend to be shorter than utility tunnels but can be used
effectively for housing of telecommunications infrastructure from one point on a campus to
another.
Vehicular Tunnels
Vehicular tunnels allow restricted traffic. These tunnels are used for passage of vehicles from
one part of a campus to another and are not typically environmentally controlled. Pathways
can be installed inside these tunnels to house telecommunications cables in a cost-effective
manner.
Telecommunications cable must be installed in these tunnels according to local codes and must
also provide a safe environment for operation of all facilities. For large projects, tunnels will
require extensive advanced planning and cooperation among:
• Utilities.
• Customers.
• Municipal planning boards.
• Environmental groups.
• Department of Transportation (DoT).
All of these entities must be in agreement regarding tunnel use and design and the designs of
the proposed utility installations within the tunnel.
Considerations that are particularly critical include:
• Routing.
• Safety.
• Access.
• Capacity.
• Sizing.
• Facility protection.
• R/W.
• Cost.
Accessibility is usually the reason for installation of tunnels. When designing the tunnel, the AP
should be located off the traveled roadway to improve worker’s safety.
When the public accesses a tunnel or when the customer’s personnel must enter the structure
to install, operate, or maintain the facilities, the design must include a controlled, safe
environment including barriers, detectors, alarms, ventilation, and pumps.
Application Areas
Five areas where tunnels may provide an optimum long-range solution to a customer’s space
requirements are:
• Transit subway station construction.
• Urban renewal districts.
• Central business districts.
• Campus or institutional projects.
• Large-capacity pathways under known underground obstructions (e.g., buildings).
Advantages
Primary advantages of using a tunnel include:
• Reduced street maintenance.
• Decreased chances of accidental dig-ups.
• Reduced ground corrosion factors.
• A continuous inspection path for all facilities.
• Permanent space allocation.
• Reduced surface interference to both vehicular and pedestrian traffic, except during an
open-cut phase.
Disadvantages
Disadvantages of using a tunnel may include:
• Confined space rules.
• Significant planning and approvals from all aspects.
• Increased liability and work priority factors.
• Increased security measures.
• High initial cost of constructing the tunnel.
Utility Requirements
A joint-use tunnel may require sizing for:
• Heating and cooling.
• Electric power.
• Gas.
• Sanitary sewers.
• Telecommunications.
• Water.
• CATV.
• Storm water runoff monitoring.
When either sizing tunnels or placing telecommunications facilities in tunnels, allowances
should be made for regulated, nonregulated, and multiple transmission media (e.g., balanced
twisted-pair, optical fiber, coaxial cabling). Each individual utility should be marked at regular
intervals for easy identification.
When selecting media for installation, the designer should ensure that it meets heat and steam
requirements to ensure protection of the telecommunications physical plant, where necessary.
Hazards
Major hazards found in tunnels are:
• Confined space.
• Steam.
• Flooding.
• Gas.
• Fire.
• Electricity.
• Asbestos.
• Sanitary sewer lines.
• Storm drains.
• Wildlife.
While various sensors and alarms can be used to monitor the environmental quality of a tunnel,
OSP installers should always observe caution and report any suspicious conditions to the
appropriate safety office or the director of physical plant immediately.
Ventilation
A common rule of thumb for personnel ventilation is three complete air changes per hour.
Tunnels may contain combustible or suffocating gasses. Therefore, provisions must be made
for an adequate continuous supply of air.
Fire Detection
Types of fire detection systems used in tunnels are:
• Infrared.
• Ultraviolet.
• Temperature.
• Detectors for products of combustion (i.e., smoke or carbon dioxide).
Support Structures
Additional support structures may be needed for telecommunications. The designer should
consult with AHJs for installations. Some examples are:
• Pulling eyes—Generally made of steel and concreted into the sides or ends of the tunnel
to facilitate the pulling of cable into or through the tunnel. Pulling eyes should be placed at
about the same level as the ductbank at the opposite end of the tunnel.
• Cable and equipment supports—Vertical steel channels should be installed to support
cables, splice cases, and equipment.
Direct-Buried Pathways
Introduction
The decision of whether to place direct-buried or aerial plant is based on:
• Initial cost.
• Susceptibility to damage.
• Ongoing maintenance costs.
• Aesthetics (i.e., direct-buried cable installations are generally hidden from view).
Direct-buried cable is less susceptible to storm damage than aerial cable. Even though repair
costs may be higher, these structures are less frequently damaged, especially in areas prone to
fires or severe weather (e.g., ice storms, hurricanes).
Route Selection
When considering an underground or direct-buried route, many variables must be considered,
some of which may be related. Common variables are:
• Safety.
• Costs.
• Waterways.
• Environmental areas.
• Soil conditions.
• Right-of-way (R/W).
• Obstacles.
• Other below-grade utilities.
• Existing infrastructure.
Both underground and direct-buried pathways may be affected by:
• Buildings.
• Culverts.
• Bridges.
• Pole lines.
• Pavement.
• Landscaped areas.
• Railways.
• Roadways.
Figure 5.31
Protection of direct-buried cable
Rock
Direct-buried cable
Burial Depth
Burial depth will be affected by:
• Crossing under railroads and highways.
• Crossing bodies of water.
• Crossing other utilities.
• Frost line depth. Cable should be placed below the frost line because frost uplift may
damage cables. Optical fiber cables may be crushed by freezing water. Where applicable,
the 50-year frost line should be used.
• End user requirements.
Each of the above situations may require adherence to specific requirements mandated by
their governing agencies. If joint trenching is being used, agreements with other occupants
must be obtained.
Balanced twisted-pair cable should be placed at a minimum depth of 610 mm (24 in).
However, in areas where future excavation is anticipated, it may be advisable to place the
cable at a greater depth. For example, if road grading that will remove 610 mm (24 in) of dirt
is planned in a particular area, it would be wiser to place the cable at 1.2 meters (m [4 feet
(ft)]) initially versus the standard 610 mm (24 in). The designer should also remember that
depth requirements may vary by local code.
Optical fiber cable should be placed at a minimum depth of 1 m (3.28 ft). However, extra
depth should be considered in situations where future potential excavations could damage the
cable.
These depths may be reduced if the cable is adequately protected by additional means
(e.g., concrete encasement or capping). The authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) may provide
rulings on depth in a given area.
Trenching
Three basic methods of trenching are:
• Hand dig, used when there is not enough room for machinery or when care must be
exercised to avoid an obstacle.
• Back hoe, used in areas not accessible by a trencher.
• Trencher, preferred when the proposed cable route is open and free from obstacles.
The smaller trenchers are walk-behind types and typically are used for small-diameter
cable applications and short distances (see Figure 5.32). Larger trenchers generally are
used for placing larger cables (see Figure 5.33).
Depending on the method employed, trench width can range from 76 to 610 millimeters (mm
[3 to 24 inches (in)]) and up to 2.3 meters (m [7.5 ft (feet)]) in depth.
Smaller cables may be placed using a less cumbersome machine, which can readily avoid
obstructions and can be controlled by an individual walking behind it. While such a machine
has limited use for long runs or large sizes of cable, it may be effective in placing smaller
lateral cables or service wires. Many configurations of cable placing machines are available.
The designer should focus on determining the best route rather than on the machinery for
cable placement.
Figure 5.32
Walk behind trencher
Trenching, continued
Figure 5.33
Tractor-drawn trencher
Plowing
The most economical rates for plowing will be realized when the route is open and relatively
free from rock.
Two major types of plows are:
• Vibratory plow.
• Rip plow.
Plowing, continued
Vibratory Plow
This type of plow slices open the trench, places cable, and closes the trench behind it. Some
machines possess both trenching and plowing capabilities (see Figures 5.34 and 5.35). The
major difference is that these types of machines are generally rubber-tired to minimize surface
damage. This limits their usefulness in some field conditions.
Figure 5.34
Trencher/vibratory plow
Figure 5.35
Vibratory plow
Plowing, continued
Rip Plow
This type of plow opens a trench with one or more passes of the plow share (see
Figure 5.36). The rip plow ensures all subsurface obstacles are removed prior to
placing the cable. Use of this plow is common in hard ground conditions such as
clay in the summer months.
Figure 5.36
Rip plow
Rock Saw
When the soil is too compacted or rock is encountered, the rock saw is used to cut the trench
for the cable placement (see Figure 5.37).
Figure 5.37
Rock saw
Plowing, continued
Boring
The three main types of bores are:
• Auger bore, also known as jack and bore.
• Horizontal directional drilling (HDD), also known as a directional bore.
• Missile bore, also known as impact moling.
Boring, continued
A casing may be installed simultaneously with the boring process to make this a less costly
alternative to cutting and patching. It is used for crossing under small obstacles such as roads
or railroad tracks and can be used to place casings as large as 1.2 m (4 ft). Figure 5.38
illustrates an auger bore.
Figure 5.38
Auger bore
Boring, continued
Figure 5.39
Horizontal directional drilling machine
Boring, continued
Casing Type
Depending on the customer’s or authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) requirements, one of the
following casings may be used:
• Steel
• Plastic
• Flexpipe
Cable Markers
Buried cable markers should be used to reduce the possibility of cable damage during
excavation and will assist in the location of dielectric optical fiber cable.
Some types of common markers are:
• Aboveground post markers, typically placed up to 152 m (500 ft), at a directional change,
at a congested area, or at a location of importance (e.g., other major crossing utilities).
In areas where curves or hills exist, markers should be placed in line of sight (LoS).
• Buried marker tape 152 to 305 mm (6 to 12 in) below final grade.
• Buried electronic markers, typically located at splice locations and buried
handholes (HHs).
NOTES: Tracer wire should be installed with all dielectric optical fiber cable to
facilitate locating.
Cable markers with locating caps that allow locators to connect to the metallic
sheath of a buried cable may be used within a maximum distance of
900 m (3000 ft).
Aerial Pathways
Introduction
When faced with design and implementation of an aerial plant system, the designer must
consider:
• Initial cost.
• Possible exposure of poles to damage from vehicular traffic.
• Risk of damage to conductors or pole structures from falling tree limbs, high winds, ice
loading, and other environmental factors.
• Access.
Route Selection
When selecting the route for the aerial plant, the designer must consider a number of
variables, including:
• Safety.
• Terrain.
• Aesthetics.
• Direct-buried or underground utilities.
• Soil conditions.
• Other aerial plants.
• Access.
A proposed pathway may be affected by obstacles and/or clearances due to:
• Utilities.
• Existing pole lines.
• Parking lots.
• Buildings, including architectural impediments to locating building attachment structures.
• Water crossings.
• Intersections (e.g., street, alley, controlled access roads).
• Driveways.
• Right-of-way (R/W) for railways.
• Maintenance access to the pole line.
• Swimming pools.
• Environmental areas.
• Tree branches.
• Clearances above sidewalks.
• Clearances above or to the side of buildings and other structures.
• Airport and heliopad.
Types of Loading
Three types of loading with which the designer should be concerned are:
• Transverse storm loading—The pressure exerted on a pole and its attachments by the
wind at a right angle to the line. The pressure on the pole varies with the length and
diameter of the pole.
• Vertical loading—The weight of the attachments as well as the downward force produced
by the guys. For medium and heavy storm loading areas, the weight of ice coatings on
attachments should be included.
• Bending moments—The forces produced by devices like (eccentric) transformers or
unbalanced tensions at corners and deadends.
Figure 5.40
Wind and ice loadings
= Heavy
= Medium
= Light
Light Loading
Light loading is a horizontal wind pressure of 43.9 kilograms per square meter (kg/m2
[9 pounds per square feet (lb/ft2)]) upon the projected area of supported wires, support
strands, and cables at a right angle to the line. Light loading applies to areas receiving little
or no ice and snow accumulation.
Medium Loading
Medium loading is a horizontal wind pressure of 19.5 kg/m2 (4 lb/ft2) upon the projected
area of supported wires, support strands, and cables when coated with a radial thickness
of 6.3 millimeters (mm [0.25 inches (in)]) of ice at a right angle to the line. Medium loading
applies to areas receiving moderate amounts of ice and snow accumulation.
Heavy Loading
Heavy loading is a horizontal wind pressure of 19.5 kg/m2 (4 lb/ft2) upon the projected
area of supported wires, support strands, and cables when coated with a radial thickness of
12.7 mm (0.50 in) of ice at a right angle to the line. Heavy loading applies to areas where
annual ice and snow accumulation is great.
Storm-loading districts are shown in Table 5.13. Any storm-loading district may have areas
where heavier or lighter loadings than are indicated for that district prevail. In those areas, the
designer must alter the requirements set up for the loading district to comply with local
conditions. The conditions must not be reduced without written approval from the AHJ.
Storm-loading districts should be determined through coordination with the local meteorological
service for that country.
Table 5.13
Ice, wind, and temperature
Loading Districts
Extreme
Heavy Medium Light Wind Loading
Radial thickness of 12.5 (0.50) 6.3 (0.25) 0 (0) 0 (0)
ice in mm (in)
Horizontal wind 190 (4) 190 (4) 430 (9)
pressure in Pa (lb/ft2)
Temperature –20 (0) –10 (15) –1 (30) 16 (60)
in C (F)
C = Celsius
F = Fahrenheit
in = Inch
lb/ft2 = Pound per square foot
mm = Millimeter
Pa = Pascal
Moment Strength
Each transverse load causes a moment on the pole that tends to move the pole in the direction
of the applied load. The value of that moment in newton-meters (N-m) or equivalent in pound
force-feet (lbf-ft) is equal to the transverse load in newtons (N) or equivalent in lbf-ft
multiplied by the distance in meters from the load point to the point where the moment is being
considered. One lbf-ft equals 1.36 N-m.
The moments caused by each of the transverse loads must be summed together to obtain the
total load. A pole with sufficient resistant moment must be selected to handle the total
moment. As far as the moment is concerned, the ground line is usually the critical point unless
the pole is extra narrow at some other point or a sidewalk anchor and down guy is employed.
The rated breaking strength of the pole is based on the resistant moment that the pole can
withstand at ground level.
Pole Classification
To determine the class of poles required in a pole line, the designer should consider:
• The total number of cables to be placed during the life of the pole line.
• The total weight of the cables.
• The size of the support strands.
• Any guy requirements (i.e., corners and deadends).
Using this information, the designer will be able to determine:
• Species of wood.
• Required pole height.
• Desired preservation materials.
• Required class (width/diameter).
Nine common pole classes used in OSP construction and their breaking strengths measured
610 mm (24 in) from top of pole are provided in Table 5.14.
Table 5.14
Pole class and transverse breaking strength
Transverse Breaking Strength
Pole Class N lbf
1 20 017 (4,500)
2 16 458 (3,700)
3 13 345 (3,000)
4 10 676 (2,400)
5 8452 (1,900)
6 6672 (1,500)
7 5338 (1,200)
9 3292 (740)
10 1646 (370)
lbf = Pound-force
N = Newton
Poles used as push braces or stubs for overhead guys should be the same class as the
poles they brace. From both cost and strength perspectives, using class 7 poles for most OSP
applications is acceptable.
Table 5.15
Pole resistance moments
Minimum Pole Height
Breaking Circumference
Load at Top 20 25 30 35 40 50 70 90
Class (pounds) (inches) Resistant Movement (pound-feet)
NOTE: This table is based on a load 0.6 m (2 ft) from the top of the pole and a standard
setting.
Table 5.16
Rated fiber strength for pole species
Average
Rated Circumference
Fiber Taper
Strength (inches per foot
Pole Species (psi) of length)
Table 5.17
Resistance moments for various sizes of poles
Pole
Circumference 3,600 4,600 5,600 6,000 6,600 7,400
(Inches)
8.0 487 622 757 811 892 1000
8.5 584 746 908 973 1070 1200
9.0 693 885 1080 1150 1270 1420
9.5 815 1040 1270 1360 1490 1680
10.0 950 1210 1480 1580 1740 1950
10.5 1100 1410 1710 1830 2020 2260
11.0 1300 1620 1970 2110 2320 2600
11.5 1450 1850 2250 2410 2650 2970
12.0 1640 2100 2650 2740 3010 3380
12.5 1860 2370 2890 3090 3400 3810
13.0 2090 2670 3250 3480 3830 4290
13.5 2340 2990 3640 3900 4280 4810
14.0 2610 3330 4060 4350 4780 5360
14.5 2900 3700 4510 4830 5310 5960
15.0 3210 4100 4990 5350 5880 6590
15.5 3540 4520 5510 5900 6490 7280
16.0 3890 4970 6060 6480 7140 8000
16.5 4270 5460 6640 7120 7830 8780
17.0 4670 5970 7260 7780 8560 9600
17.5 5090 6510 7920 8490 9340 10,500
18.0 5540 7080 8620 9240 10,200 11,400
18.5 6020 7690 9360 10,000 11,000 12,400
19.0 6520 8330 10,100 10,900 11,900 13,400
19.5 7050 9000 11,000 11,700 12,900 14,500
20.0 7600 9720 11,800 12,700 13,900 15,600
20.5 8190 10,500 12,700 13,600 15,000 16,800
21.0 8800 11,200 13,700 14,700 16,100 18,100
21.5 9450 12,100 14,700 15,700 17,300 19,400
22.0 10,100 12,900 15,700 16,900 18,500 20,800
Table 5.17
Resistance moments for various sizes of pole, continued
Pole
Circumference 3,600 4,600 5,600 6,000 6,600 7,400
(Inches)
22.5 10,800 13,800 16,800 18,400 19,800 22,300
23.0 11,600 14,800 18,000 19,200 21,200 23,800
23.5 12,300 15,800 19,200 20,600 22,600 25,400
24.0 13,100 16,800 20,400 21,900 24,100 27,000
24.5 14,000 17,900 21,700 23,300 25,600 28,700
25.0 14,900 19,000 23,100 24,700 27,200 30,500
25.5 15,800 20,100 24,500 26,300 28,900 32,400
26.0 16,700 21,300 26,000 27,800 30,600 34,300
26.5 17,700 22,600 27,500 29,500 32,400 36,400
27.0 18,700 23,900 29,100 31,200 34,300 38,500
27.5 19,800 25,300 30,700 32,900 36,200 40,600
28.0 20,900 26,700 32,500 34,800 38,200 42,900
28.5 22,000 28,100 34,200 36,700 40,300 45,200
29.0 23,200 29,600 36,100 35,600 42,500 47,600
29.5 24,400 31,200 38,000 40,700 44,700 50,200
30.0 25,700 32,800 39,900 42,800 47,000 52,800
30.5 27,000 34,500 41,900 44,900 49,400 55,400
31.0 28,300 36,200 44,000 47,200 51,900 58,200
31.5 29,700 38,000 46,200 49,500 54,500 61,100
32.0 31,100 39,800 48,400 51,900 57,100 64,000
32.5 32,600 41,700 50,800 54,400 59,800 67,100
33.0 34,200 43,600 53,100 56,900 62,600 70,200
33.5 35,700 45,700 55,600 59,500 65,500 73,400
34.0 37,400 47,700 58,100 62,300 68,500 76,800
34.5 39,000 49,900 60,700 65,000 71,500 80,200
35.0 40,700 52,100 63,400 67,900 74,700 83,800
35.5 42,500 54,300 66,100 70,900 78,000 87,400
36.0 44,300 56,700 69,000 73,900 81,300 91,000
Table 5.17
Resistance moments for various sizes of pole, continued
Pole
Circumference 3,600 4,600 5,600 6,000 6,600 7,400
(Inches)
36.5 46,200 59,100 71,900 77,000 84,700 95,000
37.0 48,100 61,500 74,900 80,200 88,300 99,000
37.5 50,100 64,000 78,000 83,500 91,900 10,300
38.0 52,200 66,600 81,100 86,900 95,600 107,200
38.5 54,200 69,300 84,400 90,400 99,400 111,500
39.0 56,400 72,000 87,700 94,000 103,400 115,900
39.5 58,600 74,800 91,100 97,600 107,400 120,400
40.0 60,800 77,700 94,600 101,400 111,500 125,000
40.5 63,100 80,700 98,200 105,200 115,700 129,800
41.0 65,500 83,700 101,900 109,200 120,100 134,600
41.5 67,900 86,800 105,700 113,200 124,500 139,600
42.0 70,400 90,000 109,500 117,400 129,100 144,700
42.5 73,000 93,200 113,500 121,600 133,800 150,000
43.0 75,600 96,600 117,500 125,900 138,500 155,300
43.5 78,200 100,000 121,700 130,400 143,400 160,800
44.0 81,000 103,400 125,900 134,900 148,400 166,400
44.5 83,800 107,000 130,300 139,600 153,500 172,200
45.0 86,600 110,700 134,700 144,400 158,800 178,000
45.5 89,500 114,400 139,300 149,200 164,200 184,000
46.0 92,500 118,200 143,900 154,200 169,600 -------
46.5 97,600 122,100 148,600 159,300 175,200 196,400
47.0 98,700 126,100 153,100 164,500 180,900 202,800
47.5 101,900 130,100 158,400 169,800 186,700 209,400
48.0 105,100 134,300 163,500 175,200 192,700 216,100
48.5 108,400 138,500 168,700 180,700 198,800 222,900
49.0 111,800 142,900 173,900 185,400 205,000 229,800
Table 5.17
Resistance moments for various sizes of pole, continued
Pole
Circumference 3,600 4,600 5,600 6,000 6,600 7,400
(Inches)
49.5 115,300 147,300 179,300 192,100 211,300 236,900
50.0 118,800 151,800 184,800 198,000 217,800 244,200
50.5 122,400 156,400 190,400 204,000 244,000 251,600
51.0 126,100 161,100 196,100 210,100 231,100 259,100
51.5 129,800 165,900 201,900 216,400 238,000 266,800
52.0 133,600 170,800 207,900 222,700 245,000 274,700
52.5 137,500 175,700 213,900 229,200 252,100 282,700
53.0 141,500 180,800 220,100 235,800 259,400 290,800
53.5 145,500 186,000 226,400 242,600 266,800 299,200
54.0 149,700 191,200 232,800 249,200 274,400 307,600
54.5 153,800 196,600 239,300 256,400 282,100 316,200
55.0 158,100 202,000 246,000 263,500 289,900 325,000
55.5 162,500 207,600 252,700 270,800 297,900 334,000
56.0 166,900 213,300 259,600 278,200 306,000 343,100
56.5 171,400 219,000 266,600 285,700 314,300 352,400
57.0 176,000 224,900 273,800 293,300 322,700 361,800
57.5 180,700 230,900 281,100 301,100 331,200 371,400
58.0 185,400 236,900 288,500 309,100 340,000 381,200
58.5 190,300 243,100 296,000 317,100 348,800 391,100
59.0 195,200 249,400 303,600 325,300 357,900 401,200
59.5 200,200 255,800 311,400 333,700 367,000 411,500
60.0 205,300 262,300 319,300 342,100 376,400 422,000
Table 5.18
Pole setting depth required for various heights
Length of Pole Setting in Soil Setting in Solid Rock
m/ft m/ft m/ft
6 (20) 1.2 (4.0) 0.91 (3)
7.6 (25) 1.52 (5.0) 1.07 (3.5)
9 (30) 1.7 (5.5) 1.07 (3.5)
10.7 (35) 1.83 (6.0) 1.2 (4.0)
12 (40) 1.83 (6.0) 1.2 (4.0)
13.7 (45) 1.98 (6.5) 1.4 (4.5)
15 (50) 2.1 (7.0) 1.4 (4.5)
16.8 (55) 2.3 (7.5) 1.52 (5)
18.3 (60) 2.4 (8.0) 1.52 (5)
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Depth Requirement
The setting in soil depth as shown in Table 5.18 applies when:
• Poles are to be set in soil only.
• There is a layer of soil more than 0.6 m (2 ft) in depth over solid rock.
• The pole in solid rock is substantially vertical.
• The diameter of the hole at the surface of the rock exceeds approximately twice the
diameter of the pole at the same level.
The setting in solid rock depth applies where solid rock is encountered at the ground line and
where the hole is substantially vertical, approximately uniform in diameter, and large enough to
permit the use of tamping bars the full depth of the hole.
Where there is a layer of soil 0.6 m (2 ft) or less in depth over solid rock, the depth of
the hole shall be the depth of the soil in addition to the depth specified in setting in solid rock
provided; however, such depth shall not exceed the depth specified under setting in soil.
NOTE: See Figure 5.41 for an example of keying. The process amounts to bolting a
horizontal member (e.g., wood or a nonrusting substance) to the pole 152 mm (6 in)
below the ground line to provide a resistance to torsional forces.
Figure 5.41
Example of keying a pole
Compaction
When an earth boring machine is used to dig holes for guyed poles, the bottom of the hole
must be thoroughly tamped to compact any loose earth. All holes must be backfilled with soil
or small rock.
Backfill shall be thoroughly tamped the full depth of the pole hole. Earth must be banked
around the pole to a minimum height of 152 mm (6 in) above ground level.
Holes in soil for poles at unguyed corners where the pole will not be keyed shall be 0.3 m
(1 ft) deeper than the setting in soil depth. The setting in solid rock depth applies to holes in
solid rock.
Poles should be set plumb (vertical) except at corners where they shall be set and raked
against the load so that the pole top will be in line with the lead of the line after the load is
applied. The rake in pole must not exceed 152 mm (6 in) for each 3 m (10 ft) of pole length
after the conductors are installed at the required tension. The deadend shall be set so as to be
plumb and in line after the load is applied.
Adding moisture may aid in the compaction of soil.
NOTE: See Chapter 7: Grounding, Bonding, and Protection for grounding (earthing) and
bonding requirements.
Storm-Loading Districts
The transverse load equation for the three storm-loading districts based on Table 5.19 is
PD (lb/ft) = 0.75d, where D is wire/cable diameter, including support strand, in millimeters and
equivalent in inches.
Storm-loading districts may have areas where heavier or lighter loadings than are indicated for
that district prevail. In those areas, the designer must alter the requirements set for the loading
district to comply with local conditions. The conditions must not be decreased without written
approval from the AHJ.
Storm-loading districts should be determined through coordination with the local meteorological
service for that country.
Load Table
Typical values of transverse load as a result of storm loading on cables and support strands
are shown in Table 5.19.
Table 5.19
Transverse load on pole (kg/m per lb/ft of span length)
Moment
The moment Mw in kilogram-meters (pound-feet) at ground level caused by a transverse load
on the pole from the wires/cables is defined by the following equation:
Mw = PDSLN
Where:
P is wind pressure in kilograms per square meter (pounds per square feet);
D is diameter of the line (support strand, cable, and wire) in meters (feet);
S is span length;
L is height of line attachment aboveground m (ft); and,
N is number of equivalent lines.
Table 5.20 gives the product of P multiplied by D for commonly used conductors. To obtain
the total moment, the product should be multiplied by S, L, and N. In case of two or more
types of conductors, the moment for each type should be computed and added up.
Assumed Load
As calculated by the above formula, the transverse load on a pole caused by wind against
the pole will always be a very small percentage of the breaking strength of the pole.
Accordingly, a highly accurate value is not required. For routine design purposes, bending
moments of 207 kilogram force-meters (kgf-m [1500 pound force-feet (lbf-ft)]) in the heavy
and medium storm-loading districts and a 414 kgf-m (3000 lbf-ft) in the light storm-loading
district are assumed.
Table 5.20
Load imposed by pole attachment
Storm-Loading District
Heavy Medium Light
Load per kg/m2 (lb/ft2) of projected area 4 4 9
kg/m 2 = Kilogram per square meter
lb/ft2 = Pound per square foot
Conditions
The following illustrates the calculation of required pole strength for a given transverse load,
assuming the indicated conditions:
• A 107 m (351 ft) average span
• Two 58 mm (2.3 in) cables lashed to a 10M support strand
• A 9 m (30 ft) unguyed pole is used
• Height of cable above ground is 7.3 m (24 ft)
• Grade B construction
• Heavy storm-loading district
• No pole equipment or service drops
Calculation
The formula for Mw is used with the numerical values given under Conditions.
Where:
PD = 2.18 kgf-m (1.46 lbf-ft) of span length (See heavy storm-loading in
Table 5.19.)
S = 107 m (351 ft)
L = 7.3 m (24 ft)
N=2
Then:
Mw = 1.46 × 351 ft × 24 ft × 2 = 24,528 lbf-ft
Mw = 2.19 × 107 m × 7.3 m × 2 = 3421 kgf-m
Estimation
The bending moment caused by wind on the pole (Mp) is assumed to be 207 kgf-m (1500 lbf-
ft) in the heavy storm-loading area.
Selection
Vertical Load
Vertical loads on poles may be caused by any combination of loading factors. These
factors include anchor guying and the dead weight of wires, cables, and other attachments
on the poles.
As a general rule, vertical loads caused by conductors and pole attachments need not be
considered in pole line design; however, these loads should be considered in the case of guyed
poles. The most severe vertical load to which a guyed pole may be subjected is the vertical
component of the tension in the guy or guys. For purposes of pole selection, the maximum
tension in the guy is usually assumed to be the minimum breaking strength of the guy.
Table 5.21 may be used to determine the minimum pole class.
Table 5.21
Minimum pole class to support vertical load
Length of Pole m (ft)
Vertical Load 6 7.6 9 10.7 12 13.7 15
kg/lb (20) (25) (30) (35) (40) (45) (50)
2268 (5000) 10 9 9 7 7 7 7
4536 (10,000) 9 9 7 7 7 6 6
6804 (15,000) 9 7 7 6 6 5 5
9072 (20,000) 7 7 6 6 5 5 4
13 608 (30,000) 6 6 5 5 4 4 3
22 680 (50,000) 5 4 4 3 3 2 2
45 360 (100,000) 3 2 1 1 1 - -
ft = Foot
kg = Kilogram
lb = Pound
M = Meter
Attachment Space
Pole height should provide sufficient space for the maximum number of attachments that will
be made during the service life of the pole line. The attachment space must include the space
between the top of the pole, as well as the highest and lowest attachments.
For pole lines supporting cable, 457 mm (18 in) should be provided at the top of the pole and
305 mm (12 in) for each cable attachment.
Figure 5.42
Pole placement utilizing terrain feature
These tables are based on average weights. Check with the cable manufacturer for exact
weights.
Table 5.22
Maximum span lengths for self-supporting cable
19 22 24 26 19 22 24 26
BHBS BHAS BKMS BKTS BHBP BHAP BKMP BKTP
Pairs m (ft) m (ft) m (ft) m (ft) m (ft) m (ft) m (ft) m (ft)
25 145 (476) 168 (550) 183 (600) 198 (650) 122 (400) 145 (476) 145 (476) 152 (500)
50 114 (374) 145 (476) 168 (550) 183 (600) 107 (351) 122 (400) 130 (427) 145 (476)
100 114 (374) 130 (427) 152 (500) 101 (331) 114 (374) 130 (427)
200 107 (351) 122 (400) 107 (351) 94 (308) 107 (351)
300 107 (351) 96 (315)
ft = Foot
M = Meter
NOTE: For an explanation of cable description codes, see Cable Construction Types in
Chapter 4: Cabling Infrastructure.
Table 5.23
Pole span length/tension
Installation Temperature °F
0 20 40 60 80 100
Span
Length Tension Sag Tension Sag Tension Sag Tension Sag Tension Sag Tension Sag
ft lbf in lbf in lbf in lbf in lbf in lbf in
Table 5.24
Weight for ALPETH cable
Part Pair Nominal Approximate
Number Count Outside Diameter Weight
mm (in) kg/km (lbs/kf)
19 AWG
[0.91 mm (0.036 in)]
85-031-01 25 19 (0.75) 453 (305)
85-034-01 50 25 (1.00) 846 (568)
85-038-01 100 34 (1.35) 1597 (1073)
85-042-01 200 47 (1.86) 3121 (2098)
85-44-01 300 57 (2.25) 4609 (3098)
85-046-01 400 66 (2.6) 6095 (4096)
22 AWG
[0.64 mm (0.025 in)]
85-062-01 25 15 (0.59) 258 (174)
85-065-01 50 19 (0.75) 459 (308)
85-069-01 100 25 (1.00) 853 (573)
85-073-01 200 34 (1.35) 1630 (1095)
85-075-01 300 41 (1.6) 2391 (1607)
85-077-01 400 47 (1.85) 3147 (2115)
85-081-01 600 57 (2.25) 4680 (3145)
85-083-01 900 69 (2.71) 6939 (4663)
24 AWG
[0.51 mm (0.020 in)]
85-097-01 25 12 (0.47) 180 (121)
85-100-01 50 16 (0.63) 314 (211)
85-104-01 100 21 (0.81) 567 (981)
85-108-01 200 28 (1.09) 1067 (717)
85-110-01 300 33 (1.3) 1568 (1054)
85-112-01 400 37 (1.47) 2056 (1381)
85-116-01 600 45 (1.75) 3025 (2033)
85-118-01 900 55 (2.15) 4467 (3002)
85-120-01 1200 63 (2.46) 5891 (3959)
Table 5.24
Weight for ALPETH cable, continued
Part Pair Nominal Approximate
Number Count Outside Diameter Weight
mm (in) kg/km (lbs/kf)
26 AWG
[0.41 mm (0.016 in)]
85-132-01 25 10 (0.39) 127 (85)
85-135-01 50 13 (0.52) 214 (144)
85-139-01 100 17 (0.67) 374 (252)
85-143-01 200 22 (0.87) 691 (464)
85-145-01 300 26 (1.04) 1012 (680)
85-147-01 400 30 (1.18) 1324 (889)
85-151-01 600 36 (1.42) 1929 (1296)
85-153-01 900 44 (1.72) 2837 (1906)
85-155-01 1200 50 (1.96) 3725 (2503)
85-156-01 1500 55 (2.18) 4618 (3104)
85-157-01 1800 60 (2.37) 5510 (3703)
in = Inch
kf = Kilofoot
kg = Kilogram
km = Kilometer
lb = Pound
mm = Millimeter
Table 5.25
Cable weight for self-supporting cable
Part Pair Nominal Approximate
Number Count Outside Diameter Weight
mm (in) kg/km (lbs/kf)
Minor Major
BHBS - 19 AWG [0.91 mm (0.036 in)]
20-026-43 6 12 (0.47) 24 (0.95) 422 (283)
20-031-43 25 15 (0.59) 27 (1.07) 731 (491)
20-034-43 50 25 (1) 37 (1.45) 1042 (700)
BHAS - 22 AWG [0.64 mm (0.025 in)]
20-062-43 25 15 (0.59) 27 (1.07) 461 (310)
20-065-43 50 19 (0.75) 31 (1.22) 662 (445)
20-069-43 100 25 (1) 37 (1.45) 1049 (705)
BKMS - 24 AWG [0.51 mm (0.020 in)]
20-097-43 25 12 (0.47) 24 (0.95) 387 (260)
20-100-43 50 16 (0.63) 28 (1.09) 513 (345)
20-104-43 100 20 (0.80) 32 (1.25) 766 (515)
20-108-43 200 28 (1.09) 40 (1.56) 1250 (840)
BKTS - 26 AWG [0.41 mm (0.016 in)]
20-132-43 25 11 (0.43) 23 (0.91) 381 (256)
20-135-43 50 13 (0.53) 25 (1) 417 (280)
20-139-43 100 17 (1.07) 29 (1.14) 580 (390)
20-143-43 200 24 (0.95) 36 (1.40) 964 (647)
20-145-43 300 32 (1.25) 44 (1.72) 1271 (853)
in = Inch
kf = Kilofoot
kg = Kilogram
km = Kilometer
lb = Pound
mm = Millimeter
Table 5.26
Cable weight for self-supporting cable reinforced sheath
Part Pair Nominal Approximate
Number Count Outside Diameter Weight
mm (in) kg/km (lbs/kf)
Minor Major
BHBP - 19 AWG
[0.91 mm (0.036 in)]
20-026-20 6 21 (0.83) 33 (1.3) 562 (377)
20-031-20 25 30 (1.18) 42 (1.66) 940 (631)
20-034-20 50 35 (1.3) 47 (1.85) 1420 (953)
BHAP - 22 AWG
[0.64 mm (0.025 in)]
20-062-20 25 19 (0.75) 31 (1.21) 625 (420)
20-065-20 50 24 (0.95) 35 (1.3) 885 (595)
20-069-20 100 30 (1.18) 42 (1.64) 1332 (895)
BKMP - 24 AWG
[0.51 mm (0.020 in)]
20-097-20 25 17 (0.67) 28 (1.09) 528 (355)
20-100-20 50 20 (0.8) 32 (1.25) 692 (465)
20-104-20 100 25 (0.99) 37 (1.45) 977 (670)
20-108-20 200 32 (1.25) 44 (1.72) 1562 (1050)
BKTP - 26 AWG
[0.41 mm (0.016 in)]
20-132-20 25 15 (0.59) 27 (1.07) 454 (305)
20-135-20 50 18 (0.7) 29 (1.14) 573 (385)
20-139-20 100 21 (0.84) 33 (1.3) 774 (520)
20-143-20 200 28 (1.09) 39 (1.55) 1153 (775)
20-145-20 300 31 (1.22) 43 (1.69) 1495 (1005)
in = Inch
kf = Kilofoot
kg = Kilogram
km = Kilometer
lb = Pound
mm = Millimeter
Figure 5.43
Slack span
Slack span
Last section
Figure 5.44
Building attachment methods
Square
washer
Guy bolt
Cable clamp
ft = Foot
in = Inch
m = Meter
mm = Millimeter
Using pole to building slack span construction is recommended for cables under 300 pairs.
For cables 300 pair or greater, an alternate route into the building should be selected.
Figure 5.45
Flying cross
EOP EOP
EOP
Turn lane Merge lane
Street
Clearances
A designer should be concerned with the following types of clearances:
• Vertical clearances of cables, hardware, and equipment above roadways, driveways,
railroads, and buildings
• Vertical clearances between telecommunications cables and other utilities (e.g., power,
CATV, other low-voltage signaling)
• Horizontal clearances between poles, stubs, anchors and guys, and conflicting plants
Clearances, continued
Attachment Clearances
Table 5.27 lists typical attachment clearances.
Table 5.27
Typical attachment clearances
Description Vertical Clearance
Grounded metal sheath power cables, nonmetallic 1000 mm (40 in)*
sheath power cables on grounded support strand,
and power cables consisting of insulated conductors
lashed to or spiraled around a grounded strand
Open supply conductors
to 8.7 kV 1020 mm (40 in)
8.7 to 50 kV 1020 mm (40 in) plus 10 mm (0.4 in)
per kV over 8.7 kV
Drip loops for luminaries or traffic signal brackets 305 mm (12 in)
Grounded supply equipment (e.g., transformers) 762 mm (30 in)
* May be reduced to 760 mm (30 in) for supply neutrals meeting Rule 230E1 and cables
meeting Rule 230C1. See NESC for details.
in = Inch
kV = Kilovolt
mm = Millimeter
Clearances, continued
Midspan Clearances
Since the aerial support strand is strung between poles with a specified tension, the addition of
the cable’s weight produces sag. The lowest point of this sag is termed the midspan
because of its centralized location between two poles. Midspan clearances should be at least
75 percent of the clearance required at the pole. Consult the applicable codes, standards,
and regulations for specific details. Vertical clearances between telecommunications cables
and other utilities (e.g., power, CATV, other low-voltage signaling) should be checked at
midspan clearances (see Figure 5.46).
Figure 5.46
Midspan clearances
Power
Midspan Midspan
Telephone clearance
clearance
CATV
Clearances, continued
Vertical Clearances
Both attachment clearances and midspan clearances must meet minimum height requirements
of the AHJ (e.g., Part 2 of the NESC 2007 requirements) for vertical clearances over:
• Sidewalks.
• Driveways, parking lots, and alleys.
• Railroad tracks.
• Roads, streets, and other areas subject to truck traffic.
• Roofs accessible to vehicular and truck traffic.
• Balconies and roofs accessible to pedestrians only.
• Water areas not subject to sailboat traffic.
• Sailboat rigging and launching areas, serving water areas.
• Rural roads.
Consult Figures 5.47 and 5.48 and Tables 5.28 and 5.29 for vertical clearance requirements.
Figure 5.47
Vertical clearances over obstacles
Vertical
clearance
Clearances, continued
Figure 5.48
Vertical clearances between utilities
Vertical
clearance
Power
CATV
Telephone Vertical
clearance
Clearances, continued
Table 5.28
Minimum vertical clearances of cables above ground or rails at midspan crossing
Residence Ways for
Span Public Streets, Alleys Pedestrians Tracks
Length Roads, or Alleys Driveways not Meeting Only Railroad
m (ft) m (ft) m (ft) m (ft) m (ft) m (ft)
107 (350) 5.5 (18) 3 (10) 3 (10) 2.4 (8) 7.6 (25)
122 (400) 5.64 (18.5) 4.72 (15.5) 3.2 (10.5) 2.6 (8.5) 7.9 (25.8)
137 (450) 5.8 (19) 5.0 (16.0) 3.4 (11.0) 2.74 (9.0) 8.1 (26.5)
152 (500) 5.94 (19.5) 5.1 (16.5) 3.5 (11.5) 2.9 (9.5) 8.3 (27.3)
168 (550) 6 (20.0) 5.2 (17) 3.7 (12) 3 (10) 8.5 (28)
183 (600) 6.25 (20.5) 5.3 (17.4) 3.8 (12.5) 3.2 (10.5) 8.8 (28.8)
ft = Foot
M = Meter
Table 5.29
Minimum vertical clearance of cable runs along and within limits of public highways
Span Ways for
Length Urban Streets Alleys Pedestrians Only Rural Roads
m (ft) m (ft) m (ft) m (ft) m (ft)
Clearances, continued
Radial Clearances
A 1.4 m (4.5 ft) horizontal and a 3.2 m (10.5 ft) vertical clearance (see Figure 5.49) should be
maintained from:
• Antennas.
• Signs.
• Pole structures.
• Storage tanks.
• Chimneys.
Figure 5.49
Clearance distances
Sign
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Support Strands
Select support strands based on:
• Cable weights.
• Number of cables.
• Storm loading.
• Tensile strength.
• Pole spacing.
Based on stringing tension, the designer should plan the pole line not to exceed 60 percent
of the rated breaking strength of the cable support strand. Cable support strands are available
in various classes, depending on the weight of the zinc coating applied to the support strands.
To avoid long-term deterioration, higher rated zinc coatings should be used in highly corrosive
environments such as coastal areas.
Table 5.30
Strand sizes
Size Diameter Breaking Strength Weight
6M 7.9 mm (0.312 in) 26.7 kN (6,000 lbf) 0.33 kg/m (0.225 lb/ft)
6.6M 6.4 mm (0.250 in) 29.6 kN (6,650 lbf) 0.18 kg/m (0.121 lb/ft)
10M 9.5 mm (0.375 in) 51.2 kN (11,500 lbf) 0.40 kg/m (0.270 lb/ft)
16M 11.1 mm (0.438 in) 80.1 kN (18,000 lbf) 0.58 kg/m (0.390 lb/ft)
25M 12.7 mm (0.500 in) 111.0 kN (25,000 lbf) 0.76 kg/m (0.510 lb/ft)
in = Inch
kN = Kilonewton
lbf = Pound force
mm = Millimeter
As seen in Table 5.30, the maximum span length for cables of the same weight increases as
the size of the support strand increases. However, since each step up produces a larger and
more expensive support strand, caution should be exercised when arbitrarily increasing the
size of the support strand. In OSP construction, 6M and 10M are the most commonly used
cable support strands; 2.2M should not be used to support aerial cable.
Figure 5.50
Push brace
Push brace
Cable
Push brace
Street
Plan view
Grade
Anchor planks
Push brace
Elevation Street
view
Figure 5.51
Guying configurations
Wall/fence
Deadend guy
Cul-de-sac
Sidewalk
guy
Cable
Deadend
guy Holder
(Galvanized
iron pipe) Corner guy
Sidewalk guy
Anchor Plan view
Wall/fence
Sidewalk
Cul-de-sac
Corner guy
Anchor
Storm Guying
The amount of storm guying in any line will depend upon the expected severity of individual
storms in the particular area and the amount of exposure to such storms on any section of the
line. Generally, only those sections of a pole line needing to be storm guyed are those that are
greater than 1.6 km (1 mi) in length and where no head guys appear. Two-way storm guys
should be placed at about 1.k km (l mi) intervals, and four-way storm guys at about 3 km
(2 mi) intervals in those sections of line requiring storm guys. Storm guying is illustrated in
Figures 5.52.
Figure 5.52
Storm guying
Lead-to-Height Ratio
Measured in meters or feet, lead-to-height ratio is equal to the lead divided by the height of the
attachment (see Figure 5.53).
Lead is the horizontal distance from the base of the pole to the anchor rod. Height is the
vertical distance from the ground line to the point of guy attachment on the pole. See
Table 5.32 for maximum allowable tension for guys.
Measured in meters or feet, lead-to-height ratio is equal to the lead divided by the height of the
pole.
Example: If the pole height is 9 m (30 ft) and the lead is 4.6 m (15 ft), then the ratio is equal to
15/30 = 1/2. If the lead is increased to 6 m (20 ft), the ratio is equal to 20/30 = 2/3.
If the lead is increased to 7.6 m (25 ft), the ratio is equal to 25/30 = 5/6. As a rule of
thumb, if the ratio is 3/4 or greater, the strand size for the guy can be the same as
that of the strand. If the ratio is between 1/2 and 3/4, and only two or three spans
are involved, use the next larger cable size for the guy.
Example: A cable is being placed on a 9 m (30 ft) power pole. The point of attachment for the
strand is 6 m (20 ft) above the ground. As a rule of thumb, the lead would be listed
as 4.6 m (15 ft). The lead-to-height ratio is 3/4.
Figure 5.53
Definition of lead and height
Height
Height
Height Lead
Height
Lead Lead
Lead n
ai
rr
Te
ing
op
Sl
Height
Height
Lead (H)
Lead
(L)
Height (H)
Guy attachment
Pipe
Sidewalk
Figure 5.54
Calculating pull with pull finder
16 mm (5/8 in)
Rod
M
6 d
.6
M n
0 a
1 tr
S
M
5
R
2
od
Screw
Underside view of guy rod
Front thread
and strand gauge
sight
Front
Back
sight
sight
Index
mark
in = Inch
mm = Millimeter
Figure 5.55
Calculating pull with tape measure
t)
0f 30 ft)
(5 .5
m m 00
15 (1 Pull (1
Corner pole 00 m
Pull ft) .5
15 30
m N
(5 Corner pole
0f
t)
Corner pole
30.5 m (100 ft) 30.5 m (100 ft)
Pull
Pole Pole
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Table 5.31
Calculating pull when angle is known
Table 5.32
Maximum allowable tension for guys
Grade of Construction Maximum Allowable Tension for Guys
Percent of Guy Safety Factor
Rated Breaking
Strength
Grade B
Transverse load 37.5 2.67
Guy Size
Deadends and corners in pole lines usually require guying to support the cable or wire facility.
The size of the guy is based on the size of the suspension strand or type of wire, the lead and
height of the guy, and the pull on the pole (see Table 5.33), as follows:
• If the lead-to-height ratio is 3/4 or greater, head guys for cables can be the same size as
the suspension strand.
• If the lead-to-height ratio is between 1/2 and 3/4 and only two or three spans are involved,
head guys for cables should be one size larger than the suspension strand.
• For all other guys, the guy rule should be used to determine guy size (see Figure 5.56).
Where 6M guy is indicated, 6.6M guy may be used.
• At corner poles, a pull finder should be used to determine the pull on a pole.
• If the pull on a corner pole is less than 15 m (50 ft), a guy can be placed at a bisecting
angle.
• If the pull is greater than a 45 degree angle, two head guys are required, an arrangement
known as double deadend.
Table 5.33
Minimum guy strand selection table
Filled Copper or Optical Fiber Cable Corner
Heavy, Medium, and Light Loading Districts
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
6M 1/2 6M 6M 6M 6M 6M 6M 10M 10M 10M
1 6M 6M 6M 6M 6M 6M 6M 6M 6M
10M 1/2 6M 6M 6M 6M 10M 10M 10M 16M 16M
1 6M 6M 6M 6M 6M 6M 6M 10M 10M
16M 1/2 6M 6M 10M 10M 10M 16M 16M 20M 20M
1 6M 6M 6M 6M 10M 10M 10M 6M 16M
20M 1/2 6M 6M 10M 10M 16M 16M 20M 26M 26M
1 6M 6M 6M 6M 10M 10M 16M 16M 16M
NOTES: For 20M guy size, two 10M guys or equivalents should be used.
For 26M guy size, one 10M guy and one 16M guy or equivalents should be used.
For 32M guy size, two 16M guys or equivalents should be used.
Figure 5.56
Guy rule
Table 5.34
Guy strand selection table
Figure 5.57
Using guy strand selection chart example
Height
10M 10M 6 m (20 ft)
20
Lead
6 m (20 ft)
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Anchors
Existing field conditions determine the type of anchor to be used (see Figure 5.58). Types of
anchors include:
• Expansion anchor.
• Screw anchor.
• Plate anchor.
• Plank anchor.
• Pole-to-pole anchor.
• Rock anchor.
• Log anchor.
• Stub and anchor.
• Swamp anchors.
Figure 5.58
Types of common anchors
Rod
Closed Open
Expansion anchor
Anchor
rod
Screw anchor
Length as
required
Plate anchor
Swap anchor
Cross piece
set in recess
Soil Classifications
Soils are classified according to type, condition, and moisture content, as follows:
• Class 1—Hard rock, solid.
• Class 2—Shale, sandstone, solid, or in adjacent layers.
• Class 3—Hard dry, hardpan. Requires use of digging bar.
• Class 4—Crumbly, damp. This class contains mostly clay, is not moist enough to pack into
a ball when squeezed by hand, and has particles that crumble off.
• Class 5—Firm, moist. This class contains mostly clay which, when squeezed by hand,
forms into a firm ball. Moist soils in well-drained areas are in this class.
• Class 6—Plastic, wet. This class contains mostly clay and is usually found in fairly flat
terrain. When squeezed by hand, it readily assumes any shape.
• Class 7a—Loose, dry. This class is found in arid regions and contains mostly sand and
gravel. Filled- in or built-up areas in dry regions are in this class.
• Class 7b—Loose, wet. This class has the same holding ability as class 7a and is high in
sand, gravel, or loam content; however, its holding ability decreases during rainy seasons.
This class of soil is usually found in poorly drained areas.
• Class 8—Swamps and marshes. This class includes areas where the soils are marshy
only seasonally. Moist soils will vary in their classification during the year because of
changes in moisture content. Extreme conditions should be estimated.
The holding ability of an anchor is determined by the type and size of the anchor and the soil
conditions. Moisture content and its effect on soil is a greater factor in deciding ultimate soil-
anchor holding strengths than factors based on fine divisions of soil content. The ultimate soil-
anchor holding strength is reached at the point where the anchor will start pulling out in a
particular soil when placed at a 45-degree angle and the anchors set to a specified depth of
rod length, less 152 mm (6 in). The groups are listed in Table 5.35.
Table 5.35
Anchor groupings
Group Type Anchor
1 Screw 152 mm (6 in)
Cone 152 mm (6 in)
2 Screw 203 mm (8 in)
Cone 203 mm (8 in)
Expanding 152 mm (6 in), 2 way
3 Screw 254 mm (10 in), 1.7 m rod (5 -1/2 ft rod)
Cone 254 mm (10 in)
Expanding 152 mm (6 in), 4 way
Expanding 152 mm (6 in), 8 way, 45161 mm2 (70 in2) area
4 Screw 254 mm (10 in), 1.7 m rod (8 ft rod)
Cone 305 mm (12 in)
Expanding 203 mm (8 in), 2 way
Expanding 203 mm (8 in), 3 way
Plate 152 mm (6 in) x 432 mm (17 in)
Log 1 m x 178 mm (3 ft x 7 in)
5 Expanding 203 mm (8 in), 4 way
Expanding 203 mm (8 in), 8 way
Plate 152 mm x 559 mm (6 in x 22 in)
Plate 406 mm (16 in) crossplate
Log 1.2 m x 203 mm (4 ft x 8 in)
6 Cone 406 mm (16 in)
Expanding 254 mm (10 in), 4 way
Expanding 254 mm (10 in), 8 way
Plate 508 mm (20 in) crossplate
7 Cone 483 mm (19 in)
Plate 203 mm x 686 mm (8 in x 27 in)
Plate 508 mm (20 in) crossplate
8 Cone 584 mm (23 in)
Expanding 305 mm (12 in), 4 way
Plate 203 mm x 889 mm (8 in x 35 in)
Plate 610 mm (24 in) crossplate
Log 1.52 m x 254 mm (5 ft x 10 in)
9 Plate 2.54 mm x 1016 mm (10 in x 40 in)
Log 1.83 m x 254 mm (6 ft x 10 in)
10 Log 2.1 m x 305 mm (7 ft x 12 in)
11 Log 2.4 m x 305 mm (8 ft x 12 in)
ft = Foot
in = Inch
m = Meter
mm = Millimeter
Figure 5.59
Guy rod ends
For aerial construction, facility ownership may be determined based on poles and pole
markings. For new pole, underground, and buried installation, the designer will work with
the AHJ and locate subsurface utilities.
Selection of Anchors
The selection of the specific anchor within each group must be based upon the soil
classification, since some anchors are not suitable for all soil classes. The groupings are
arranged with the smallest anchors in the lowest numerical order. Group selection is made
using table 4.5, considering soil conditions and the holding power required.
The designer should first establish the soil classification for the particular area and then
establish the group of anchors most suitable for that condition. This procedure simplifies
supply and installation problems by eliminating unnecessary tools and unsuitable anchor types
(see Table 5..
Type Selection
Anchors within a specific group size may be used interchangeably at a guy location, provided
they are suitable for the particular soil. If no anchor in the specified group size is available, an
anchor from a numerically higher group size may be selected. If the available anchors in the
specified size group would be difficult to install, a suitable type of anchor may be selected
from another higher group size. Anchors from lower numbered group sizes than the group
specified for a specific guy location should not be used.
Anchor type selection is based on the adaptability of the anchor to the particular soil class; for
example, a cone anchor is not adaptable to loose soils. The equipment available for digging the
anchor hole will also help to determine the type of anchor to be used. Table 5.36 lists the types
of anchors recommended for installation in the different soil classes.
Table 5.36
Soil classifications
Probe Typical Blow
Values Count “N”
Class Common Soil-Type Geological Soil in-lb Per
Description Classification (N/m) ASTM-D1586
0 Sound hard rock, Granite, basalt, N/A N/A
unweathered massive limestone
1 Very dense or cemented Caliche (nitrate-bearing 750-1600 60-100+
sands; coarse gravel gravel/rock) (85-181)
and cobbles
2 Dense fine sands; very Basal till; boulder clay; 600-750 45-60
hard silts and clays caliche; weathered (68-85)
(may be preloaded) laminated rock
3 Dense sands and gravel; Glacial till; weathered 500-600 35-50
hard silts and clays shales, schist, gneiss (56-68)
and siltstone
4 Medium dense sand and Glacial till; hardpan; marls 400-500 24-40
gravel; very stiff to hard (45-56)
silts and clays
5 Medium dense coarse Saprolites, residual soils 300-400 14-25
sands and sandy gravels; (34-45)
stiff to very stiff silts
and clays
6 Loose to medium dense Dense hydraulic fill; 200-300 7-14
fine to coarse sands to compacted fill; (23-34)
stiff clays and silts residual soils
*7 Loose fine sands; alluvium; Flood plain soils, 100-200 4-8
loess; medium-stiff and lake clays; adobe; (11-23)
varied clays; fill gumbo, fill
*8 Peat, organic silts; Miscellaneous fill, Less than 100 0-5
inundated silts, fly ash swamp marsh (0-11)
very loose sands, very
soft to soft clays
NOTE: Class 1 soils are difficult to probe consistently and the ASTM blow count may be of
questionable value.
* It is advisable to install anchors deep enough, by the use of extensions, to penetrate a
Class 5 or 6, underlying the Class 7 or 8 soils.
Table 5.37
Anchor types recommended for different soil classes
Soil Class Recommended Anchor Type
1 Solid rock Expanding rock
2 Layered rock Cone
Log
3 Hardpan Crossplate or plank
Plate
Cone
Expanding
Log
4 Crumbly, damp Crossplate or plank
Plate
Cone
Expanding
Log
Screw
5 Firm, moist Crossplate or plank
Plate
Screw
Expanding
Log
6 Plastic, wet Crossplate or plank
Plate
Screw
Expanding
Log
7 Loose, wet, or dry Screw
Expanding
Crossplate or plank
LogPlate
8 Swamp Swamp screw
Log
Location
Safety, appearance, and economy should be considered when locating guy anchors. Anchors
should be kept away from locations where they would be subject to mechanical damage (e.g.,
curbs and roads) and where they could cause personal injury (e.g., sidewalks and building
entrances).
Installation
Earth augers are used to dig holes for anchors wherever practicable. Anchors should be
placed with the anchor rod as nearly in line as possible with the point of attachment of the guy
to the pole, and the rod should be turned to face the eye properly. After the anchor is placed,
the anchor hole should be filled and tamped. Soil should be heaped and packed around the rod.
The anchor rod should not be exposed more than 152 mm (6 in) above the ground, with the
eye of the anchor rod left clear .Log anchors require square or curved washers at least
101 mm (4 in) across connected to the end of the anchor rod to prevent the rod from pulling
through the log.
Table 5.38
Grades of construction for communications conductors
Communication Conductors
Conductors, Tracks, (Communication Conductors, Rural or
and Rights-of-Way Urban, Open or Cable, Including Those
at Lower Levels Run in the Supply Space)
Exclusive private right-of-way N
Common or public rights-of-way N
Railroad tracks and limited-access highways1 B
Constant-potential supply conductors2 N
0 to 750 V
Open or cable
750 V to 2.9 kV C
Open or cable
Exceeding 2.9 kV
Open B
Cable C
Constant-current supply conductor2 C
0 to 7.5 A
Open3
Exceeding 7.5 A B4
Open3
Communications conductors, open or cable, urban B, C, or N
or rural including those run in the supply space
1 There is no intent to require Grade B over ordinary streets and highways.
2 The words open and cable appearing in the headlines have the following meaning as
applied to supply conductors: Cable means Type 1 cables as described in Rule 241A1; open
means open-wire and also Type 2 cables, as described in Rule 241A2.
3 Where constant-current circuits are in Type 1 cable, the grade of construction shall be
based on the nominal full-load voltage.
4 Grade C construction may be used if the open-circuit voltage of the transformer supplying
the circuit does not exceed 2.9 kV.
A = Ampere
k V = Kilovolt
System Plans
A designer should be aware of any existing future system plans for an existing pole line.
These may include regional road move plans or any future plans for the additions of cable.
Joint-Use Agreements
If the existing pole line is owned by another utility or municipality, the designer must verify the
existence of a joint-use agreement and submit the proper documentation to the utility in order
to obtain permission to attach. Approval can be as simple as providing the utility with a set of
construction drawings or as complicated as negotiating a joint-use agreement and rental fees
for the use of the pole space.
Makeready Work
Joint use of an existing utility pole line still requires maintaining all separations between utilities,
structures, and elevations above ground for streets, sidewalks, railroads, and other ground
clearances (see Tables 5.27, 5.28, and 5.29). Agreements must be negotiated to inspect and
move existing utilities (e.g., install taller poles and then transfer and respace utilities) to provide
necessary clearances. This can be a lengthy and expensive process.
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 13: Special Design Considerations for further information.
Figure 5.60
Aerial to underground transition
Splice case
Aerial cable
Lateral cable
Pole Conduit or
cable guard
Conduit Conduit
Figure 5.61
Aerial to direct-buried transition
Splice case
Aerial cable
Lateral cable
Buried cable
Figure 5.62
Underground to direct-buried transition
Pedestal/splice closure
Buried cable
Underground cable
Splice case
Maintenance hole
Figure 5.63
Underground to building transition
Building
Backboard
Protector
Cable
Splice
case Subsidiary
conduit
Conduit Conduit
Underground
cable Maintenance hole
Figure 5.64
Aerial to building transition
Aerial cable
Splice case
Terminal
protector
Sleeve through
building wall
Backboard
Aerial
cable
Protector
Figure 5.65
Direct-buried to building transition
Terminal protector
Pedestal/splice closure
Grade
Sleeve
Direct-buried cable
Protector
Backboard
Sleeve through
building wall
Cable
Pedestal/splice closure
Grade
Direct-buried cable
Placement
General
The depth of setting will vary according to the:
• Pole length.
• Type of soil.
• Number and type of attachments on the pole.
The nature of the soil should be established during the initial field survey so that proper
recommendations for setting depth and necessary special tools may be indicated on the
construction work prints.
Table 5.39
Standard pole settings
Length of Depth of Setting In Depth of Setting
Pole Average Firm Soil in Solid Rock
m (ft) m (ft) m (ft*)
Table 5.40
Pole settings for solid rock below surface level
0.0 0.9 0.9 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.4 1.4 1.5 1.5 1.8 2.1 2.1
(0.0) (3.0) (3.0) (3.5) (4.0) (4.0) (4.5) (4.5) (5.0) (5.0) (6.0) (7.0) (7.0)
0.2 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.4 1.4 1.7 1.7 1.8 1.8 2 2.3 2.3
(0.5) (3.5) (3.5) (4.0) (4.5) (4.5) (5.5) (5.5) (6.0) (6.0) (6.5) (7.5) (7.5)
0.3 1.2 1.2 1.4 1.5 1.5 1.7 1.7 1.8 1.8 2.1 2.4 2.4
(1.0) (4.0) (4.0) (4.5) (5.0) (5.0) (5.5) (5.5) (6.0) (6.0) (7.0) (8.0) (8.0)
0.5 1.2 1.4 1.2 1.7 1.7 1.8 1.8 2 2 2.3 2.6 2.6
(1.5) (4.0) (4.5) (4.0) (5.5) (5.5) (6.0) (6.0) (6.5) (6.5) (7.5) (8.5) (8.5)
0.6 1.5 1.5 1.7 1.8 1.8 2 2 2.1 2.1 2.4 2.7 2.7
(2.0) (5.0) (5.0) (5.5) (6.0) (6.0) (6.5) (6.5) (7.0) (7.0) (8.0) (9.0) (9.0)
0.8 1.2 1.5 1.7 1.8 1.8 2 2.1 2.3 2.3 2.6 2.9 2.9
(2.5) (4.0) (5.0) (5.5) (6.0) (6.0) (6.5) (7.0) (7.5) (7.5) (8.5) (9.5) (9.5)
0.9 1.2 1.5 1.7 1.8 1.8 2 2.1 2.3 2.4 2.7 2.9 3
(3.0) (4.0) (5.0) (5.5) (6.0) (6.0) (6.5) (7.0) (7.5) (8.0) (9.0) (9.5) (10.0)
1.1 1.2 1.5 1.7 1.8 1.8 2 2.1 2.3 2.4 2.7 3 3.2
(3.5) (4.0) (5.0) (5.5) (6.0) (6.0) (6.5) (7.0) (7.5) (8.0) (9.0) (10.0) (10.5)
1.2 1.2 1.5 1.7 1.8 1.8 2 2.1 2.3 2.4 2.7 3 3.4
(4.0) (4.0) (5.0) (5.5) (6.0) (6.0) (6.5) (7.0) (7.5) (8.0) (9.0) (10.0) (11.0)
1.4 – 1.5 1.7 1.8 1.8 2 2.1 2.3 2.4 2.7 3 3.4
(4.5) – (5.0) (5.5) (6.0) (6.0) (6.5) (7.0) (7.5) (8.0) (9.0) (10.0) (11.0)
1.5 – 1.5 1.7 1.8 1.8 2 2.1 2.3 2.4 2.7 3 3.4
(5.0) – (5.0) (5.5) (6.0) (6.0) (6.5) (7.0) (7.5) (8.0) (9.0) (10.0) (11.0)
1.7 – – 1.7 1.8 1.8 2 2.1 2.3 2.4 2.7 3 3.4
(5.5) – – (5.5) (6.0) (6.0) (6.5) (7.0) (7.5) (8.0) (9.0) (10.0) (11.0)
Table 5.40
Pole settings for solid rock below surface level, continued
Frozen Soil
Permanently frozen soil or permafrost is common in the northernmost parts of North America,
Europe, and Asia. When poles are placed in soils over permafrost, the depth of the pole hole
must be increased; otherwise, the pole may be forced out of the ground or overturned during
refreezing of the soil at the surface level (see Figures 5.66 and 5.67). The depth of seasonal
thaws varies at different locations and depends primarily on the nature of the overlying soil
and the amount of ground water during the refreezing process. When the soil overlying the
permafrost is composed of coarse sand and gravel and is well drained, the soil is classified
as nonactive and the depth of the pole hole does not need to be increased over the standard
setting for poles in average firm soil.
Figure 5.66
Typical settings of poles in permafrost Ground Level
Ground Level
0.6 m
0.6 m (2 ft)
(2 ft)
2.7 m
(9 ft)
1.2 m
(4 ft)
Nonactive layer
Permafrost
Active layer
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Figure 5.67
Effect on pole when active layer above permafrost is refrozen
Active Layer
Permafrost
If the depth of the active layer of soil were 0.6 m (2 ft), the total depth of the
hole would be 0.6 m (2 ft) plus 0.9 m (3 ft) for required depth of setting, plus
1.2 m (4 ft) or twice the active layer of soil, for a total of 2.7 m (9 ft). Since
the 2.1 m (7 ft) depth in the permafrost layer is smaller than the setting in
average firm soil multiplied by the 1.5, no reduction in depth is allowed.
Swampy Soil
When poles are placed in swampy areas or loose soils, the depth of setting could be increased
0.3 m (1 ft) over the values for poles set in average firm soil. This increase in setting is
required only when a soil footing of 0.3 m (1 ft) or 0.6 m (2 ft) will be obtained or a plank
footing for the pole is not placed. It will not be necessary to increase the depth of holes for
poles supported by side guys, ground braces, or swamp fixtures. In extremely swampy soil, a
pole crib should be used.
Sloping Ground
The depth of pole holes in sloping ground is calculated by:
1. Placing a stick horizontally from the upper edge of the hole and measuring the distance A
between the stick and the lower edge of the hole as shown in Figure 5.68.
2. Obtaining the standard hole depth for the pole on the level grade from Tables 5.39 and
5.40, whichever applies.
3. Adding the distance A to the standard setting. The sum obtained is the depth at which the
pole should be set.
Figure 5.68
Setting pole in sloping ground
Surface of slope
Stick
“A”
Pole
hole
Depth in
level
ground
plus “A”
Soil
Figure 5.69
Typical pole crib
1.83 m (6 ft)
1.2 m x 1.83 m
(4 ft - 6 ft)
ROCKS
Swampland
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Unguyed Angles
All unguyed angle poles will be set 0.3 m (1 ft) deeper than the normal depth required for level
ground
Figure 5.70
Digging pole hole with hand tools
Digging
Spoon
1.52 m (5 ft)
Shovel
As deep as can
easily be dug with
1.52 m (5 ft) shovel
51 mm
(2 in) Hole
About 0.3 m
(1 ft)
Required
depth
Outline of
Barrel with proposed holes
ends Removed
ft = Foot
in = Inch
m = Meter
m = Millimeter
Using the long-handled, straight shovel or a digging bar, depending upon soil conditions, the dirt
in the bottom of the hole should be loosened. A digging spoon is then used to remove the loose
earth. The digging spoon is then pried against the side of the hole to gain leverage. The bottom
of the hole is squared off to the full diameter.
Large rocks that cannot be removed by hand or with the digging spoon should be shifted from
side to side and dropped to the bottom of the hole. The next step is to backfill around the rocks
and thoroughly tamp the soil. The hole should be dug deep enough to cover the rocks.
The sides of the hole should be shored if it is likely to cave in. A barrel with the head removed
or a section of metal culvert pipe may be used for this purpose. As the soil is removed, the
shoring should be forced down. The shoring can be removed easily and reused if the barrel
or culvert pipe is cut lengthwise and the cut edges are bent over. Two holes are drilled near
the top of the barrel or culvert pipe to attach a winch line. This line is used for pulling the
barrel or culvert pipe from the hole.
Figure 5.71
Digging pole hole with a water jet
Hose
5. After the pole has sunk to the required depth, turn off the water and remove the hose and
pike pole. Face and straighten the pole using a cant hook and fill the hole around the pole
with the overflow of sediment. Tamping is usually not required in this type of placement.
A swamp fixture may be required to hold the pole in place in a permanently erect position.
NOTE: The term pole support throughout this document is interchangeable with the term
deadman.
Figure 5.72
Setting pole using A-frame line truck
0.3 m
(1 ft)
minimum
Above
balance
point
Winch line
pulling
against top
and back
of hook
Rear support
jacks
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Figure 5.73
Sighting pole to ensure it is level and plumb
Second sighting
position
Figure 5.74
Raising pole using manpower, pole pikes, and a deadman pole support
Pike pole
Gant hooks
Pole support
Butting board
Raking Poles
A raked pole (see Figure 5.75) is one that inclines from a true vertical position. Poles are
raked to ensure that the pole top will be in line after strain is applied by attachment. Guyed
poles are normally raked by pulling them off their vertical position with the guy or by offsetting
the pole hole.
Figure 5.75
Raking pole prior to tamping
Approximately
0.3 m (1 ft)
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Plank Footings
Plank footings are used to support poles where the soil is unstable and the poles tend to sink
into the soil. Tamp the earth at the bottom of the pole hole. This tamping will provide a solid
foundation for a plank footing.
To accomplish this, place a treated plank of at least 51 mm (2 in) by 305 mm (12 in ) by
610 mm (24 in) in the bottom of the pole hole. If additional footing surface is required because
of soil conditions, two planks should be installed crosswise.
The pole should be raised and the butt should be centered on the plank footing. Cant and
camber of the pole should be aligned, the hole should be backfilled, and the backfill tamped
around the pole.
Figure 5.76
Plank footing for pole
Pole butt
Plank footing
Figure 5.77
Plank footing and catenary design
51 mm (2 in)
101 mm (4 in)
610 mm
(24 in) 610 mm
(24 in)
in = Inch
mm = Millimeter
Figure 5.78
Plank and log footing and catenary design
19 mm x 59 mm
(0.75 in x 2.25 in)
Creosoted anchor planks
Square washer (length)
or equivalent not less than
in crossarm bolt or 2 m
610 mm 51 mm x 305 mm x 610 mm
stubbing bolt (5 ft)
(24 in) (2 in x 12 in x 24 in)
nail planks with 30D
galvanized wire nails
ft = Foot
in = Inch
m = Meter
mm = Millimeter
Figure 5.79
Platform support
76 mm (3 in)
Lower plank
brace
Spacing block
Cross plank
Platform joist
Depth of setting
in = Inch
mm = Millimeter
Figure 5.80
Side guys and platform support
Figure 5.81
Platform support at H fixture
H fixture
Plaftorm
support
Ground Braces
Ground braces are used where the soil is unstable and will not keep the pole from leaning
sideways. They are also used where there is not sufficient space to allow the installation of
side guys or pole braces. Where the load on the pole is not large enough to warrant the use
of a guy, ground braces will be required.
Log Braces
Ground braces can be made of logs 203 mm (8 in) to 279 mm (11 in) in diameter, rather than
timbers (see Figure 5.82). Treated logs must be used whenever available. The log on the top
should be 1.2 m (4 ft) to 1.8 m (6 ft) below the ground line. The log on the bottom should be
0.6 to 1.2 m (2 to 4 ft) long, depending on the size of the pole. Logs should be notched to fit
the pole. The pole should not be notched. The following steps should be taken:
1. If a bottom brace must be installed, stop the backfilling of the pole hole about 305 mm
(12 in) from the bottom. Widen the hole to permit installation of the bottom log.
2. Place the bottom log firmly against the pole. To ensure compaction, tamp the backfill
completely around and over it. Continue backfilling the hole to a depth of 0.6 m (2 ft)
of the ground line. Dig the top of the pole hole wide enough to allow for installation of
the top log.
3. Place the top log firmly against the pole with the long axis of the log parallel to the line of
the lead. Tamp the backfill completely around and over it ensuring compaction. Complete
the backfilling and tamping of the pole hole.
Figure 5.82
Log ground brace
Direction of pull
Logs notched
to fit against
pole
Push Braces
Push braces are used instead of anchor guys only when there is not sufficient space to install
the guys. Use standard sized poles for push braces and frame the braces to bear flush against
the poles. In framing, treated poles do not expose the untreated wood. Dimensions for the
various push braces are given in Table 5.38.
Table 5.41
Lengths of pole braces
Distance from Pole to
Brace at Ground line Length of
Length of Pole (Center to Center) BraceRecommended
m (ft) m (ft) m (ft)
6 (20) 2.1 (7) 5.5 (18)
6.7 (22) 2.4 (8) 6 (20)
7.6 (25) 2.75 (9) 7 (23)
9.1 (30) 3.43 (11.25) 8.5 (28)
10.7 (35) 4.1 (13.5) 10 (33)
12 (40) 4.9 (16) 11.6 (38)
13.7 (45) 5.6 (18.25) 13.1 (43)
15 (50) 6.25 (20.5) 14.6 (48)
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Figure 5.83
Measuring for push brace
Lead = 1
Pole shown is
12 m (40 ft) long.
Butt of brace
Ground
profile
Ground line
of pole
1.83 m (6 ft)
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Figure 5.84
Push brace on single pole
Figure 5.85
Push brace on H fixture
Direction of pull
Attaching bolt
Reinforcing bolt
Figure 5.86
Double push brace
Push-Pull Braces
Push-pull braces are used only at locations where field conditions do not permit the use of
anchors and guys. They are installed as follows:
1. Dig a hole for the brace. Make the vertical distance from the ground to the bottom of the
brace hole as shown in Figure 5.87. Provide a trench at the bottom of the brace hole for a
log anchor. (See Table 5.41 for length requirements.)
2. Frame the log anchor and the bottom of the brace to provide a secure fit between the
anchor and the brace.
3. Attach the log anchor to the brace with a galvanized through bolt, fitted with two square
washers, a lock washer, and a nut.
4. Raise and set the push-pull brace in the brace hole.
5. Hold the brace in position against the pole with pike poles. Backfill the brace hole to
ensure compaction. Attach the brace to the pole as described in Push Braces at Single
Poles.
6. Reinforce the brace-to-pole attachment (when push brace brackets are not used) with six
wraps of galvanized wire around the pole and the brace at a point below the attaching
bolt. Drive a lag bolt of the required length equipped with curved washers, lock washer,
and a nut between the wires where the wires pass between the brace and the pole.
Tighten the wire wraps by tightening the nut on this bolt.
Figure 5.87
Push-pull brace
12.7 mm x 114 mm
(0.5 in x 4.5 in)
galvanized drive
screw
ft = Foot
in = Inch
m = Meter
mm = Millimeter
Spaces
Introduction
In outside plant (OSP) construction, various types of spaces perform a variety of functions.
This section covers space types, including:
• Maintenance holes (MHs).
• Handholes (HH), pedestals, and cabinets.
• Controlled environmental vaults (CEVs).
• Concrete universal enclosures (CUEs).
Confined Spaces
A confined space is one that a worker can enter and work in but that has limited or restrictive
means of entry or exit and that is not designed for continuous occupancy (e.g., MHs, vaults,
crawl spaces, attics).
In a confined space, harmful gasses or vapors may accumulate or there may not be sufficient
oxygen to support life. Hazardous atmospheres may be classified as:
• Flammable.
• Explosive.
• Asphyxiating.
• Toxic.
Additional adverse conditions are:
• Excessive noise (i.e., hearing protection required).
• Dust accumulation (e.g., combustibles).
• Flooding/engulfment.
• Excessive heat (e.g., exhaustion, stroke).
The OSP designer shall comply with all codes, standards, and regulations that address
telecommunications work performed on underground lines in MHs and vaults.
In the telecommunications industry, the following are considered confined spaces:
• Telecommunications MHs
• Ductbank trenches
• Tunnels
• Building entrance facilities (EFs)
• Vaults (vented and nonvented)
• Drop ceilings
• Mechanical equipment rooms (ERs)
• Motor control cabinets
Table 5.42
Maintenance hole ratings
This rating… Is used for…
Light duty Pedestrian traffic only
H-5 Sidewalk applications and occasional nondeliberate traffic
H-10 Driveways, parking lots, and off-road application subject to
occasional nondeliberate heavy vehicles
H-20 Deliberate heavy vehicular traffic
NOTE: The suffix denotes the ability to withstand a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) in
tons (e.g., H-5 represents 5000 kilograms (kg [13,396 pounds (lbs)]).
Except when needed to support telecommunications equipment, MHs (see Figures 5.88, 5.89,
and 5.90) should not be used as pathways for power and light conductors. For specific details,
consult the applicable safety codes.
If the MH is to be occupied by other utilities, their agreement should be obtained prior to MH
ordering or construction.
Figure 5.88
Typical maintenance hole (cutaway side view)
Cover
Frame
Steps Brick collar or
(as required) precast collar
Neck
(neck plastered)
Window
Ducts
recess
Sump
Floor
Figure 5.89
Maintenance hole diagram
Installation box to be placed
on 6" of compacted rock or
sand to ensure uniform
distribution of soil pressure
on floor. See manufacturer’s
Weight: specifications.
Top slab
(w/ 30" dia. opening) Reinforcement for H-20
traffic bridge loading
OD
7' 13
Opening size and 'O
D
location can vary
Top slab
30"
Diameter
opening
8"
7"
Base section
7'
Pull iron 13" DIA
each end sump
OD = Outside dimension
Figure 5.90
Maintenance hole frame, cover, and collar
762 mm
(30 in)
Clear opening
See detail
Adjusting studs
with slotted head
for installing into
Maintenance hole
insert (4 places)
cover collar (designed for
H-20 bridge load)
12.7 mm (0.5 in)
diameter inserts
(4 places for 19 mm (0.75 in) diameter
adjustments) 762 mm galvanized steel steps grouted
(30 in) between joints as required
Notch to receive
step (available in
305 mm [12 in] Precast concrete grade rings
gradering only) (76 mm [3 in], 152 mm [6 in],
914 mm 305 mm [12 in] heights available)
(36 in)
diameter
opening
Figure 5.91
Center conduit tray
Figure 5.92
Splayed conduit entry
Figure 5.93
Basic A precast maintenance hole
Basic A splayed
Table 5.43
Maintenance hole window selection
6 No 2nd 1st
8 No 1st 2nd
9 No 2nd 1st
12 No 1st 2nd
12 No 2nd 1st
15 No 2nd 1st
16 No 1st 2nd
Table 5.43
Maintenance hole window selection, continued
18 No 2nd 1st
20 No 1st 2nd
24 No 1st 2nd
28 No 1st 2nd
32 No 1st 2nd
Figure 5.94
Type A maintenance hole with center conduit window (plan view)
1.83 m
(6 ft)
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Figure 5.95
Type A maintenance hole with splayed window (plan view)
1.83 m
(6 ft)
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Figure 5.96
Type J maintenance hole with center conduit window (plan view)
1.83 m
(6 ft)
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Figure 5.97
Type J maintenance hole with splayed conduit windows (plan view)
1.83 m
(6 ft)
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Figure 5.98
Type L maintenance hole with center conduit window (plan view)
1.83 m
(6 ft)
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Figure 5.99
Type L maintenance hole with splayed conduit window (plan view)
1.83 m
(6 ft)
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Figure 5.100
Type T maintenance hole with center conduit window (plan view)
1.83 m
(6 ft)
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Figure 5.101
Type T maintenance hole with splayed conduit window (plan view)
1.83 m
(6 ft)
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Figure 5.102
Typical cable maintenance hole
Cable Elevation
hanger change
Cable rack
support
Splice
closure
Cable
Conduit
duct bank
Administration
All MHs and MH covers should be clearly labeled with ownership information and type of
utility. The labeling must be unique and the method must be consistent throughout the
installation.
The OSP designer should specify a standard or methodology that addresses the subject of
administration.
Sealing Ducts
All ducts between MHs should be sealed to prevent intrusion of liquids and gases into the
MH. Universal duct plugs are available in a variety of sizes for use in unoccupied ducts. In the
ducts where the cable has been installed, ducts can be sealed by putty sealant, cementitious
compounds, and hydraulic cement.
Lateral or subsidiary conduits to buildings must be sealed. Innerducts entering a building must
be firestopped.
Table 5.44
Maintenance hole frames and covers
Handholes (HHs)
HHs are smaller than MHs, but the covers provide full access to the entire space inside the
hole (see Figure 5.102). HHs are manufactured as concrete, polyethylene, or composite
structures. They can be placed in the same areas where MHs are placed. When planned for
traffic areas, they must be traffic rated.
When HHs are used in an underground installation, they are used as pull-through points and
shall not be used as splice points.
HHs should:
• Facilitate cable placement.
• Have drainage provisions (e.g., drain holes, open bottom, sump hole).
• Aid cable pulling when the bends exceed either two 90 degree bends or a total of
180 degrees, or the conduit section is so long it must be pulled in two segments.
• Meet applicable code requirements.
HHs shall not be:
• Used in a main conduit system or in place of a MH.
• Larger than 1.2 m (4 ft) long by 1.2 m (4 ft) wide by 1.2 m (4 ft) high.
• Used in runs of more than three 100 mm (4 trade size) conduits.
• Shared with electrical installations other than those used for telecommunications.
Conduit entering a HH should be aligned on opposite walls at the same elevation. Some
handholes are available without bottoms for drainage. When installed without bottoms, these
HHs should be equipped with a 101 mm (4 in) layer of small rock in the bottom to prevent
mud from intruding into the HH.
Figure 5.103
Typical handhole
457 mm
1016 mm (18 in)
(40 in)
Lifting eye
101 mm (4 in)
terminators
1220 mm
610 mm (48 in)
(24 in)
in = Inch
mm = Millimeter
Location
When planning the location of a HH, the designer should consider:
• Ground topography.
• Soil conditions.
• Location with respect to surrounding structures.
• Accessibility for personnel.
• Difficulty in using the HH for placing cable.
Introduction
Pedestals, cabinets, and vaults are housings used for storing splice closures and terminals in
OSP. Smaller housings are generally known as pedestals, and larger ones are known as
equipment or splice cabinets. They provide above-grade environmental protection, security,
and quick access to splice closures, terminals, excess cable, and optical fiber equipment.
Vaults provide environmental protection, security, and access to splice cases, cables, and
distribution equipment. They may be above or below the ground.
Pedestals, cabinets, and vaults may be mounted directly in the ground or on concrete pads,
mounting feet/stakes, floor stands, walls, or on poles. Rural Utilities Service (RUS) has
established classifications of pedestals as the general purpose channel type (H) and the dome
type (M). Type H pedestal has either front-only access or back and front access, while
Type M pedestal has top-only access.
These housings may include or provide space for:
• Locking device or hasp.
• Adjustable mounting bracket/panel to secure taps.
• Splitters.
• Couplers.
• Repeaters.
• Multiplexers.
• Transceivers.
• Line extenders.
• Amplifiers.
• Interdiction devices.
• Mounting hardware.
• Reels for cross connect wire storage.
• Warning labels.
• Grounding/bonding provisions.
• Identification.
• Manufacturers markings.
• Cable knockouts.
• Grommets.
• Circuit protectors.
Introduction, continued
Pedestals, cabinets, and vaults are used in aerial, direct-buried, and underground plant design.
In a direct-buried application, these housings create the capability of flexible cable and
terminal placement. They provide a high concentration of feeder cable to several distribution
cables with even higher cable pair or optical fiber strand needs. This can provide an
economical means of providing service over a short period of time.
When selecting pedestals and cabinets, the designer should consider:
• Cable bend radius greater or equal to 15 times the cable diameter.
• Capacity to accommodate four cables for current and future requirements.
• Capacity to accommodate both inline and butt splice closures.
• Security (e.g., special bolts, keys, security alarm monitoring).
• Flood control provisions.
• Weather-tight seals/gaskets/grommets.
• Optical cable storage to permit moving the splice closure to a working location.
• Ventilation for environmental control and/or heat extraction (forced air fan optional).
• Resistance to rodent and insect intrusion.
• Environmentally controlled cabinets (fans, heaters, and thermostats included).
• Color options.
• Impact (vandalism) resistance.
• Resistance to dust intrusion.
• Resistance to water vapor.
• Chemical resistance.
Cabinets
Cabinets are used for splicing or for placing equipment. A particular use is as a cross-connect
point. Large pair or optical fiber strand count splice cabinets are classified according to their
splice capacity.
Cabinets, continued
Figure 5.104
Pedestals and cabinets
CEVs are belowground enclosures that house not only the cables and connecting hardware,
but the electronic equipment they are connected to. When planning for CEVs, the designer
should consider shipping the equipment to be housed in them to the CEV manufacturer. The
equipment will be installed in the lower section of the vault and shipped to the job site. At the
job site, the lower section is installed first and the top section placed sealing the container to
the surrounding elements.
CEVs are:
• Precast concrete structures consisting of top and bottom sections.
• Available in various sizes. Standard sizes are 1.83 m (6 ft) by 5 m (16 ft) and
1.83 m (6 ft) by 7.3 m (24 ft).
• Designed to provide underground housing for electronic equipment (e.g., subscriber loop
carrier systems, lightwave digital transmission system generators).
• Generally placed in close proximity to a MH on a main underground route.
CEVs contain active equipment. Air conditioning is optional depending on where they are
being installed. As a result, they include extensive alarm systems (e.g., door intrusion,
emergency lights, smoke detector, power, moisture). They receive a similar level of security as
the central office (CO) and have controlled entry. It usually requires that the technician or
engineer contact the maintenance center before entering so that the alarm does not trigger a
security dispatch.
The designer must exercise caution when selecting a location for a CEV. Because CEVs are
designed to protect environmentally sensitive equipment, the bottom exhaust air vent must be
above the 100-year flood level.
A private right-of-way (R/W) agreement must be executed prior to the installation of a CEV if
the unit will be placed on a property owned by someone other than the customer. The
customer’s investment made must be protected. The location of the unit depends on execution
of the agreement.
CUEs are aboveground environmentally enclosed cabinets that house OSP cable and
electronic equipment. In some circumstances, a CUE can be used in place of a CEV.
CUEs:
• Are all-concrete construction, which provides equipment protection and security.
• Can accommodate six 2.1 m (7 ft) by 584 mm (23 in) equipment racks and provide wall
space for other equipment (e.g., protection blocks).
• Are designed to provide environmentally controlled housing (e.g., air conditioning/heating
and environmental alarms).
• Should be used in applications requiring additional security.
As is true for CEVs, and for the same reasons, CUEs include extensive alarm systems
(e.g., door intrusion, emergency lights, smoke detector, power).
Local building permit requirements should be checked before beginning installation.
Marinas
Service at Marinas
Designers need to give special consideration to telecommunications services at marinas due to
unique conditions such as:
• Changing water levels.
• High moisture/humidity.
• Severe weather (e.g., winds, waves, sun).
• Salt.
• Transience of boat owners.
• Potential for deterioration of the distribution cable.
• Difficulty in establishing a dependable and approved electrical grounding point.
Table 5.45
Precabling guidelines
If… Then…
It is known in advance Precable each boat slip during construction of the dock. For
that all or most of the security, each run should be terminated in the patch panel
boat slips require cross-connect at the dock master or marina office.
telecommunications
services
Fewer than 10 boat Run one- or two-pair cables from the boat slips to a distribution
slips are cabled terminal on the closest point of land.
If 10 or more boat Place distribution cable onto the dock and terminate in a
slips are cabled suitable cabinet or enclosure. Run service drop to each boat slip.
NOTE: This minimizes the need for terminals on the dock where damage can occur due to
the harsh environment or vandalism (except for utility pedestals at every slip).
System Separation
The transient nature of most marina users makes telecommunications served through a
premises private branch exchange (PBX) impractical in many cases. However, a common
telecommunications conduit within a prefabricated dock section (see Figure 5.105) might be
the only available cabling medium:
• In areas where direct local exchange service and public telephone service are provided by
different companies.
• Where CATV is requested.
With coordination, simultaneous placement of both facilities instead of individual pull cords in
one duct is beneficial to both the telephone and CATV companies.
Figure 5.105
Modular floating dock layout
Pedestal
Main
Dock (common element)
Slip C Slip B
Waterproof splice
terminal chamber
in = Inch
mm = Millimeter
PVC = Polyvinyl chloride
Condominium Slips
The marina (see Figure 5.106) usually owns the:
• Serving finger dock to which each finger slip is attached.
• Originating main dock (common elements).
When an individual boat slip is owned and subleased as a regular condominium, only the two
bordering boat slip owners can legally use a finger slip, a limited common element.
This arrangement raises questions about:
• R/W and easement factors.
• The possibility of seasonal subleasing of boat slips.
Prefabricated modular dock construction with built-in conduits and splice boxes neatly
structures full conductor and cable concealment while providing physical protection.
Figure 5.106
Sample marina layout
Pedestal B Terminal B
Parking
Easement C
(pedestrian
Easement B
and utilities)
(dock access
and utilities)
Distribution feed
Main Pedestal A
feed
Slips
Boat
launching
ramp
Floating
docks
Distribution
feed
Finger
Terminal A dock
Easement D (dock
access and utilities)
Finger
dock
Each finger dock is a limited common D
element (LCE), reserved for use by only D -3
-4
the units directly adjacent to it. For D
D -5
example, the shaded finger dock (see D -7
D -6
arrow) is reserved for use by slips D-4 -
D 8
E
References
Insulated Cable Engineers Association. ICEA S-83-596. Fiber Optic Premises Distribution
Cable. Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association, 2001.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-84-608. Telecommunications Cable, Filled Polyolefin Insulated
Copper Conductor. Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association, 2002.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-85-625. Aircore, Polyolefin Insulated,Copper Conductor
Telecommunications Cable. Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association, 2002.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-90-661. Category 3, 5, & 5e Individually Unshielded Twisted-Pair
Indoor Cable for Use In General Purpose and LAN Communication Wiring Systems.
Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association, 2000.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-98-688. Broadband Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cable,
Aircore, Polyolefin Insulated Copper Conductors. Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable
Engineers Association, 1997.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-99-689. Broadband Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cable Filled
Polyolefin Insulated Copper Conductors. Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable Engineers
Association, 1997.
———. ICEA S104-696. Standard for Indoor-Outdoor Optical Cable. Carrollton, GA:
Insulated Cable Engineers Association, 2003.
National Fire Protection Association, Inc. NFPA 70. National Electrical Code®, 2005 edition.
Quincy, MA: National Fire Protection Association, Inc., 2005.
———. NFPA 72®. National Fire Alarm Code®, 2007 edition. Quincy, MA: National Fire
Protection Association, Inc., 2007.
———. NFPA 75®. Standard for the Protection of Electronic Computer/Data Processing
Equipment. Quincy, MA: National Fire Protection Association, Inc., 2003.
———. NFPA 101®. Life Safety Code®. Quincy, MA: National Fire Protection Association,
Inc., 2006.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. ® UL 94. Test for Flammability of Plastic Materials for
Parts in Devices and Appliances. Northbrook, IL: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., 2000.
———. UL 497. Standard for Protectors for Paired-Conductor Communications
Circuits. Northbrook, IL: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., 2001.
———. UL 497A. Secondary Protectors for Communications Circuits. Northbrook, IL:
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., 2001.
U.S. Department of the Army. FM 11-486-5. Telecommunications Engineering Outside
Plant, Telephone. Washington, DC: U.S. Department of the Army, 1978.
U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration. Code of Federal
Regulations, Title 29, Part 1910: Occupational Safety and Health Standards. Washington,
DC: U.S. National Archives and Records Administration, Federal Register, 2001.
———. Code of Federal Regulations. Title 29, Part 1926: Safety and Health Regulations
for Construction. Washington, DC: U.S. National Archives and Records Administration,
Federal Register, 2003.
U.S. Government Printing Office. Bulletin 1751F-630. Design of Aerial Plant. Washington,
DC: Rural Utilities Service, 1996.
———. 1996. Bulletin 1751F-635. Aerial Plant Construction. Washington, DC: Rural
Utilities Service, 1996.
———. Bulletin 1751F-640. Design of Buried Plant-Physical Considerations. Washington,
DC: Rural Utilities Service, 1995.
———. Bulletin 1751F-641. Construction of Buried Plant. Washington, DC: Rural Utilities
Service, 1995.
———. Bulletin 1751F-642. Construction Route Planning of Buried Plant. Washington,
DC: Rural Utilities Service, 1995.
———. Bulletin 1751F-643. Underground Plant Design. Washington, DC: Rural Utilities
Service, 2002.
———. Bulletin 1751F-644. Underground Plant Construction. Washington, DC: Rural
Utilities Service, 2002.
———. Bulletin 1751F-650. Aerial Plant Guying and Anchoring. Washington, DC: Rural
Utilities Service, 1996.
———. Bulletin 1751F-815. Electrical Protection of Outside Plant. Washington, DC: Rural
Utilities Service, 1995.
———. Bulletin 1751F-642. Construction Route Planning of Buried Plant. Washington,
DC: Rural Utilities Service, 1995.
———. Bulletin 1751F-643. Underground Plant Design. Washington, DC: Rural Utilities
Service, 2002.
———. Bulletin 1751F-644. Underground Plant Construction. Washington, DC: Rural
Utilities Service, 2002.
———. Bulletin 1751F-650. Aerial Plant Guying and Anchoring. Washington, DC: Rural
Utilities Service, 1996.
———. Bulletin 1751F-815. Electrical Protection of Outside Plant. Washington, DC: Rural
Utilities Service, 1995.
Table of Contents
Figures
Tables
Splicing Enclosure
Introduction
Cabling hardware is used in outside plant (OSP) to enclose splices. They are more commonly
known as splice cases or closures. Cabling hardware is distinct from connecting hardware in
that it attaches to the sheath, whereas connecting hardware connects to the conductors or
optical fiber strands. The connecting hardware and the cabling hardware should complement
each other, but many combinations of either will establish the connectivity required to maintain
a high-quality transmission path.
Splicing Locations
Cabling hardware can be constructed of metallic or nonmetallic materials and can be found in
aerial, underground, and direct-buried construction, such as:
• Pedestals and cabinets.
• Handholes (HHs). New splices shall not be placed in HHs.
• Maintenance holes (MHs).
• Poles.
• Support strands.
• Walls.
• Vaults.
Splice closures are used in both copper and optical fiber applications and can be pressurized or
nonpressurized. They typically:
• Secure and protect cable and splices.
• Provide strain relief.
• Allow for reentry.
Figure 6.1
Splice closures and covers
Closure
cover
Closure
cover
Closure
cover
Splice closures are classified according to the configuration of cables that enter the closure,
such as:
• Straight—Provisions are made for only one cable to enter each end of the closure.
• Branch—Provisions are made for two or more cables to enter one end or both ends of the
closure.
• Butt—Provisions are made for two or more cables to enter one end of the closure and no
cables enter the other end.
• Universal—Provisions are made for adapters that allow multiple cables to enter one end
or both ends of the closure. This type of splice closure is typically referred to as a vault
closure.
Manufacturer specifications should be consulted for splice closure capacity.
Figure 6.2
Splice closures
Cable
Cable
Splice case
Cable
Cable
Splice case
Cable
Cable Cable
Splice case
Vault Closure
Entrance
cable Listed Tip cables
fire rated to entrance
splice case facility room
Aerial Closures
Aerial closures are housings used for splicing, grounding (earthing), and bonding aerial cables.
They may be equipped with terminal blocks and fusible-link stub cables that are housed in
separate chambers to allow for the termination of service wires.
Aerial closures typically support strand mounted and do not affect the integrity of the support
strand. They can be used to maintain the bond continuity of the splice point along the cable.
Additionally, they can be pole- or wall- mounted.
Aerial closures are available in many sizes, based on the size and number of cables entering
and exiting the closure. Table 6.1 is representative of the range of sizes available; however,
the OSP designer should consult manufacturers’ specifications for the exact capacities of their
closures.
Table 6.1
Aerial closure size
Cable Sheath Splice
Type Length Diameter Opening Diameter
Straight 660 mm 0.0–30.5 mm 483 mm 61 mm
(26 in) (0.0–1.2 in) (19 in) (2.4 in)
Straight 660 mm 25–46 mm 483 mm 114 mm
(26 in) (1–1.8 in) (19 in) (4.5 in)
Straight 660 mm 38–64 mm 483 mm 163 mm
(26 in) (1.5–2.5 in) (19 in) (6.4 in)
Branch 660 mm 0.0–30.5 mm 483 mm 114 mm
(26 in) (0.0–1.2 in) (19 in) (4.5 in)
Branch 660 mm 25–56 mm 483 mm 163 mm
(26 in) (1–2.2 in) (19 in) (6.4 in)
Branch 660 mm 51–76 mm 483 mm 203 mm
(26 in) (2–3 in) (19 in) (8 in)
in = Inch
mm = Millimeter
Figure 6.3
Filled/direct-buried splice closure systems
Table 6.2
Direct-buried/underground closure size
Cable Sheath Splice
Length Diameter Opening Diameter
533 mm (21 in) 13–41 mm (0.5–1.6 in) 305 mm (12 in) 58 mm (2.3 in)
737 mm (29 in) 20–66 mm (0.8–2.6 in) 508 mm (20 in) 84 mm (3.3 in)
1143 mm (45 in) 30.5–86 mm (1.2–3.4 in) 914 mm (36 in) 135 mm (5.3 in)
in = Inch
mm = Millimeter
Figure 6.4
Optical fiber closure
Service loop
Splice tray
Transition Structure
In some situations, construction may transition from one type to another. Examples of such
transitions appear in Figures 6.5 through 6.7.
Figure 6.5
Underground to building transition
Building
Backboard
Protector
Cable
Splice
case Subsidiary
conduit
Conduit Conduit
Underground
MH
cable
MH = Maintenance hole
Figure 6.6
Underground to direct-buried transition
Pedestal/splice closure
Buried cable
Underground cable
Splice case
MH
MH = Maintenance hole
Figure 6.7
Direct-buried to building transition
Terminal protector
Pedestal/splice closure
Grade
Sleeve
Direct-buried cable
Protector
Backboard
Sleeve through
building wall
Cable
Pedestal/splice closure
Grade
Direct-buried cable
Connecting Hardware
OSP splices generally occur in aerial, direct-buried, aboveground, or underground locations.
The termination or distribution center must provide mechanical and environmental protection.
Cable splice locations and other splicing details should be specified in work order prints.
Design Considerations
Whether the transmission medium is twisted-pair or optical fiber cable, the designer should
carefully consider the amount and location of the splices that result. The goal is to minimize
splices, since they may be a source of a disproportionate amount of subsequent troubles.
Additionally, labor is usually a more expensive factor than material in a design. At the cost of
additional material, avoiding splices may be the wiser economic choice. When a splice cannot
be reasonably avoided, the designer should avoid creating a future maintenance problem. This
can be achieved by careful splicing and choosing splicing tools and techniques that are reliable,
regardless of the transmission medium.
When constrained duct or conduit space prevents the use of multiple sheaths, a splice should
be used to consolidate the sheaths into one higher pair or optical fiber-count sheath. As many
cables as possible should be combined at a single splice point, since the incremental cost per
additional conductor or optical fiber spliced is lower than the cost for splicing at different
locations. It is important to analyze the entire system when planning splice points. For
example, if a planned cross-connect is near an MH that is being considered for a splice point,
cables may need to be routed to the cross-connect to combine the splice point with the
termination point. This can result in substantial labor cost savings.
Figure 6.8
Example of IDC connection
Direction of
insertion
Insulation Conductor
IDC
Most twisted-pair cable splicing is performed with modular and/or discrete connectors. There
are three general splicing methods: in-line, butt, and branch (see Figure 6.9).
These connectors are used for OSP or intrabuilding use and, depending on the manufacturer,
accommodate 19 American wire gauge (AWG [0.91 mm (0.036 in)]) to 28 AWG [0.32 mm
(0.013 in)] wire.
In addition, these connectors are available in several pair sizes (e.g., 1-, 5-, 10-, 25-pair), and
should be placed in 1-, 2-, 3-, or 4-bank configurations within the splice. Testing the cable and
the splice should be performed either during or after construction.
Figure 6.9
Types of splices
In-line
In
Out
Butt
In
Out
Branch Out
In
Out
Out
Figure 6.10
Example of single pair splice connectors and modules
Figure 6.11
Example of multipair splice connectors and modules
Write-on surface
Cover
Body
Base
For the splicing operation to be successful, the designer must consider some key factors—the
closure should be lightweight, compact, and watertight.
When the closure is installed, it must be properly supported, grounded, and tested for air leaks
according to manufacturer recommendations.
Labels must also be affixed to all cables entering the splice, indicating cable number and pair-
counts. Care must be taken to clearly designate the in and out for the spliced cables.
Twisted-Pair Cable
Modular Splicing
A major planning consideration for module type designs is the planning of reentry into these
splices. Most module types are available in:
• Dry versions for pressurized, vault, or inside splice applications.
• Encapsulated versions for moisture resistance in free-breathing aerial splice closures.
• Dry versions with a sealant box for maximum moisture protection in nonpressurized
plastic insulated conductor (PIC) splicing applications.
Dry module types are available in flame-retardant versions for vault and inside splice
applications. All fire-retardant modules must meet the Underwriters Laboratories Inc.®
(UL®) 94, Test for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and
Appliances, requirements and possess an oxygen index of 28 or greater per American
Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM®) D2863, Standard Test Method for Measuring
the Minimum Oxygen Concentration to Support Candle-Like Combustion of Plastics
(Oxygen Index).
Splicing reentries determine how many module banks will be required in a splice. Splice bank
configurations and splice types listed on the work print at each splice location using a coding
system helps convey required configurations needed.
NOTE: Code always starts with a number representing the number of banks in a splice.
One of three configurations will be used.
Splicing Methodology
The primary splicing methods within cases are:
• Inline splicing method—Wire is placed in a straight-line arrangement. This method is not
designed to be rearranged and should have minimum handling. See Figure 6.12.
Figure 6.12
Inline splice
Figure 6.13
Foldback splice
• Two-bank splicing method—Binder groups are arranged into groups or banks (see
Figure 6.14). This allows high pair-count copper splices to maintain a smaller diameter
relative to the spliced cable diameter. As racking space in MHs could be at a premium,
this also permits a splice closure of smaller diameter to be used.
Figure 6.14
Completed two-bank splice
Splice Data
Data in tables 6.3 through 6.7 was obtained from splices utilizing the MS2 modular splicing
method. When the bundle’s outside diameter (OD) is close to the splice case or sleeves inside
diameter (ID), the designer must use extra care not to exceed the maximum OD. If sealant
boxes are used, increase values by approximately 25 percent.
Table 6.3
Two-bank fold-back splice data
Recommended In-Line
Pair AWG Splice Opening Splice Diameter
Count mm (in ) mm (in) mm (in)
400 26 [0.41 (0.016)] 432 (17) 71 (2.8)
24 [0.51 (0.020)] 89 (3.5)
22 [0.64 (0.025)] 102 (4.0)
600 26 [0.41 (0.016)] 81 (3.2)
24 [0.51 (0.020)] 99 (3.9)
22 [0.64 (0.025)] 122 (4.8)
900 26 [0.41 (0.016)] 104 (4.1)
24 [0.51 (0.020)] 127 (5.0)
22 [0.64 (0.025)] 432 (17) 147 (5.8)
1200 26 [0.41 (0.016)] 432 (17) 119 (4.7)
24 [0.51 (0.020)] 432 (17) 127 (5.0)
1500 26 [0.41 (0.016)] 483 (19) 137 (5.4)
24 [0.51 (0.020)] 145 (5.7)
1800 26 [0.41 (0.016)] 152 (6.0)
24 [0.51 (0.020)] 160 (6.3)
2100 26 [0.41 (0.016)] 157 (6.2)
24 [0.51 (0.020)] 170 (6.7)
2400 26 [0.41 (0.016)] 165 (6.5)
2700 26 [0.41 (0.016)] 183 (7.2)
3000 26 [0.41 (0.016)] 483 (19) 193 (7.6)
3600 26 [0.41 (0.016)] 483 (19) 203 (8.0)
AWG = American wire gauge
in = Inch
m m = Millimeter
Table 6.4
26 AWG two-bank straight splice
Main
Cable Number of Pair Bridged
Pair Zero 100 200 300 400 600 900 1200
Count mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in)
100 33.0 (1.3) 43.2 (1.7)
200 48.0 (1.9) 53.0 (2.1) 61.0 (2.4)
300 56.0 (2.2) 66.0 (2.6) 69.0 (2.7) 76.0 (3.0)
400 66.0 (2.6) 73.7 (2.9) 76.0 (3.0) 81.0 (3.2) 94.0 (3.7)
600 79.0 (3.1) 86.0 (3.4) 89.0 (3.5) 96.5 (3.8) 104.0 (4.1) 111.8 (4.4)
900 96.5 (3.8) 101.0 (4.0) 106.7 (4.2) 111.8 (4.4) 119.0 (4.7) 124.5 (4.9) 135.0 (5.3)
1100 101.0 (4.0) 111.8 (4.4) 116.8 (4.6) 122.0 (4.8) 127.0 (5.0) 129.5 (5.1) 142.2 (5.6)
1200 106.7 (4.2) 114.0 (4.5) 122.0 (4.8) 127.0 (5.0) 132.1 (5.2) 135.0 (5.3) 147.0 (5.8) 160.0 (6.3)
1500 124.5 (4.9) 129.5 (5.1) 137.0 (5.4) 142.2 (5.6) 145.0 (5.7) 152.0 (6.0) 160.0 (6.3) 170.0 (6.7)
1800 137.0 (5.4) 142.2 (5.6) 150.0 (5.9) 152.0 (6.0) 155.0 (6.1) 163.0 (6.4) 168.0 (6.6) 180.3 (7.1)
2100 147.0 (5.8) 155.0 (6.1) 160.0 (6.3) 163.0 (6.4) 165.0 (6.5) 172.7 (6.8) 183.0 (7.2) 190.5 (7.5)
2400 157.0 (6.2) 165.0 (6.5) 170.0 (6.7) 172.7 (6.8) 175.3 (6.9) 183.0 (7.2) 193.0 (7.6) 200.7 (7.9)
2700 168.0 (6.6) 178.0 (7.0) 180.3 (7.1) 183.0 (7.2) 185.4 (7.3) 193.0 (7.6) 198.1 (7.8) 208.3 (8.2)
3000 178.0 (7.0) 188.0 (7.4) 190.5 (7.5) 193.0 (7.6) 195.6 (7.7) 203.0 (8.0) 210.8 (8.3) 218.4 (8.6)
3600 195.6 (7.7) 208.3 (8.2) 210.8 (8.3) 213.4 (8.4) 215.9 (8.5) 221.0 (8.7) 229.0 (9.0) 231.1 (9.1)
Main
Cable Number of Pair Bridged
Pair 1500 1800 2100 2400 2700 3000
Count mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in)
1500 178.0 (7.0)
1800 185.4 (7.3) 193.0 (7.6)
2100 193.0 (7.6) 200.7 (7.9) 210.8 (8.3)
2400 200.7 (7.9) 208.3 (8.2) 218.4 (8.6) 223.5 (8.8)
2700 210.8 (8.3) 218.4 (8.6) 226.1 (8.9) 238.8 (9.4) 243.8 (9.6)
3000 218.4 (8.6) 226.1 (8.9) 236.2 (9.3) 248.9 (9.8) 256.5 (10.1)
3600 233.7 (9.2) 243.8 (9.6) 251.5 (9.9) 261.6 (10.3) 269.2 (10.6) 276.9 (10.9)
in = Inch
mm = Millimeter
Table 6.5
26 AWG three-bank straight splice
Main
Cable Number of Pair Bridged
Pair Zero 100 200 300 400 600 900 1200
Count mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in)
300 46.0 (1.8) 53.0 (2.1) 61.0 (2.4) 69.0 (2.7)
600 66.0 (2.6) 71.0 (2.8) 79.0 (3.1) 84.0 (3.3) 86.0 (3.4) 94.0 (3.7)
900 84.0 (3.3) 86.0 (3.5) 96.5 (3.8) 101.0 (4.0) 104.0 (4.1) 109.2 (4.3) 122.0 (4.8)
1200 99.0 (3.9) 104.0 (4.1) 109.2 (4.3) 114.0 (4.5) 119.0 (4.7) 127.0 (5.0) 139.7 (5.5) 145.0 (5.7)
1500 114.0 (4.5) 116.8 (4.6) 119.0 (4.7) 124.5 (4.9) 129.5 (5.1) 139.7 (5.5) 150.0 (5.9) 160.0 (6.3)
1800 129.5 (5.1) 132.1 (5.2) 135.0 (5.3) 137.0 (5.4) 139.7 (5.5) 150.0 (5.9) 160.0 (6.3) 170.0 (6.7)
2100 139.7 (5.5) 142.2 (5.6) 145.0 (5.7) 147.0 (5.8) 150.0 (5.9) 160.0 (6.3) 170.0 (6.7) 178.0 (7.0)
2400 150.0 (5.9) 152.0 (6.0) 155.0 (6.1) 157.0 (6.2) 160.0 (6.3) 168.0 (6.6) 178.0 (7.0) 185.4 (7.3)
2700 157.0 (6.2) 160.0 (6.3) 163.0 (6.4) 165.0 (6.5) 168.0 (6.6) 175.3 (6.9) 183.0 (7.2) 193.0 (7.6)
3000 165.0 (6.5) 168.0 (6.6) 170.0 (6.7) 172.7 (6.8) 175.3 (6.9) 183.0 (7.2) 190.5 (7.5) 200.7 (7.9)
3600 175.3 (6.9) 178.0 (7.0) 180.3 (7.1) 183.0 (7.2) 185.4 (7.3) 193.0 (7.6) 200.7 (7.9) 210.8 (8.3)
Main
Cable Number of Pair Bridged
Pair 1500 1800 2100 2400 2700 3000
Count mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in)
1500 168.0 (6.6)
1800 178.0 (7.0) 185.4 (7.3)
2100 188.0 (7.4) 195.6 (7.7) 198.1 (7.8)
2400 195.6 (7.7) 203.0 (8.0) 205.7 (8.1) 213.4 (8.4)
2700 203.0 (8.0) 210.8 (8.3) 215.9 (8.5) 221.0 (8.7) 223.5 (8.8)
3000 208.3 (8.2) 218.4 (8.6) 221.0 (8.7) 229.0 (9.0) 231.1 (9.1) 236.2 (9.3)
3600 218.4 (8.6) 226.1 (8.9) 233.7 (9.2) 238.8 (9.4) 241.3 (9.5) 246.4 (9.7)
in = Inch
m m = Millimeter
Table 6.6
26 AWG four-bank straight splice
Main
Cable Number of Pair Bridged
Pair Zero 100 200 300 400 600 900 1200
Count mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in)
400 51.0 (2.0) 53.0 (2.1) 56.0 (2.2) 58.4 (2.3) 64.0 (2.5)
600 58.0 (2.3) 64.0 (2.5) 66.0 (2.6) 69.0 (2.7) 73.7 (2.9) 79.0 (3.1)
900 71.0 (2.8) 76.0 (3.0) 79.0 (3.1) 81.0 (3.2) 86.0 (3.4) 91.4 (3.6) 99.1 (3.9)
1200 81.0 (3.2) 86.0 (3.4) 89.0 (3.5) 91.4 (3.6) 96.5 (3.8) 101.0 (4.0) 109.2 (4.3) 119.0 (4.7)
1500 94.0 (3.7) 96.5 (3.8) 99.0 (3.9) 101.0 (4.0) 106.7 (4.2) 109.2 (4.3) 119.0 (4.7) 129.5 (5.1)
1800 106.7 (4.2) 106.7 (4.2) 109.2 (4.3) 111.8 (4.4) 116.8 (4.6) 122.0 (4.8) 129.5 (5.1) 137.0 (5.4)
2100 116.8 (4.6) 116.8 (4.6) 119.0 (4.7) 122.0 (4.8) 127.0 (5.0) 132.1 (5.2) 142.2 (5.6) 147.0 (5.8)
2400 124.5 (4.9) 124.5 (4.9) 129.5 (5.1) 132.1 (5.2) 137.0 (5.4) 142.2 (5.6) 150.0 (5.9) 155.0 (6.1)
2700 137.2 (5.4) 137.0 (5.4) 139.7 (5.5) 142.2 (5.6) 145.08 (5.7) 150.0 (5.9) 157.0 (6.2) 163.0 (6.4)
3000 145.0 (5.7) 145.0 (5.7) 147.0 (5.8) 150.0 (5.9) 152.0 (6.0) 157.0 (6.2) 165.0 (6.5) 170.0 (6.7)
3600 157.0 (6.2) 160.0 (6.3) 163.0 (6.4) 165.0 (6.5) 168.0 (6.6) 172.7 (6.8) 178.0 (7.0) 185.4 (7.3)
Main
Cable Number of Pair Bridged
Pair 1500 1800 2100 2400 2700 3000
Count mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in)
1500 135.0 (5.3)
1800 145.0 (5.7) 155.0 (6.1)
2100 155.0 (6.1) 163.0 (6.4) 168.0 (6.6)
2400 163.0 (6.4) 170.0 (6.7) 175.3 (6.9) 178.0 (7.0)
2700 170.0 (6.7) 178.0 (7.0) 183.0 (7.2) 188.0 (7.4) 190.5 (7.5)
3000 178.0 (7.0) 185.4 (7.3) 190.5 (7.5) 198.1 (7.8) 200.7 (7.9) 208.3 (8.2)
3600 193.0 (7.6) 200.7 (7.9) 208.3 (8.2) 218.4 (8.6) 226.1 (8.9) 238.8 (9.4)
in = Inch
mm = Millimeter
Table 6.7
26 AWG two-bank apparatus splice
Main
Cable Number of Pair Bridged
Pair 1500 1800 2100 2400 2700 3000
Count mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in)
50 33.0 (1.3) 41.0 (1.6)
100 41.0 (1.6) 48.0 (1.9) 58.4 (2.3)
200 58.0 (2.3) 66.0 (2.6) 69.0 (2.7) 84.0 (3.3)
300 69.0 (2.7) 79.0 (3.1) 84.0 (3.3) 96.5 (3.8) 106.7 (4.2)
400 79.0 (3.1) 86.0 (3.4) 96.5 (3.8) 106.7 (4.2) 116.8 (4.6) 132.1 (5.2)
600 94.0 (3.7) 104.0 (4.1) 111.8 (4.4) 122.0 (4.8) 132.1 (5.2) 147.0 (5.8)
900 122.0 (4.8) 127.0 (5.0) 132.1 (5.2) 142.2 (5.6) 150.0 (5.9) 160.0 (6.3)
1200 137.0 (5.4) 145.0 (5.7) 150.0 (5.9) 157.0 (6.2) 165.0 (6.5) 172.7 (6.8)
1500 155.0 (6.1) 163.0 (6.4) 168.0 (6.6) 175.3 (6.9) 180.3 (7.1) 185.4 (7.3)
1800 170.0 (6.7) 178.0 (7.0) 183.0 (7.2) 188.0 (7.4) 193.0 (7.6) 198.1 (7.8)
2100 185.4 (7.3) 190.5 (7.5) 195.6 (7.7) 200.7 (7.9) 205.7 (8.1) 213.4 (8.4)
2400 198.1 (7.8) 200.7 (7.9) 208.3 (8.2) 210.8 (8.3) 218.4 (8.6) 226.1 (8.9)
2700 210.8 (8.3) 210.8 (8.3) 218.4 (8.6) 221.0 (8.7) 231.1 (9.1) 241.3 (9.9)
3000 218.4 (8.6) 218.4 (8.6) 231.1 (9.1) 231.1 (9.1) 251.5 (9.9) 251.5 (9.9)
3600 241.3 (9.5) 241.3 (9.5) 246.4 (9.7) 251.5 (9.9) 259.1 (10.2) 274.3 (10.8)
in = Inch
m m = Millimeter
Testing
Manufacturers offer a variety of plugs and cords to mate with the modules being utilized. With
the use of these modules, testing may be completed during the splicing operation.
Waterproof Splicing
A series of waterproof sealing boxes that encapsulate the splicing module are available.
Splice Design
In OSP applications, a designer normally avoids the requirement of optical fiber-to-fiber field
splicing by installing a continuous length of cable. This is normally the most economical and
convenient solution. Splices (see Figure 6.15) cannot always be avoided due to cable plant
layout, length, raceway congestion, requirements for a transition splice between nonlisted OSP
cables and listed cable at the building entrance point, and unplanned requirements (e.g., cable
damaged during the installation or during a cable unearthing).
Figure 6.15
Examples of splices required due to cable routing
Field splice
point
Congested duct
allowing only one
Consolidation cable
field splice point
km = Kilometer
mi = Mile
Fusion Splicing
Fusion splicing consists of aligning two clean (stripped of coating), cleaved optical fibers, then
joining and fusing the ends together with an electric arc. Typical splice loss under field
conditions is less than 0.05 decibels (dB) for singlemode optical fiber (maximum allowed is
0.3 dB).
Mechanical Splicing
By comparison, a mechanical splice is an optical junction where two or more optical fiber
strands are aligned and held in place by a self-contained assembly approximately 51 millimeter
(mm [2 inches (in)]) in length. Single-fiber mechanical splices rely upon alignment of the outer
diameter of the optical fibers, making the accuracy of core/cladding concentricity critical to
achieving low splice losses. Mechanical splices can consistently achieve losses on singlemode
optical fibers in the 0.10 to 0.15 dB range (maximum allowed is 0.3 dB).
Mass Splicing
For high optical fiber-count applications, an increasingly popular method is mass splicing. Mass
splicing can be fusion or mechanical. The term mass indicates that multiple optical fibers are
being spliced at once, typically in a ribbon configuration. Most common today are 12-strand
optical fiber ribbons. The chief advantage of mass splicing is speed. Mass splicing is typically
four to five times faster than single-fiber splicing.
Typical loss for this splice is less than 0.10 dB for singlemode optical fiber with a maximum
allowed of 0.3 dB. The system designer needs to understand the loss requirements of the
optical fiber system and the capabilities of the various types of splice equipment (under field
conditions) to manage splicing trade-offs of productivity and splice loss when deciding to use
single-fiber or mass splicing.
Ribbon optical fiber is not necessarily needed to take advantage of mass splicing. Occasionally
there is a requirement to splice loose-tube to ribbon cable. One method of accomplishing this
is to break out the individual optical fibers in the ribbon cable for single-fiber splicing, or
ribbonize the optical fibers from the loose-tube cable.
Splice Protection
Fusion and mechanical splicing are reliable and suitable for both indoor and outdoor use when
the splices are completed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
When splicing outdoors, typically the splices and stripped cable should be protected by a splice
closure. When the cable is installed in a splice closure, various methods provide strain relief
and protection of the stripped optical fiber splice. All optical fiber splices are housed in splice
trays or organizers inside a closure. The proper splice tray should be selected based on the
type of protection required by the splice. For example, mechanical splices have a form of
built-in strain relief and optical fiber protection, which are then secured in a splice tray or
organizer. Fusion splices, however, require additional protection and strain relief that can be
provided by heat-shrink sleeves, crimp protectors, or silicone sealant. Heat-shrink and
mechanical crimp connectors are the most common methods.
When splicing inside a building, a splice center can be used when rack or wall space is
available. Additionally, most termination patch panels have built-in or accompanying splice
centers that allow optical fiber termination and through splicing when required.
Figure 6.16
Splice tray examples
Hardware Labeling
Proper labeling of hardware is important for system administration. One recommendation is to:
• Label each panel from left to right, starting at the top and labeling to the bottom.
• Be consistent with the labeling code.
• Use the customer’s labeling procedure (campus environment).
• Identify all splice points on the as-built drawings.
• Provide written documentation as to:
– Location.
– Manufacturer.
– Type of splice.
– Pair count or optical fiber strand count.
– Date of splice.
– Splice technician’s name.
References
American National Standards Institute/Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic
Industries Alliance. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A. Administration Standard for Commercial
Telecommunications Infrastructure. Arlington, VA: Telecommunications Industry
Association, 2002.
———. ANSI/TIA/EIA-758. Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications
Cabling Standard. Arlington, VA: Telecommunications Industry Association, 2004.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.® National Electrical Safety Code.®
Piscataway, NJ: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc., 2006.
National Fire Protection Association, Inc. NFPA 70. National Electrical Code®, 2005 edition.
Quincy, MA: National Fire Protection Association, Inc., 2005.
Table of Contents
Introduction........................................................................................ 7-1
Exposed Outside Plant (OSP) ......................................................................... 7-1
Exposure to Lightning .............................................................................. 7-2
Power Contact ....................................................................................... 7-3
Power Induction ..................................................................................... 7-3
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) ...................................................................... 7-3
Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding ................................................................... 7-5
Multiground Neutral (MGN) and Non-MGN Power Systems ................................... 7-5
Bonding Telecommunications and Power Grounds .......................................... 7-9
Figures
Introduction
Properly designed and installed electrical grounding (earthing), bonding, and protection can
minimize voltage and currents that may be hazardous to people, property, and
telecommunications equipment. Proper grounding (earthing) and bonding techniques also can
improve the signal integrity of a transmission path or promote the reliable operation of
electronic equipment. The sources of these abnormal voltages and currents are usually
external to the telecommunications cabling. The purpose of electrical protection is to:
• Minimize electrical hazards to system users and protect those engaged in construction,
operation, and maintenance of the system.
• Reduce the risk of electrical damage to aerial, direct-buried, or underground plant,
telecommunications equipment, and associated buildings or structures.
• Mitigate transient voltages that can induce unwanted signals on cables.
Where users and plant personnel are concerned, safety from shock hazard is a prime design
consideration.
The National Electrical Safety Code®(NESC®) requires cable shields, support strands, and
other noncurrent-carrying metallic hardware to be effectively grounded. It is especially
important to effectively ground cable shields, support strands, and noncurrent-carrying metallic
hardware at deadends and junction points for noise mitigation, personnel protection, and power
contact protection.
In the United States, the common electrical supply is 120 volt (V) 60 hertz (Hz) nominally. In
many other countries, the common electrical supply is 240 V 50 Hz nominally. In all cases,
refer to local electrical codes and regulations.
Exposure to Lightning
IMPORTANT: Lightning strikes are a common source of hazardous foreign potentials.
OSP cabling is classified as exposed to lightning except when located in:
• Areas having five or less thunderstorm days per year and where the
ground resistivity is less than 100 ohm-meters ( Ωm ). Such areas are
rare. For example, in the continental United States, they are found
along the Pacific coast.
• Areas where buildings are close and sufficiently high to intercept
lightning.
• Campus cabling runs that are 42.7 meters (m [140 feet (ft)]) or less
with the cable bonded to each building ground electrode system.
BICSI recommends that all exterior cable be treated as exposed and
properly protected.
Power Contact
Since power and telecommunications cabling serve the same customers, OSP facilities for
these services are sometimes located close to one another and may even share the same pole
or trench (i.e., joint-use). Aerial or direct-buried plant that is subject to possible contact by
power conductors operating at more than 300 V to ground is considered to be exposed to
power contacts. All primary power systems operate at a higher voltage than this, while most
secondary systems operate at lower voltages. Such systems must also be considered
hazardous since the currents imposed as a result of accidental contact can severely damage
physical plant or be fatal to personnel.
Power Induction
Disturbances from electromagnetic induction (i.e., power induction) can occur wherever
telecommunications and power lines run parallel for long distances. OSP subject to power
induction of more than 300 V to ground is considered to be exposed. Although lower voltages
may exist as a result of unbalanced power line operation, induced voltages exceeding 300 V to
grounding (earthing) are most likely caused by power line faults.
A properly constructed grounding (earthing) and bonding system will mitigate noise from
power induction sources such as:
• Electrified railroads.
• Trolley systems.
• Subways.
• Electrified buses.
• Electrified cranes.
• Electric substations.
Figure 7.1
Ground potential rise
Power
120 V conductor
power
Telephone fault
cable shield
ground
Power system
(MGN) ground
1.2 m (4 ft)
*55 V
0.91 m (3 ft) *44 V
ft = Foot
m = Meter
MGN = Multiground neutral
V = Volt
Accidental power contacts, power induction, and GPR are individual threats to OSP cabling,
but the protection measures used to prevent one source of power disturbance are generally
effective against all three.
Figure 7.2
Multiground neutral power system
Primary Primary
Primary Primary
Approximately 0.40 km
(0.25 mi) separation
between vertical
down leads
km = Kilometer
mi = Mile
In cases where aerial runs are installed on a joint-use pole with a non-MGN system, a
dedicated telecommunications VDL shall be provided at least every 0.40 km (0.25 mi).
The ITS designer should coordinate the use of an MGN as the grounding (earthing) source
with the power company when placing cables on a joint-use pole line. In these instances,
bonding the cable support strand to the MGN should ground both the cable shield and the
cable support strand. This assumes that the cable shield has already been bonded to the cable
support strand. Grounding (earthing) is accomplished by connecting a bonding conductor from
the support strand to the VDL.
Coordinate grounding (earthing) and bonding connections to the VDL or MGN with the power
company. Many power companies require that only their qualified employees make these
connections.
In cases where the telecommunications pole line intersects at a joint-use pole supporting
power lines, ground the cable support strand by bonding it to the MGN. Midspan crossings of
telecommunications cables and power lines should be avoided if possible. If unavoidable,
buried crossings should be considered. Most power companies will not allow midspan
crossings without an attachment.
Figure 7.3
Non-multiground neutral power system
Three primaries
Primary
bushings
Lightning
arrester
Three secondaries
Figure 7.4
Wye power system
208 V
A B 120 V
120 V
Neutral 208 V
208 V
C Ground 120 V
V = Volt
Figure 7.5
Delta power system
A B 240 V 240 V
240 V
V = Volt
Non-MGN power systems also vary in structure and appearance. A non-MGN power system
may not have a continuous neutral conductor or pole grounding (earthing) system.
In a typical non-MGN system, there are two primary feeds; each one is attached to a primary
bushing on the transformer. The transformer’s secondary tap is grounded to the VDL. There
is no ground connection from the primary of the transformer to the secondary.
NOTE: The power company can provide information on the type(s) of power system(s)
used in their area.
Bonding Requirements
Metallic Conductors
The required intervals for bonding the telecommunications support strand to the power system
MGN depend on the power voltages involved.
NOTE: The grounding (earthing) and bonding requirements should be reviewed with the
power and access provider (AP) if it is a jointly used pole line.
All connectors and clamps must be listed, rated for outside use, and properly sized to accept
the wire and strand size.
The bonding of telecommunications hardware to power company facilities on aerial plant shall
be performed:
• Only by ITS personnel on telecommunications cable plant.
• In or below the telecommunications pole space.
• Only when authorized by the power company.
ITS personnel shall not perform any work within nor climb into the power space on a pole.
Where the connection to the MGN must be made above the telecommunications space,
sufficient wire should be coiled and temporarily attached to the pole for later connection by
power company personnel.
NOTE: The telecommunications bonding conductor should only be connected to the power
utility MGN by the power utility. This requires the submittal of the information to the
power utility on a preapproved or other negotiated form or document.
Figure 7.6
Ground connection on a pole (multiground neutral system)
Aerial—Underground Transitions
If an aerial cable exposed to lightning is connected to a single underground cable that extends
for 305 m (1000 ft) or more before paralleling other cables, ground the aerial cable shield at
the last pole. The shield and supporting strand should be bonded to an MGN vertical down
lead (VDL) if one exists. Otherwise, use a telecommunications ground rod.
Figure 7.7
Grounding (earthing) without access to transformers
Pedestals
Bond cable
Bond cable to ground rod
to ground rod
Earth
B B B B B
Direct-buried
cable
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Metallic Conductors
Telecommunications and power facilities occupy separate structures in an underground plant;
therefore, underground metallic conductor cables are not exposed to power contact.
Bonding cables in telecommunications maintenance holes (MHs) reduces the overall
resistance to ground and equalizes the potentials between the cables. Equalizing the potentials
between cables protects personnel by reducing the possibility of shock hazards and minimizes
plant damage.
Cables used in the underground conduit system have either an outer metallic sheath or a
plastic sheath. Generally, cables with an outer metallic sheath are bonded at each MH, while
cables with an outer plastic sheath are bonded at MHs where a splice is made.
In some instances, when cables are exposed because of aerial to underground OSP
(e.g., cable dip) extensions, the following guidelines should be applied:
• Establish and maintain continuity of all metallic cable elements.
• Nonmetallic splice case bonding connections, as well as lead sleeves and metallic splice
cases, should be connected to the MH grounding (earthing) system at every MH.
• Plastic sheath cables do not need to be bonded at pull-through MHs.
Figure 7.8
Welded bonding attachment to rebar for site-poured maintenance hole
Welded Grade 60
new billet
steel rebar
Bonding
ribbon Concrete
Bonding
ribbon
connector
Figure 7.9
Clamped bonding attachment to rebar for precast or site-poured maintenance hole
(In concrete)
Bonding ribbon
Rebar
To wall inserts
Figure 7.10
Interior grounding (earthing) and bonding for racking
Copper
ground wire
1.8 m (6 ft)
Concrete
inserts
Sump
Ground rod
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Figure 7.11
Underground cable bonding
Splice closures
Maintenance hole
ground system
Cable
racks
When a splice occurs in an MH, the metallic strength member and other metallic sheath
components of the cables must be bonded to the MH grounding (earthing) system. All
closures should also be bonded to the MH ground. No bonding is required in handholes (HHs)
and MHs when the cable is pulled through without a splice.
Figure 7.12
Maintenance hole bonding
Cable Bonding
rack ribbon
Seam between
top and bottom
section of
maintenance hole
Sump
Ground rod
NOTE: Bonding ribbon is clamped or welded to embedded steel at the time of casting. Bond
connection for splice cases, cables, etc., is established with use of vertical bonding
ribbon. At time of cable rack installation, attach bonding ribbon.
Figure 7.13
Isolation gap
Isolation gap
Isolation joint
Protectors
There are two general types of protector housings—fused and fuseless. All fuseless protector
housings are equipped with voltage-limiting devices (e.g., carbon blocks, gas tubes, or solid-
state components).
Fuse Links
Fuse links are shorter sections of finer (larger AWG number) gauge cable than normally
required for transmission purposes. In the event of prolonged current flows caused by foreign
potentials (e.g., power contacts), fuse links burn open, protecting terminating equipment or
cabling.
The protector stubs, or internal protector wiring, should be at least two gauges finer than the
entrance cable. For transmission reasons, fuse links should be as short as possible. However,
a minimum of 0.6 m (2 ft) of fuse link is required.
Protector Units
Protector units limit the voltage difference between conductors and ground by providing a low
impedance path to ground when the operating voltage of the protector unit is reached.
Protector units are required on all exposed circuits entering the building; this includes tip and
ring conductors contained in conventional paired conductor cables and those in hybrid cables.
The following list outlines some of the more common devices used to prevent damage to
equipment and personnel for exposed OSP facilities:
• Air gap discharge protectors—Features a carbon air gap and fail-safe mechanism that
shorts to ground when a voltage exceeds its rating.
• Gas tube protectors—Generally contains a two or three electrode high amperage ceramic
nonradioactive gas-tube arrestor and a fail-safe mechanism. These are used in areas
where frequent transient overvoltages are a problem or where operating values must be
tightly controlled. This type of protector will recover repeatedly from the overvoltage and
provide 30 to 40 times longer life than carbon air-gap protectors.
• Solid state protectors—Contains diodes intended for use with sensitive equipment. They
can be equipped with heat coils of varying values. The diode is a fast semiconductor
switch with operating voltages nearly independent of transient rise time. It can operate
repeatedly and provides longer protection life than either carbon air gap or gas-tube
protectors.
• Current-interrupting devices (fusing)—Overcurrent protective units with a circuit-opening
fusible element that is severed when heated by the passage of an overcurrent. They are
normally one-time devices.
• Isolating transformers—These units have no direct electrical connection between the
primary and secondary sides.
It is permissible (and preferred) to utilize an assembly that integrates both primary and
secondary overvoltage and overcurrent protection rather than create two protector fields. For
example, a single protection assembly that uses modules having both current and fast response
voltage suppression capability, and that meet safety requirements for primary and secondary
protection, would protect both personnel and equipment.
It is recommended that protector modules be equipped with in-service test points so that faulty
or blown modules can be determined without accidentally disengaging a working circuit when
determining whether the fuse module has operated or not.
Soil Resistance
The goal of any grounding (earthing) system is to provide a low-impedance path for fault
currents until they reach the earth. When considering the grounding (earthing) conditions at
any site, it is essential to test soil resistivity. In general, black dirt, or soils with high organic
content, is usually a very good conductor because they tend to retain more moisture, leading to
low resistivity. Sandy soils, which drain faster, tend to be less moist and are higher in
resistivity. Solid rock and volcanic ash have virtually no moisture and have such high resistivity
as to be practically useless as a grounding (earthing) material.
Ground Resistance
Ground resistance is usually measured with an instrument called an earth ground resistance
tester. This meter consists of:
• A voltage source.
• Switches that change the instrument’s measurement range.
Grounding (earthing) system installers may be required to measure or otherwise determine the
ground resistance of the system they have installed. The NEC, section 250.56, requires a
single electrode consisting of a rod, pipe, or plate that does not have a resistance to ground of
25 ohm ( Ω )or less to be augmented by one additional electrode of the types listed in section
250.52(A) 2 through 7. Multiple electrodes should always be installed so that they are at least
1.8 m (6 ft) apart. Spacing electrodes at distances greater than 1.8 m (6 ft) increases rod
efficiency, meaning that the earth ground resistance for ground rod configuration may be
lowered in value. Therefore, proper spacing and quantity of the electrodes ensures the
maximum amount of fault current that can be safely discharged into the earth.
To properly design a grounding (earthing) system, the earth resistivity should be measured.
Several measurement methods can be used however the most effective of these is a four-
point test method, known as the Wenner Method. This method is to specifically determine the
soil resistivity of a given location and depth. Once soil resistivity (which is measured in either
ohms-per-meter [ Ω /m] or ohms-per-centimeter [ Ω /cm]) is determined, it is cross-reference
with a graph that will help the designer gauge the resistance of a ground rod configuration
before it is even installed.
When the ground rods are installed, they should be measured for their effectiveness. This
measurement is known as a three-point, fall-of-potential method and is performed so that the
installer can accurately measure the resistance of any ground rod configuration with respect
to the surrounding soil. This measurement is often made before any grounding (earthing) or
bonding conductor terminations are made to the ground rods.
NOTE: Instructions for setting up and making these measurements are included with the
testing equipment.
Bonding Electrodes
Types of electrodes include:
• Solid copper.
• Copper-clad steel.
• Plain steel.
• Galvanized steel.
• Stainless-clad steel.
• Solid stainless steel.
When selecting the type of electrode to use, the designer should consider:
• The soil chemistry.
• Any nearby electrically bonded structures.
• Whether the electrode is installed in a corrosive area.
Soil with a high sulfur content may cause copper to corrode.
Any direct-buried steel items connected to a copper grounding (earthing) system will corrode
due to the galvanic action between the copper and the steel. The rate of galvanic corrosion
depends on the ratio of exposed copper and steel areas. The higher the ratio of copper
exposed to steel, the greater the rate of corrosion. Coating steel to protect it can make
corrosion worse since there will probably be at least one unprotected area. With only a small
steel area exposed, the copper to steel ratio is high and all the corrosion takes place at the
small area of unprotected steel and at a much higher rate than if the steel were uncoated.
Steel ground rods are often used to prevent the galvanic corrosion possible with copper rods.
To protect the steel, the rods are usually galvanized (zinc coated). The zinc creates a galvanic
cell with any nearby, bonded steel, with the zinc being the anode and thus sacrificing itself to
protect the steel.
Any dc equipment operating in the area can cause severe corrosion on the grounding
(earthing) system. An example of this may be a dc transit system substation. The large
amounts of stray dc currents possible can cause severe corrosion of any nearby steel that
may be part of the return circuit and grounding (earthing) system. Some transit systems use a
stainless steel grounding (earthing) system in their substations.
Reducing Resistivity
In the absence of low-resistance soil conditions, there are other options for improving
conductivity. These include filling the ground rod hole with bentonite, treating the soil with a
salt (copper magnesium sulfate or rock salt), or using ground enhancement material.
Chemical Electrodes
Some installations specify a very low resistance, often lower than what is easily obtainable
using multiple rods, deep driven rods, or long direct-buried grounding (earthing) conductors. In
these instances, it may be necessary to select a “chemical-type electrode.”
Chemical-type electrodes are copper tubes containing a salt that slowly leaches into the soil,
lowering the soil’s resistance and possibly contaminating the soil; however, non-contaminating
materials, generally referred to as ground enhancement materials, are available. Bentonite, a
form of clay, is a common ground enhancement material. To use bentonite, a hole is drilled into
the earth. The ground rod or conductor is then placed into the hole and the bentonite added,
usually in dry form.
Bentonite will absorb up to five times its weight in water and increase up to 13 times its dry
volume, obtaining moisture from the surrounding soil. This creates exceptional contact
between the rod or conductor and the soil. Bentonite’s ideal moisture content is three times its
weight in water, at which time its resistivity will be approximately 2540 ohm-mm (100 ohm-in).
Although bentonites’s resistivity is much higher than that of the grounding (earthing) rod, it is
much lower than that of the surrounding soil. Therefore, in effect, bentonite increases the
effective diameter of the rod.
Ideal Conditions
Even under ideal circumstances, soil structure can vary and make it difficult to achieve
uniform, low levels of resistivity across a wide area. However, with ground enhancement
material, the results can be a lot more predictable because it offers:
• Reduction in earth resistance that remains for the life of the system even during dry
seasons.
• Wet or dry installation.
• Test-proven resistivity of 119 ohm-mm (4.7 ohm-in) or less.
• Maintenance-free grounding (earthing).
In summary, ground enhancement materials improve grounding (earthing) system perfor-
mance.
Concrete-Encased Electrode
This type of ground uses a non-insulated conductor (no smaller in diameter than 4 AWG
[5.2 mm (0.20 in)] encased along the bottom of a concrete building foundation footing in direct
contact with the earth. The length of the conductor’s run inside the concrete is important, as
the effective resistance is inversely proportional to the length of conductor within the
concrete.
Typically, a 6 m (20 ft) run—3 m (10 ft) in each direction—gives a five ground in 1000 ohm-m
(3280 ohm-ft) soil conditions.
Protecting metallic telecommunications cabling plant and personnel from hazardous electrical
effects is particularly important in joint-use utility tunnels. Electrical protection requirements of
other utilities may be similar in many ways, but the overall susceptibility of telecommunications
facilities to induced voltages and EMI influence the requirements. Acceptable electrical
protection for telecommunications installments should:
• Maintain adequate separation between metallic telecommunications cable and electrical
power facilities to prevent accidental contact between the telecommunications and
electrical plant.
• Yield a facility where there is no possibility of accidental contact with energized electrical
power facilities.
• Maintain separation and/or shielding between metallic telecommunications and electrical
plant to ensure that voltages hazardous to either workers or plant are not induced into the
telecommunications facilities.
• Ground and bond the telecommunications facilities to the electrical facilities to prevent a
hazardous potential difference from developing between various surfaces that workers
may contact during normal work operations.
Protective conduit is generally not used for telecommunications cabling. Using conduit reduces
access required for inspection, maintenance, and random location of splices. Because flame
spreads easily in a tunnel, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit should never be used. Power
cables can dissipate heat more effectively when exposed to air than when enclosed in conduit.
Evaluate each situation based on its particular characteristics. Where possible, telecommuni-
cations and electrical facilities should be placed on opposite sides of the tunnel. In some cases,
this placement eliminates the need for additional shielding of the power or telecommunications
cables and reduces the effects of EMI.
Mutual Impedance
The coupling or mutual impedance between power and metallic telecommunications facilities
is a function of the:
• Physical separation between them.
• Length (in meters/feet) of exposure.
• Resistance of the return path for the unbalanced current.
• Power and telecommunications line shielding effectiveness.
In a tunnel, using shielding on either facility (where appropriate) can reduce coupling.
The separation requirement overshadows other utilities’ requirements; therefore, metallic
telecommunications cables should be placed at maximum separation from power cables.
Two characteristics of the telecommunications circuit that determine susceptibility or extent to
which the circuit is adversely affected by inductive fields are the:
• Amount of shielding provided by the telecommunications cable sheath or by other
grounded conductors.
• Balance of the telecommunications circuit.
References
American National Standards Institute. ANSI J-STD-607-A. Commercial Building
Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications. Arlington, VA:
Telecommunications Industry Association, 2002.
National Fire Protection Association, Inc. NFPA 70. National Electrical Code®, 2005 edition.
Quincy, MA: National Fire Protection Association, Inc., 2005.
National Security Agency. www.nsa.gov.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.® National Electrical Safety Code®.
Piscataway, NJ: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc., 2006.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.® UL 497A. Secondary Protectors for Communications
Circuits. Northbrook, IL: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., 2001.
Table of Contents
Figures
Tables
Example
Right-of-Way (R/W)
Introduction
The concept of right-of-way (R/W) or the use of land for the public good is rooted in antiquity.
The royal road built in 4500 B.C. by the king of Assyria, consisted of a 23.8 meter (m [78 foot
(ft)]) R/W stretching from the Persian Gulf to the Mediterranean Sea (2,857 kilometers [km
(1775 miles [mi])]). This R/W was considered so important that the king declared that any
person found to have encroached on the R/W would be impaled in front of the palace. Today,
encroachment would more appropriately be handled in a civil court.
Although the contents of this section are written as BICSI best practices, the outside plant
(OSP) designer must understand R/W laws of the countries that practice OSP design and
installation. The OSP designer is advised to seek out R/W professionals to ensure compliance
in the geographic area of the OSP design work.
Designers who deal with OSP construction will be involved in acquisition of R/W. Even if not
directly involved in the actual R/W acquisition, designers need to be aware of the responsibili-
ties that other parties have in obtaining R/W, including:
• Acquisition processes.
• Types of R/W required.
• Legal ramifications involving clients.
Although clients can require that the contractor be responsible for obtaining the R/W
documents, the clients must execute the documents because they own the physical plant to be
installed.
The R/W acquisition process can be one of the greatest factors that affects a project’s
schedule. When choosing various construction alternatives, the designer should consider the
potential difficulty in R/W acquisition. As an OSP project becomes more invasive, the R/W
acquisition process becomes more difficult and time consuming. For example, installing optical
fiber cable in an incumbent local exchange carrier’s (ILEC’s) existing underground duct
system has little adverse impact on a community and is likely to be supported by public
officials. Conversely, trenching a roadway in an urban center to install new duct for optical
fiber cable is likely to cause traffic delays and other associated impacts, creating a more
difficult acquisition process.
Projects with more adverse impacts are likely to take more time because the R/W granting
authority will want a higher level of detail and may seek additional information for assurance
that impacts have been mitigated to the greatest extent possible. Depending on the locality, the
R/W granting authority may also negotiate an exaction (e.g., fee) for compensation due to
impacts they feel are particularly burdensome.
It is crucial to ensure that all R/W issues have been properly identified. If one small segment
of an OSP route is not properly authorized, that segment becomes the weakest link and
prevents the entire OSP project from proceeding.
Introduction, continued
One issue involving R/W is the terms under which the rights are acquired. The need for
access to maintain the facilities that are placed to rebuild, reinforce, and expand or remove
must be met. The more difficult or undefined the terms are, the more likely access will be
denied. The designer must consider these issues before executing the R/W documents.
Definition
R/W is the legal right to pass through or over property owned by another party. This includes
the land on which facilities are built. These facilities can take the form of:
• Transmission lines.
• High-pressure gas lines.
• Railroads.
• Telecommunications facilities.
R/W can be a:
• Fixed width (e.g., roads, railroads, utilities).
• Variable width (e.g., expensive land, permanent structures).
In previous chapters, OSP has been considered as the facilities connecting buildings on
contiguous property. However, in certain instances there could be a requirement to bridge the
gap between several pieces of property that make up the complex being served. In that
instance, it is necessary to acquire the permissions of other landowners to cross the adjacent
property. The legal document used to acquire this permission can be an easement, license, or
permit. Permits are normally used when the R/W crosses public property (e.g., a roadway) or
some private land (e.g., a railroad).
Usually, OSP facilities are placed on the customer’s property. When placing a facility on the
customer’s property, only the customer’s permission is required unless unusual situations exist
(e.g., the presence of wetlands or railroad spurs into the property).
If a customer plans to continue facilities beyond the property’s boundaries, permission is
required from others, including the:
• Government (e.g., city, county, state, federal).
• Department of Transportation (DoT).
• Railroads.
• Utilities.
• Private property owners.
NOTE: All agencies have different requirements and restrictions for placing facilities.
Government authorities with legal jurisdiction are often referred to as authorities
having jurisdiction (AHJs).
Definition, continued
Acquiring access to public R/W is more difficult for customers who are not franchised utility
providers. Public R/W is typically reserved for franchised utility providers such as:
• Power.
• Water.
• Sewer.
• Telephone.
• Cable television.
• Gas.
Even franchised utility providers can be required to pay substantial annual premiums for the
right to use the public R/W. These premiums can be based on the linear footage of the
easement and facilities.
EXAMPLE: If multiple cables are placed in one trench, the premium could be based on
the total cable footage of all cables placed in the trench as opposed to the
length of the trench itself.
Options
If it has been determined that the facilities need to extend beyond the boundaries of a
customer’s property, a decision must be made whether to use public R/W or private R/W.
If the decision is to use public R/W, the only option is to acquire a permit or license through a
permitting process since the purchasing of public R/W is typically not possible.
If the decision is to use private R/W, two options become available:
• Purchasing a strip of land from the property owner.
• Negotiating an easement from the property owner for the placement and maintenance of
the facilities.
Other Considerations
Utilities placed in public R/W occasionally cross private lands. Sometimes, it is easier and less
expensive to obtain private R/Ws than to attempt to acquire a permit on a public domain.
It is also possible to obtain a permit to cross waterways and wetlands. If the waterway is
navigable, contact the AHJ (e.g., United States Army Corps of Engineers, U.S. Coast Guard).
If the area is designated a wetland, avoid it if at all possible. If it is unavoidable, consider
directional boring as an alternate. Coordinate all activities and permits through the appropriate
AHJ.
Easements
Whether public or private, the granting of an easement is the approval to use a specified strip
of land in the case of placing a telecommunications facility for a specified purpose. Typically,
easements are obtained for the placement of:
• Underground utilities.
• Overhead utilities.
• Wireless utilities.
An easement also gives the holder the right:
• Of ingress/egress (entering/exiting).
• To place and maintain the facilities being proposed.
A landowner who grants an easement is precluded from building a structure of any kind on the
easement but retains the right to use the land within certain limits to:
• Plant grass.
• Farm.
• Otherwise use the property.
Since land is considered one of the most valuable possessions a person could acquire, its
ownership and transfer is subject to significant regulation. Therefore, it is necessary to have a
basic understanding of the methods used to describe and identify land.
• Are there any plans to pave or do utility work along our proposed route? This information
is important to know to coordinate your work with other proposed work. This could cause
your project to be delayed or could provide an argument to request an accelerated
permitting process.
• Are there any portions of our route that are in another agency’s jurisdiction? Roadways
could be under the jurisdiction of a municipal, county, state, regional agency, or a
combination of these governmental entities. It is not always obvious where the boundaries
of these jurisdictional boundaries begin and end. The people responsible for maintenance
of the roadways are typically well aware of jurisdictional boundaries.
NOTES: Accurate drawings generally are required with all permit applications. Many
authorities require scaled computer-aided design (CAD) drawings.
Some local governmental bodies (i.e., municipalities and counties) require a fee,
based on distance, to obtain a permit. These fees may be based on a per foot
cost for buried facilities and include other administrative and policing
assessments that may be required for the particular area being permitted.
Where such permits are needed, require bidding contractors to include these
costs in their estimation. These permits also may require that final changes in
the form of as-built drawings be submitted to the AHJ.
• Is there a government agency that has a geographical information system (GIS) or CAD
plans for our route? Obtain this data in an electronic format and use it as a base map for
your construction and permitting plans. With more government agencies developing GIS
databases, obtaining base map data is becoming increasingly easy. Obtaining base map
data in a digital format can save an enormous amount of time and money.
• Do you have as-built plans showing existing utilities? If excavation is proposed, identifying
exiting utilities near your route on a plan will be necessary. To ensure that your proposed
route minimizes the potential to cause damage to existing utilities during construction or
maintenance, the permit granting authority will review this plan.
• What are your bonding and insurance requirements? A contractor is almost always
required to post a bond and insurance prior to construction in a public R/W. Knowing
these requirements will help you qualify contractors.
• How often does the permit granting authority meet and what is their permitting process?
This information is important to help in the development of a schedule for your project. It
is also important to know if there is any period of the year when the permitting granting
authority does not meet. Many government boards and commissions limit meetings during
the summer and holidays to accommodate volunteer member’s vacation schedules.
• What are the winter moratorium rules? In geographically northern locations, it is common
to limit or prohibit underground work in the winter. This is due to problems with
compaction of subsurface materials during freezing conditions and to avoid the safety
hazard of plow trucks hitting steel plates left over trenches. Waivers of winter moratori-
ums are often granted for emergency situations.
• Are there any utilities that are not members of a one-call location system (see Chapter 5:
Pathways and Spaces)? Not all utilities are members of these organizations. To prevent
potentially expensive utility hits or face worse consequences, including serious injury or
death, it is critical to ensure that all existing utilities are notified so that their plant can be
properly marked in the field prior to any subsurface work.
• Do you restrict work on newly paved streets? If trenching is proposed down a roadway,
you need to know if there are restrictions or prohibitions on working in newly paved
streets. This could affect the route selection and an aerial option may be required.
• Are there any sensitive issues or areas of special concern that should be known? Is the
work going to require special considerations to ensure access is maintained throughout the
construction process (e.g., in front of a school, fire station, hospital)?
Business cards should be exchanged. Contact information is always necessary. Most
government officials will expect the OSP designer to ensure that the project moves through
the permitting process. It is important to ensure that all of the permit granting authority’s
issues and concerns have been addressed.
NOTE: Take the initiative to ask if you are scheduled to meet with any boards or commis-
sions. Do not assume you will be notified and guided through the permitting process.
Property Descriptions
In the case of R/W acquisition, the property description is essential for the
identification of existing land ownership. Once the proposed route has been identified, the
property descriptions are used to identify the precise boundary lines of the R/W.
This property description is required to:
• Describe the tract or parcel in precise detail so that any interested party may identify it.
• Meet the legal requirements to pass title.
The property description is normally composed of five distinct segments:
• Intent—The description of the property must be such that the buyer, seller, and any other
interested party not familiar with the property can read and understand the intent of both
the seller and buyer.
• Location—Each parcel of land has a unique location on the earth. The description must be
in sufficient detail that its precise location can be fixed in relation to its surroundings. This
can be accomplished by reference to a fixed survey monument, an established road
centerline, or a larger survey of which this property is a part.
• Geometric shape—A continuous series of bearings and lines that totally encompass the
property (i.e., metes and bounds).
• Size—The area within the geometric shape should be described to an acceptable degree
of accuracy.
• Ownership—The description of the property shall state the name of the current owner.
Additional items include references to the:
• Public land record.
• Name of the surveyor who completed the land survey upon which the record is based.
In the case of an easement, the conveyance document should clearly define the rights being
acquired along with the specific use. For aerial plant, minimum line heights should be
specified.
Introduction
Accurate land measuring and describing requires a standardized measurement system. Many
countries have converted to the metric system, but their original units of measurement
remained. Documents such as deeds and R/Ws, in many cases have not been converted.
Therefore, the designer should have an understanding of both the old and current land
measurement systems. For example, when working in the states of Texas and California,
knowledge of the Spanish/Portuguese measurement system is required. The Texan vara is
84.6 centimeters (cm [33-1/3 inches (in)]), while the Californian vara equals 83.8 cm (33 in).
Accurate and legally acceptable methods of describing property in use in the United States
and Canada are the:
• Rectangular grid system.
• Coordinate system (State Coordinate System in the United States and Dominion Land
Survey [DLS] system in Canada).
• Mercator projection system
• Metes and bounds description.
• Subdivision plat and description.
• Centerline description.
• Point description.
• Reference description.
Following are brief descriptions of each of these methods.
Figure 8.1
Method of township numbering
North and south from baseline and east and west from meridian
T.3.N.
Range line
Township line
T.2.N.
Meridian
T.1.N.
Baseline
R.3.W. R.2.W. R.1.W. R.1.E. R.2.E. R.3.E.
T.1.S.
Range line
T.2.S.
Township line
T.3.S.
Each quadrangle is further subdivided into 16 townships that are 9.7 km (6 mi) on a side.
Townships are arranged in four tiers above and four tiers below the baseline and are
numbered according to their position above and below the baseline. For example, the first
township above the baseline would be referred to as Township 1 North (T.1.N.).
Figure 8.2
Theoretical township numbering
36 31 32 33 34 35 36 31
80 ch 6 mi—480 ch 80 ch
1 mi 80 ch
1 6 5 4 3 2 1 6
12 7 8 9 10 11 12 7
6 mi—480 ch
13 18 17 16 15 14 13 18
24 19 20 21 22 23 24 19
25 30 29 28 27 26 25 30
36 31 32 33 34 35 36 31
1 6 5 4 3 2 1 6
ch = Chain
mi = Mile
Figure 8.3
Section subdivision
80 ch 80 ch
Sec. cor.
40 ch
40 ch
N2
320 ac
Quarter
sec. cor.
80 ch
Sec. Sec.
All 640 ac
40 ch
40 ch
2
S
320 ac
40 ch 40 ch
40 ch 40 ch
Sec. cor. Quarter 4 4
NW NE NE NE
4 4
sec. cor. 40 ac
40 ch
40 ch
NW4 40 ac
160 ac 4 4 4 4
SW NE SE NE
40 ac 40 ac
80 ch
2
W E2 20 20
Sec. Sec.
320 ac 320 ac
40 ch
40 ch
4
SW SE4
160 ac 160 ac
40 ch 40 ch
ac = Acre
ch = Chain
sec = Section
sec cor = Section corner
Figure 8.4
Small subdivision
40 ch 80 ch 40 ch
4
2 2 4 4
4
N N NE NE
W W NE NW
2 4 4
4
W E NE NW
E W NE NW
4
E E NE NW
N NW NE 10 ac
W NW NW
NW NW
20 ac
4
20 ac
20 ac
10 ac
20 ac
10 ac
4
4
and
4
4 2 2 4 4
20
S N NE NE
2
and
2 2
2 2
2 4 4 2 4 4
2
S NW NE
2
S NE NE
2
E
2
20 ac 30 ac
40
NW4 NE4
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
20
SW NW SE NW SW NE SE NE
80
Sec.
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
20
NW SW NE SW NW SE NE SE
40
SW4 SE4
4
W W W SE SW 5 ac
4
E W W SE SW 5 ac
W W SW SW
E W SE SW
E W SE SW
E W SW SW
W E SW SW
E W SW SW
4
4
4
30 ac
4
4
10 ac
10 ac
10 ac
10 ac
4
and
4 4 4 4
20
2 2 2 4
SW SE SE SE
2 2 2 4
2
2
2
2 2
2
2
2
2
5 5 5 5 2.52.5
ac = Acre
ch = Chain
Figure 8.5
Legal subdivision and lotting
80 80
2 2 2
N NW NE
320 ac 160 ac 160 ac
2 2
W Sec E Sec Sec
320 ac 320 ac
2 2 2
S SW SE
320 ac 160 ac 160 ac
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
NW NW NE NW NW NE NE NE NW NW NE NW NW NE NE NE
2 2
4 3 2 1 2 NW NE
4 4 4 4
1 SW NE SE NE
Sec Sec
Reservation 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1
3 NW SE NE SE NW SW NE SW NW SE 8
3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 1
4 SW SE SE SE SW SW SE SW 4
5 6 7 8 5 2
7
4 4 4 4
4 3 2 1 2 1 NW NW NE NW 2 1
4 3 4
5 r
ank Rive
4 4 4 4
5 6 7 8 3 SW NW SE NE
tB 5
Lef
Sec Sec Sec
nk
6 7 Ba 4 4 4 4
12 11 10 9 NW SE NE SE
ht
6 6
Rig
8
7 3
4 4 4 4 4 4
13 14 15 16 8 9 SE SW SW SE SE SE
5
4
ac = Acre
sec = Section
Based on Figure 8.5, Lot 1, located in Section 31, could be described by a series of letters and
numbers as Lot 1, Sec 31, T.4.N., R.3.W., Third Principal Meridian, First Standard Parallel
North. This description applies to only one piece of land within the United States.
Figure 8.6
State coordinate system
North pole
(24 mi)
39 km
1st guide meridian west
(24 mi)
Principal meridian
39 km
Check
Baseline
(24 mi)
39 km
km = Kilometer
mi = Mile
Figure 8.7
Use of the protractor
N2
0
E
ºW
º
30
North
N
t N
es or
W 0 10 t h
d 10 20
20
an
30
an
30
h
d
40
rt
40
W
No
es
50
50
t
60
60
70
70
90 80
80
70
70
60
60
0 ºW
S7
50
50
40 S
40 60
º
So
30 E
30
ut
20 20
as
h
10 0 10
E
n
a
d d
W an
es h
t ut
So
South
Using the example developed from the rectangular grid and state coordinate systems, the
description could be further amplified as Lot 1, Sec 31, T.4.N., R.3.W., Third Principal
Meridian, First Standard Parallel North. It can be more fully described as beginning at a point
in the north line of Section 31, said point being 52 809.55 m (173,259.2 ft) South and 547 567
m (1,796,474 ft) West and being the northeast corner of said property.
This description could be continued using the metes and bounds description methods to more
accurately describe Lot 1. Since the northeast corner of the tract has been established using
the State Coordinate System, it can also be used as the point of beginning for the metes and
bounds description. Therefore, the metes and bounds description would be Lot 1, Sec 31,
T.4.N., R.3.W., Third Principal Meridian, First Standard Parallel North. It can be more fully
described as beginning at a point in the north line of Section 31, said point being 52 809.55 m
(173,259.2 ft) West and 547 567 m (1,796,474 ft) South, and being the northeast corner of said
property. Thence S 2° 00’ 0" E 792.5 m (2600 ft) to a point on the east line of Sec 31, thence
S 88° 00’ 0" W 816.87 m (2680 ft), thence N 2° 00’ 0" W 792.5 m (2600 ft) to a point in the
north line of Sec 31, thence S 88° 00’ 0" 816.87 m (2680 ft) to the point of beginning and
containing 64.74 ha (159.963 ac) more or less.
Figure 8.8
Naming conventions for metes and bounds
)
ft
P
N 4° E
.0
4
N
(4
)
45
ft
m
°
8
E
(2
W °
°
.4
60
0
9
3
m
N 80 N ° E
=
° W N 80
.5
=
8
A
W E
=
S 85° W S 80
R
S ° E
45
W
°
E
5°
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Figure 8.9
Metes and bounds
S 80°
0' 00
" E
" E 55 m
' 00 (180
8 0° 0 ft)
N ft) Monument Point of
152
. 3 m ( beginning
46
Permanent
49 m
N 4° 11' 8" E
S 15°
reference mark
(160
0' 00
ft)
" W
W
00"
° 0'
S 85 ft)
(151
46 m
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Figure 8.10
Subdivision plat and description
N
N 89° 59' 59" E
118.3 m (388 ft)
19.8 m
(65 ft)
24 m R 18.3 m (60 ft)
(80 ft)
)
ft
(4 m
0
73 m (240 ft)
0.
R 12 m (40 ft)
Lot 5
41.5 m (136 ft)
Wildflower
Lot 1
N 00° 00' 01" E
(471.5 ft)
143.7 m
(406.5 ft)
45.8 m (150.0 ft)
123.9 m
(110.5 ft)
33.7 m
R 18.3 m
12 m (40 ft)
76 m (250 ft)
(60 ft)
17 m (57 ft) Lot 2
70.6 m (231.6 ft)
Lot 4
73 m
)
ft
(240 ft)
70
(1
m
Lot 3
.8
51
24 m
(80 ft) 93.9 m (308.1 ft)
SE Corner of section 4
T14N, R2E, 4th principal meridian
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Centerline Description
The centerline description (see Figure 8.11) is one of the primary methods used in the
description of an easement. Rather than describe a rectangle, when the easement is of
uniform width, only the centerline is described by the metes and bounds method. The width of
the easement is stated as being x-number of feet on each side of the line.
Figure 8.11
Centerline description
2.3 m
(7.5 ft)
2.3 m
(7.5 ft)
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Point Description
This type of metes and bounds description is also used to describe an easement. In the point
description is a centerline description in which each point of change in alignment along the
perimeter of the tract is referenced to the centerline (see Figure 8.12).
Figure 8.12
Point description
S 80º 0'
2.3 m 00" E
" E 27.4 m (9
(7.5 ft) ' 00 ft) 0 ft)
0º 0 (150
N 8 .8 m
45
C
L
0" W
2.3 m
(7.5 ft)
0' 0
ft
125
5º
S 1
2.3 m
(7.5 ft)
N
2.3 m
(7.5 ft)
C
L
C = Center line
L
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Reference Description
The reference description is primarily used in urban areas or rural subdivisions where the tract
has been subdivided and each lot given a number. Once the original plat and description has
been recorded, the description of each individual lot can be referenced to the original plat.
A typical description would be Lot 34, Block 14-B, Woodhaven Country Club Estates, 3-B
filing, an Addition to the City of Fort Worth, Tarrant County, Texas, according to the plat
recorded in Volume 388/97, Page 25, Plat Records, Tarrant County, Texas.
To determine who owns a parcel of property, the basic types of ownership associated with
real estate must be understood.
Interests in real estate are called estates. An estate is defined as the nature, quality, degree, or
extent of a person’s interest in real property. Although numerous types of interests exist, the
most common types are:
• Fee ownership.
• Leasehold.
• Easements.
• License.
• Life estate.
Fee Ownership
Fee ownership is the highest and most complete type of ownership. Fee ownership is also
termed in fee, in fee simple, or in fee simple absolute. With fee ownership, the person
possesses all rights to the property and has no limitations as to what they could be done with
the property.
Leasehold
A lease is a contract that grants the lessee (i.e., tenant) the right to occupy the property of the
lessor (i.e., landlord) for a specified period of time. As a result of this contract, the lessee
becomes, in fact, the owner of an interest in the land or leasehold interest.
Easement
An easement is defined as the right acquired by one entity (e.g., person or company) to use
the property of another for a special or particular use. In OSP, the purpose of obtaining an
easement is for the placement of information transport systems (ITS.) The term could be as
long as required by the purchaser to support the ITS requirement.
An easement also gives the holder the right:
• Of ingress/egress (entering/exiting).
• To place and maintain the facilities being proposed.
A landowner who grants an easement is precluded from building a structure of any kind on the
easement but retains the right to use the land within certain limits to:
• Plant grass.
• Farm.
• Otherwise use the property.
R/W is a type of easement giving one person or company the right to pass over the land of
another. By common usage, the term R/W could refer to the right or the strip of land on which
the right is located.
License
A license is an interest in property for a limited time and purpose. Normally, unauthorized
entry onto someone else’s property would be considered trespassing. When the entry is
authorized, the person entering is said to have a license. For example, when someone buys a
ticket to see a motion picture, that person has, in fact, purchased a license for a seat in the
theater for that date and that motion picture.
Life Estate
This interest in real property could be created by deed or will. The owner of the life estate is
allowed to use the property for the duration of their life. Upon the owner’s death, all rights
revert to the person granting the life estate, their heirs, or assigns. The person who had the life
estate has no further interest in the property.
Ownership
In addition to estates in land, there are also types of ownership. The primary types of
ownership are:
• Single ownership.
• Joint ownership.
– Joint tenancy, including tenancy by entirety, community property, dower, and curtesy.
– Tenancy in common.
Single Ownership
When one person is the sole owner of a parcel of real estate, that person is known as the
owner in severalty. In the majority of cases, ownership is not this restrictive but is shared by
one or more persons.
Joint Ownership
Two types of joint ownership are joint tenancy and tenancy in common. Each type creates a
difference in the property.
Joint Tenancy
A joint tenancy is one in which two or more persons hold an estate. Upon the death of one,
the right to that portion reverts to the remaining person without creating a new document or
deed. It is assumed that the joint tenants individually own the entire property. Some states
have abolished joint tenancy, allowing the property of the deceased to pass to their heirs.
Other types of joint tenancy are created between married persons. They are tenancy by
entirety, community property, dower, and curtesy.
In the case of tenancy by entirety, some states treat a husband and wife as one person.
Therefore, upon the death of one spouse, unless another intent is shown in the deed, the
survivor is entitled to the entire property. This right only exists if the couple is married at the
time of purchase.
Some states have provided for property that a couple acquires during marriage as opposed to
separate property that each person had prior to the union. Separate property could also include
property acquired by one spouse after marriage as a gift, inheritance, or conveyed by one
spouse to the other. In addition, interests, rent, royalty, or profit from the separate property
would remain separate property as long as it is not commingled with community funds.
Dower is the wife’s interest in the estate of her husband, while curtesy is the husband’s
interest in his wife’s estate.
Tenancy in Common
Tenancy in common is another type of multiple ownership in which each owner has an
undivided share in the property, and at any time, action could be brought to divide the property.
Upon the death of one of the owners, a new ownership group is formed consisting of the
original owners and the heirs of the deceased. In a tenancy in common, there is no right of
survivorship as there is in other types of joint tenancy.
Title Transfer
The primary methods and documentation used to transfer title to real estate are:
• Escrow.
• Conveyance.
• Grant or warranty deed.
• Quitclaim deed.
• Bargain and sale deed.
• Patent.
• Mortgage and deeds of trust.
• Contract of sale.
Escrow
In today’s market, an escrow company handles the majority of real estate transactions. An
escrow holder is a third party who has been instructed by both the seller and the buyer about
conditions under which the transfer is to be completed. Once the conditions have been fulfilled
by both parties, the escrow holder has the deed delivered and recorded and delivers the funds
to the seller.
Conveyance
An interest in real property is transferred from the seller to the buyer by a written document
called conveyance, more commonly known as deed. The requisites for a valid deed are:
• A written instrument containing the names of the grantor and grantee, operative words of
conveyance, and sufficient legal description to unmistakably identify the property.
• Capable parties—The escrow company must be satisfied that the grantors are competent
to grant and that the grantees are capable of receiving title (e.g., the grantee is a living
person or entity that can hold title to real property in its name).
• Legal transfer of property—As a rule of title practice, a title company would decline to
insure an attempted conveyance of the expected interest of an heir apparent.
• Proper execution of the deed—Although slight defects in the execution of an instrument
will not necessarily impair its validity, high standards of care and thoroughness will prevent
defects. Be certain that the instruments are signed in ink exactly as the names are typed.
• Delivery and acceptance of the deed—Questions on these points usually arise in situations
where the intent of the parties is not clear. The requisite of delivery is not likely to become
a problem in an escrow transaction. A number of factors could have a bearing on the
conclusion as to delivery, but questions on this point are a rare occurrence.
The two most common types of deeds used in the United States are the grant or warranty
deed and the quitclaim deed.
Quitclaim Deed
This type of deed only conveys the property rights that the grantor has at the time of sale.
This deed is commonly seen in a divorce settlement when one of the parties retains the
common real estate.
NOTE: The granting of a quitclaim deed does not warrant that the person granting the deed
has or had any interest in the property.
Patent
A state or the federal government uses this type of instrument in the conveyance of title to
public land. When researching the ownership of property, the patent is the base document
upon which the chain of title is based.
Contract of Sale
The contract of sale could be one of two types. The first type provides for immediate transfer
of ownership of the property by the buyer. The price is paid in cash or cash with the balance
paid by some type of promissory note. The second type is a land installment contract where
the buyer does not acquire a recordable interest in the property until all payments have been
made and the seller agrees to convey title to the buyer. In addition to the outright purchase of
land, two other methods of land acquisition exist in the United States—accretion and adverse
possession.
The term accretion is normally applied to land that lies adjacent to a navigable body of water
(e.g., the Mississippi River). When the natural action of the water deposits soil on adjacent
lands, the process of accretion forms additional land. If the tract were sold, the accreted land
would be included in the sale, even though it was not a part of the original tract. On the other
hand, if the land is washed away and deposited elsewhere, the owner loses title to that portion
of the land.
Adverse Possession
Adverse possession goes back to the theory that possession is nine-tenths of the law. To
acquire land by adverse possession, the possession must be hostile, actual, notorious,
exclusive, continuous, and under claim of title. To be valid, the person claiming the property
must continually occupy the land for the specified amount of time in such a manner that the
original owner can observe that it is in possession in opposition to the owner’s claim. One
example of adverse possession is when a fence line becomes the property line rather than the
original lot or survey line.
Up to this point the original question remains, how does one establish ownership? Normally,
title to land can be established through public records and developing what is termed a chain
of title.
Chain of Title
In most areas, an abstract of title is available from either an attorney or an abstract company.
In this instance, a researcher has verified the public record and traced the history of the
property back to the original grant or patent. The abstract of title is a summary of this
research. Additionally, title insurance companies located throughout the country make it
possible for a person acquiring property to buy an insurance policy that will insure the title to
the property.
Based on this information, and going back to the earlier example, the property description
would be further amplified as Lot 1, Sec 31, T4N, R3W, Third Principal Meridian, First
Standard Parallel North. It can be more fully described as beginning at a point in the north line
of Section 31, said point being 52 809.55 m (173,259.55 ft) South and 547 567 m (1,796,474 ft)
West, and being the northeast corner of said property. Thence S 2° 00’ 0" E 792.5 m (2600 ft)
to a point on the east line of Sec 31, thence S 88° 00" 0' W 816.9 m (2680 ft), thence
N 2° 00’ 0" W 792.5 m (2600 ft) to a point in the north line of Sec 31, thence S 88° 00’ 0"
816.9 m (2680 ft) to the point of beginning and containing 64.74 ha (159.963 acres) more or
less. Being the same premise conveyed to Philip Janeway by deed recorded in Book 1279, at
page 965, Jefferson County, State of Indiana.
At this point, the property description is complete. The intent of the seller and the buyer would
normally be spelled out in the beginning of the deed document. The intent would state the
name of the seller, the buyer, and the consideration given for the parcel.
In addition to the various types of deeds, certain restrictions could be written into the deed that
restricts the use of the land. These are known as restrictions, covenants, and conditions.
The use of property can be limited or restricted in one of two ways. In most metropolitan
areas, zoning laws set certain restrictions. Additionally, the developer could have incorporated
additional restrictions at the time the land was subdivided. These restrictions could apply to the
manner in which the utilities are placed. For example, it could require all utilities to be
underground. Due to this restriction, if an aerial telecommunications lead was placed past the
property, it would have to be buried for this portion of the project. Changes to the covenants
would require the approval of all owners of the subdivision. Additional restrictions could also
apply in the form of liens and encumbrances.
An encumbrance can be defined as any lien, claim, or liability attached to the land.
Encumbrances could be in the form of a mortgage, unpaid taxes, a mechanic or vendor’s lien,
a judgment, or even an easement or R/W previously granted on the property. A lien is more
restrictive than an encumbrance in that the debt owed could require the sale of the property
with the proceeds going to the lien holder. The term encumbrance can be defined as anything
that affects or limits the fee simple title to property.
Appraisers
The Appraisal Foundation, subset of IRWA, certifies appraisers and requires that they have
training in:
• Influences on real estate value.
• Legal considerations in appraisal.
• Types of value.
• Economic principles.
• Real estate markets and analysis.
• Valuation process.
• Property description.
• Highest and best-use analysis.
• Appraisal math and statistics.
• Sales comparison approach.
• Site value.
• Cost approach.
• Income approach.
• Valuation of partial interests.
• Appraisal standards and ethics.
• Narrative report writing.
Once the decision has been made to acquire an easement, the process is broken down into
four phases:
• Engineering
• Legal
• Appraisal
• Negotiation
Appraisers, continued
Engineering
Where possible, several routes should be considered. They could be prioritized based on the
site survey. Once this is accomplished, the engineering phase can begin. First and foremost is
the requirement to have a complete and accurate description of the property upon which the
easement is located, together with an accurate description of the easement. The description
should be written so it can be clearly recognized by a competent person at any time in the
future. It should also satisfy the legal requirement for the transfer of an interest in real estate.
The description of the property as stated on the deed should fulfill this requirement. The
location of the easement on the property must also meet this same requirement. The licensed
land surveyor can prepare this description. It is also advisable to have both the written
description along with a plat (drawing) of the easement. Once these documents have been
prepared, the next phase of the acquisition process can begin.
Legal
The legal aspect of R/W acquisition can be broken down into two distinct segments:
• Establishing ownership of the parcel of land upon which the easement is located
• Preparing the easement document (i.e., deed)
The chain of title can be accomplished by an attorney or through an abstract company. Ensure
that the deed is free from any defects and/or encumbrances.
R/W forms are available and can be prepared by an R/W agent working under the direction of
an attorney with the R/W company. If the form is prepared in house, an attorney should
review and approve the form. See Chapter 2: Legal Considerations for the OSP Designer for
more information.
CAUTION: When writing the description, the intended use should be stated as generally
as possible. If the original purpose of the easement is placement of a 25-pair,
self-supporting aerial cable and is stated as such, the size could not be
increased or the cable could be replaced with optical fiber without obtaining a
new easement. The purpose is better stated as placement of aerial
telecommunications cables.
Appraisal
The appraisal of easement, also known as appraisal of partial acquisitions, is concerned with
two aspects of land valuation:
• Value of the land before the easement
• Value of the land after it has been encumbered by the easement
Appraisers, continued
Land is a limited resource. The land required to tie together two portions of a complex is even
more limited. The valuation of property is based on several key factors:
• Supply and demand
• Change of use
• Substitution
• Highest and best use
• Anticipation
Change of Use
In many instances, the requirement for OSP is driven by change. The client is expanding their
facility. The same change could take place throughout the area. Land that is used as
agricultural land could change to industrial or commercial. In this case, the value of the land
also increases relative to its supply. For example, if the shortest route is directly across an
agricultural field and is placed at a sufficient depth, OSP will not impact the use of that
segment of the field for agricultural purposes. If the use of that same piece of land were
changed to an industrial use, then the location of the easement may have a definite impact on
the location of a building.
Substitution
Substitution is another approach that an appraiser uses to establish value. In this case, a
similar and equal piece of property is compared to the piece over which OSP will be placed.
In the substitution process, all other factors are assumed to be equal; the one with the lowest
price substitutes all others.
Appraisers, continued
Anticipation
To the owner or buyer of real estate, the value of the land may not be what it is capable of
producing today but rather what it will produce in years to come. Because of this, one of the
functions of the marketplace is to derive today’s price for the right to obtain future
satisfaction.
Based on these principles, the appraiser must measure this value in terms of the compensation
required for the property together with any compensable damages that could occur to the
land. One example of a compensable damage would be the requirement to cut a driveway,
which would be replaced. The owner or tenant could require additional damages for the
inconvenience caused during the construction period.
Aesthetics is another aspect that must be considered. In an area where aerial construction is
common, one more pole line may not have an aesthetic impact. However, in an area where all
utilities are underground, an aerial line could be unacceptable. After the value has been
established for each route, a decision can be about the route that will be most cost-effective
for the project. Following this decision, the fourth and final phase, negotiation with the
landowner for acquisition of the easement, can commence.
Negotiation
In the area of easement acquisition, negotiation is the most crucial phase of the project. If the
negotiation with the owner is not completed in a successful manner, all of the actions
completed prior to the negotiation are lost. Therefore, negotiation can be defined as the
process by which property is sought to be acquired through discussion, conference, and final
agreement on the terms of a voluntary transfer of property.
Appraisers, continued
Most textbooks on the subject of negotiations will list at least three types of negotiation
methods:
• Bargaining
• Attitudinal
• Integrative
Of these three types, the one most people think of when they hear the word negotiation is
bargaining. A good example of bargaining negotiation is the negotiation process between labor
and management. The problem with this concept is that bargaining negotiation is also thought
of as a win-loss situation for one of the parties. Therefore, bargaining negotiation has a very
limited use in R/W acquisition. Remember, for any sale to take place there must be a willing
seller and a willing buyer.
In the case of the easement acquisition, there is a willing buyer, but not necessarily a willing
seller. A better approach could be to use a combination of attitudinal and integrative
negotiations. In the attitudinal approach to negotiation, a set of ground rules is established
between both parties and a sense of trust could develop between the two. Once this trust is
developed, the integrative phase can begin.
Integrative negotiation, sometimes called a win-win situation, is more of a problem-solving
approach between the buyer and the seller. By using this method, the buyer understands the
seller’s problems and vice versa. In most cases, an agreement may be reached that will meet
the needs of the buyer, and, at the same time, minimize any negative effects for the seller.
Due to the preconceived ideas that most people possess, it is incumbent on the buyer to
approach this phase with caution.
Depending on the buyer’s relationship with the landowner, the negotiation could be
accomplished by the buyer or through a third party, such as an R/W agent or an attorney.
After the easements have been acquired, the easement documents must be recorded in the
same fashion as any other real estate transaction. In addition, the overall environmental and
aesthetics impact of the project must be considered.
Easement Document
The details contained in the easement document are related to the type of physical plant
planned for the project:
• Direct-buried
• Underground
• Aerial
• Combination of the above
An easement application should contain a minimum of two documents including:
• The terms and conditions of the easement. Legal counsel should prepare these with the
assistance of the consultant.
• A detailed engineering sketch indicating prominent features and a legal description of the
property, along with details about any adjacent public R/W such as:
– Road names and numbers.
– Shoulder width.
– Sidewalk, curb, and gutter locations.
– Significant drainage structures.
– North arrow.
– R/W width.
– Exact location of the proposed utility with respect to property lines.
– Nearest intersecting road on the public road system, if available.
– Any unusual issues or arrangements for use of the property.
Permit Information
Application
Normally, the application package is required to include a(n):
• Permit application (see Example 8.1). This is a formal application signed by the applicant
and, if approved by the DoT, it summarizes information about:
– Applicant (name, address, and telephone number).
– Highway involved (county, road/route number, and road name).
– Type of public service line.
– Description of the location of the line on the highway.
– Any special provisions tied to the approval of the permit.
• Key map (see Figure 8.13). This is a state highway map indicating the general location of
the R/W. The area containing the work must be detailed along or across the public roads
affected by the R/W.
• Engineering sketch indicating roadway features such as:
– Pavement width.
– Shoulder width.
– Sidewalk, curb, and gutter locations.
– Significant drainage structures.
– North arrow.
– R/W width.
– Exact location of the proposed utility with respect to the roadway centerline and
nearest intersecting road on the state system.
NOTE: In some cases, submission of a completed set of construction drawings will
suffice for the above requirements.
Example 8.1
Typical state permit application
State Department
of Transportation THIS SPACE FOR STATE USE ONLY
0199 (02/99)
Figure 8.13
Associated construction drawing for state permit application
l
3/8 Copper
o
Po
gas line
minimum depth under highway. (propane)
e
in
e
P
House
y
ra
Gas
a
w
a
ve
G
ri
e
B
in
D
P Propane
R
W
10 m (33 feet)
BLKTP
Centerline
State Highway 72
R
W
104.5 m
(343 ft)
N
Existing
4-Fiber House
18-Fiber
#4405
Approval Process
The permit approval process consists of the:
• Applicant submitting completed forms to the appropriate city/county/state office or
appropriate AHJ.
• Resident maintenance engineer and district construction engineer reviewing the forms.
• Approval and return of the permit to the applicant with the approved signatures, provided
that all details were submitted and consistent with DoT policies.
NOTE: Even if not required, it is a good policy to notify the DoT prior to beginning work.
Railroad Permit
Each railroad company’s requirements are different. The engineering office at the corporate
headquarters of the railroad company can usually provide the information required for
obtaining permits or determine the specific company location that can provide this information.
Application
The applicant must prepare a letter transmitting the permit application to the designated
railroad system superintendent. This letter must indicate the location of the proposed railroad
crossing by milepost number and footage north, south, east, or west of the milepost as
appropriate and any discernible or identifiable crossroads.
The railroad can require a formal agreement between the applicant and railroad. If that
occurs, the applicant should obtain legal counsel to assist in the preparation of this agreement.
Liberal time should be allowed for railroad permit approval.
Retention of Records
The applicant must keep a copy of all correspondence relative to the railroad permit on file as
long as the applicant owns the physical plant.
Figure 8.14
Casing lengths for various railroad crossing angles
30°
Rail
Rail
40°
50°
60°
70°
80°
90°
85°
75°
65°
55°
45°
35°
Figure 8.15
Layout of a railroad crossing
A A
4.6 m (15 ft) 4.6 m (15 ft)
al
der
Minimum Minimum o r fe er
R.R. R/W
t e b
Sta e num
t
rou
Milepost
F E See Note
D
W
. R/
B Hwy
B
Variable dimensions:
R.R. R/W
A = Width of R/W
C B = Length of encasement
C = Length of encroachment
D = Distance from milepost
E = Distance from pavement
F = Angle of crossing
To (nearest station) G = Depth of casing
Hwy. surface
Project Number
Prepared By
Figure 8.16
Arrangements for different casing sizes
Figure 5
508 mm (20 in) OD
490.52 mm (19.312 in) ID
Figure 1
305 mm (12 in) ID
3 Duct
Figure 2 10 Duct
356 mm (14 in) OD
399.75 mm (13.376 in) ID
Figure 6
559 mm (22 in) OD
539.75 mm (21.25 in) ID
4 Duct
Figure 3
406 mm (16 in) OD
390.55 mm (15.376 in) ID
14 Duct
Figure 7
610 mm (24 in) OD
587.35 mm (21.125 in) ID
7 Duct
Figure 4
457 mm (18 in) OD
439.72 mm (17.312 in) ID
16 Duct
Figure 8.16
Arrangements for different casing sizes, continued
Figure 8 Figure 11
660 mm (26 in) OD 813 mm (32 in) OD
3150 mm (124 in) ID 787.35 mm (30.998 in) ID
19 Duct
Figure 9
711 mm (28 in) OD
687.37 mm (27.062 in) ID
29 Duct
Figure 12
864 mm (34 in) OD
836.577 mm (32.94 in) ID
19 Duct
Figure 10
762 mm (30 in) OD
738.17 mm (29.062 in) ID
36 Duct
26 Duct
ID = Inside Diameter
in = Inch
mm = Millimeter
OD = Outside Diameter
Table 8.1
Specifications for steel casing
Wall Thickness Inside Diameter
Diameter Protected Nonprotected Protected Nonprotected
mm (in) in in in in
*305 mm (12 in) ID 0.188 12 12
*356 mm (14 in) OD 0.219 0.312 13.562 13.376
*406 mm (16 in) OD 0.219 0.312 15.562 15.376
*457 mm (18 in) OD 0.250 0.344 17.500 17.312
*508 mm (20 in) OD 0.281 0.344 19.438 19.312
559 mm (22 in) OD 0.312 0.375 21.376 21.250
*610 mm (24 in) OD 0.344 0.438 23.312 23.124
660 mm (26 in) OD 0.375 0.438 25.250 25.124
711 mm (28 in) OD 0.406 0.469 27.188 27.062
*762 mm (30 in) OD 0.406 0.469 29.188 29.062
813 mm (32 in) OD 0.438 0.500 31.124 31.000
864 mm (34 in) OD 0.469 0.500** 33.000
*914 mm (36 in) OD 0.469 0.500** 35.000
965 mm (38 in) OD 0.500 0.500** 37.000
1016 mm (40 in) OD 0.500 0.500** 39.000
*1067 mm (42 in) OD 0.500 0.500** 41.000
*1220 mm (48 in) OD 0.500 0.500** 47.000
* Stock sizes of casing. Other sizes available on special order only and will cost more than
larger stocked size.
** These sizes require nominal wall thickness and coating.
ID = Inside diameter
in = Inch
mm = Millimeter
OD = Outside diameter
Table of Contents
Statement of Work
Introduction
A statement of work is a document developed by either a client or a client/designer
collaborative team for defining the project requirements. A well-defined statement of work is
very important for a successful project. The critical elements of a statement of work include:
• Title.
• General statement.
• Objective.
• Specific tasks.
• Reporting requirements.
• Qualification requirements.
• Place and period of performance.
• Construction management.
• Restrictions.
• Security clearance requirements.
• Contracting representative.
• Attachments.
• Assumptions.
This chapter outlines the major elements of a well-defined statement of work.
Title
The title can be very important if an organization has multiple solicitations each year. Some
procurement agencies choose to assign a number to each solicitation with the year embedded
in the number to help with identification (e.g., 0012007).
General Statement
The general statement is a brief description of the overall project.
Example of a general statement: “Furnish, install, and test a singlemode optical fiber cable
from building 01 to building 02.”
General statements lengthen and become more comprehensive as the size and scope of the
project increases.
Objective (Narrative)
The objective is a description of the overall project.
Example of an objective statement: “The new 12-strand optical fiber cable will provide
connectivity from the lab to the hospital so the doctors can read the x-rays without having
to walk to the lab.”
Specific Tasks
The specific tasks identify each task that should be completed under this statement of work.
Some examples of important details that should be captured in the specific tasks section of the
statement of work are discussed below.
Type of Pathway
The designer should identify whether the outside plant (OSP) pathway will be aerial, direct
buried, underground, tunnel, or a combination. Some considerations for OSP pathways include:
• Type, size, and quantity of poles required.
• Type, size, and quantity of strand required.
• Depth and width of trench.
• Warning tape requirements.
• Type, size, and quantity of maintenance holes (MHs) required.
• Tunnel entrance and exit location.
NOTE: It is recommended to include a schematic of the MH.
Type of Cables
The designer should identify the type and size of cables that need to be installed and specify
the length of the cables, including slack, if known.
Splicing/Termination Requirements
The designer should identify the type of termination methodology to be used for copper, optical
fiber, and coaxial cables. Some examples include:
• Modular copper splicing.
• Single-pair copper splicing.
• Fusion optical fiber splicing.
• Mechanical optical fiber splicing.
• Optical fiber termination method.
Grounding Requirements
The designer should identify any special grounding requirements. Some systems have specific
resistance level requirements.
Permit Requirements
The designer should identify any special types of permits that need to be obtained before
starting the project. Depending on the jurisdiction, some permits can take a substantial amount
of time to process.
Testing Requirements
The designer should identify what type of testing will be required. Some examples of testing
are:
• Fiber test.
• Copper test.
Documentation Requirements
The designer should identify what types of deliverables are required before, during, and after
project completion. Some examples of deliverables are the:
• Safety plan.
• Test plan (before project start).
• Final design (before project start).
• List of materials (before project start).
• Proof of concept (during project).
• Test results (post project).
Reporting Requirements
The designer should identify what deliverables are due to the customer during the course of
the project. Some examples include:
• Progress reports.
• Audits.
• Safety reports.
Qualification Requirements
The designer should identify any special licenses, degrees, registrations, or special certifica-
tions that potential bidders must have as a minimum requirement for bidding on a project.
Examples of licenses, degrees, or special certifications include:
• Master electricians licenses.
• Professional engineer (PE).
• Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD®)/OSP Specialist.
• BICSI Registered Information Transport Systems (ITS) Technician.
• Senior right-of-way agent (SR/WA).
• OSP project manager (PM).
Construction Management
The designer should determine whether an on-site construction manager (CM) is required for
the project. The designer should indicate whether there are any special or minimum
requirements for the CM (e.g., 10 years of experience, managing projects over $5 million,
RCDD/OSP Specialist).
Restrictions
The designer should identify any special restrictions that might be relevant to the job. Some
examples include:
• Schedule.
• Environmental.
• Prevailing wages/Davis Bacon wages.
• Governmental restrictions.
Security Clearances
Some government and commercial work may require a variety of security clearances. The
designer should identify the scope of the security for the project and delineate in the project
plan how the requirements will be handled.
Contracting Representative
The designer should identify who will be the customer’s authorized representative to make
contractual decisions for the project. The name, office or agency, address, telephone and fax
number, and e-mail address of the customer’s representative should be included.
Attachments
The designer should list any attachments that are included in the statement of work. Some
examples are the:
• Schedule.
• Wage determinations.
• Construction drawings for pathways, spaces, media, and termination and splicing
hardware for the buildings,
• Bonding and grounding drawings for OSP and entrance facilities (EFs).
• Conceptual drawings.
• Test procedures for all media installed and terminated/spliced.
• System requirements documentation.
Assumptions
The designer should include any project-specific assumptions that are required.
Table of Contents
Figures
Figure 10.1 Splicing together two sections of same cable .............................. 10-23
Figure 10.2 Splicing a shorted cable order ................................................... 10-23
Figure 10.3 Splicing two cables of different sizes .......................................... 10-24
Figure 10.4 Splicing a new branch cable to a feed cable ................................ 10-24
Figure 10.5 New cables and a terminal spliced .............................................. 10-25
Figure 10.6 Cross-connect cabinet terminating gel-filled cables ...................... 10-25
Figure 10.7 Removal of NF-16 terminal ........................................................ 10-26
Figure 10.8 Replacing an NF-16 terminal with an NF-25 terminal ...................... 10-26
Figure 10.9 Energizing dead pairs ............................................................... 10-27
Figure 10.10 Remove cross-connect terminal ................................................. 10-27
Figure 10.11 200-Pair cable transfer at splice ................................................ 10-28
Figure 10.12 300-Pair cable transfer to new feeder cable ................................ 10-28
Figure 10.13 Section replacement on 300-pair cable ....................................... 10-29
Figure 10.14 Protector placement ................................................................ 10-29
Figure 10.15 Sample maintenance hole plan and profile drawing ........................ 10-30
Figure 10.16 Butterfly detail worksheet ......................................................... 10-31
Figure 10.17 Butterfly detail ........................................................................ 10-32
Tables
Construction Documents
Introduction
Design documentation is an important set of deliverables in an outside plant (OSP) project.
These documents are used when building OSP. They should be readable and detailed, using
legends and lists of symbols. Technicians and contractors must follow the documents
produced by the information transport systems (ITS) distribution designer. In cases where the
documents or intent of the work is questionable, the designer must be consulted.
The task of developing design documents begins early in the design process. The final work
prints or construction drawings represent a compilation of all of the data that has been
recorded by the designer of existing OSP conditions as well as all of the proposed facilities.
This data is detailed in drawings under each of the following steps:
• Schematic design—At this stage, the designer uses the notes acquired during the field
survey to design the proposed OSP facilities. The designer may work directly on the field
notes or may choose to have drafting personnel develop preliminary work prints, which
would then be used by the designer to plot the proposed OSP facilities.
• Construction documents—The final design drawings (work prints) and specifications that
will be issued to the construction forces for the placement of proposed OSP facilities.
• Work prints—The drawings used by the construction team to install the OSP facilities to
document any changes made during construction. These changes are incorporated into the
computer-aided design (CAD) drawings to complete the set of as-built prints, which are
returned to the designer and customer.
• As-built—The final set of drawings produced by the construction team to note changes
built in the field and to document major obstructions encountered during the building
process.
Schematic Design
Work prints are developed to determine future cable requirements. They may include the
number of balanced twisted-pairs, optical fiber strands, coaxial, or other cable requirements.
These requirements can only be forecast after considering requirements for existing business
and the anticipated use of vacant property. This information may be obtained through review
of the owner’s long-range plans or campus master plan. Other sources include population
forecasts, interviews with developers and planning departments, and the site survey.
Once this information is collected, the forecast requirements must be analyzed to identify
immediate or future shortages and multiple conditions found with balanced twisted-pair, optical
fiber, or coaxial cabling. This information should also be included on work prints to formulate a
plan for expansion.
Once the work print is marked with this forecasted information, the designer determines:
• Which distribution cables need immediate and future expansion.
• Where new distribution cables will be needed.
• Immediate or future rearrangements necessary for balanced twisted-pair, coaxial, and
optical fiber distribution cables and terminals.
• Where main feeder cable expansion is needed.
• How many immediate and future cables will be needed, including balanced twisted-pairs
or optical strands.
• The most cost-effective technology that will accomplish the job.
When designing feeder and distribution cables in either new or rearranged OSP, the designer
must ensure that the distribution cables provide a sufficient number of cable pairs, optical fiber
strands, and coaxial cabling for the ultimate needs of the business or the area to be served.
Balanced twisted-pair cables should be free from multiple appearances, not bridged, and
should be administered in groups of 25 sequential pairs (e.g., binder groups).
Optical fiber cables should be administered by cable construction.
The success of any design depends on in-depth planning and applying the fundamental
principles of OSP design. Data gathering is the most important aspect of design. The designer
should first obtain copies of the latest cable assignment records. If existing work prints are
available, the designer should determine the number of working balanced twisted-pairs or
optical strands in the cable sections and post the information at locations where the cable
sections taper. This will provide a good depiction of the cabling layout and the number of
working pairs or strands.
Cable Assignment
The basic concept in OSP is similar to exchange area cabling for central offices (COs) and
can be described as two general components:
• Feeder cables, which come from the campus main cross-connect (MC [campus
distributor (CD)]) and extend to the last branch cable splice or cross-connect point.
Feeder cables are typically spliced to smaller distribution or branch cables that terminate
within a building.
• Distribution cables, which extend from a cross-connect terminal or optical fiber patch
panel or branch off a feeder cable through splicing.
Feeder cables are planned and installed to provide coverage for a particular area or a specific
route. Distribution cables are designed to provide service to specific discrete areas within that
feeder’s coverage area or route.
Another term that may be applied collectively to both feeder and distribution cables in OSP is
backbone cabling. Such cabling is often called campus backbone or OSP backbone. OSP
cabling in campus environments also has been termed trunk cable, although, in exchange
terminology, a trunk is a circuit or path between two switches, at least one of which is a
telephone CO or switching center. Regular CO circuits or services are called private branch
exchange (PBX) trunks because there is a switch at both ends of the circuit. Proper
terminology for trunk cabling, therefore, is cable placed between two switching centers.
However, the term trunk cable has been applied in campus design to general OSP cabling.
The term trunk also is used in the optical fiber network to link synchronous optical network
(SONET), switched services, voice over Internet protocol (VoIP), data equipment nodes, and
internetworking devices.
Feeder Sizing
The next determination is cable sizing. The first part is the size of the feeder cable. Feeder
pair or strand count is based on the:
• Number of balanced twisted-pairs required for initial use. This includes dry copper
telephone pairs, special service requirements (e.g., data, fire alarm, and security), and any
immediate changes in present services.
• Feeder balanced twisted-pair cable count. The count is generally increased to provide a
pair-for-pair match with all of the expected distribution cables.
• Number of optical fiber strands required for initial use. This includes the number of
SONET, Ethernet, VoIP, switched, or point-to-point (PTP) services. SONET, Ethernet,
VoIP, and switched networks typically use two strands, in and out of a CO or a building
being served. A PTP service, such as telephony or Ethernet extensions and video links,
uses two strands. Other video links and networks use a single strand.
Distribution Sizing
The next step is planning the distribution portion of the cable plant. In initial cable placement
for a coverage area, the distribution portion of the total cable plant had had more balanced
twisted-pair or optical strand counts than the feeder serving the area. To terminate all of the
distribution cable pairs, the practice of stubbing balanced twisted feeder pairs and/or bridging
feeder pairs had been used. Today, those practices are no longer followed or acceptable when
using today’s technologies.
The evolution of design standards led to the placement of the ultimate size distribution cable in
the area, especially when buried to meet legislative requirements or for esthetic concerns.
Living units were assigned one and one-half to three or more distribution balanced twisted-
pairs in anticipation of additional line growth for faxes, computers, alarm systems, and
communications.
The recommendation for optical strands to a building for service is typically 6 to 24 strands per
building in anticipation of building into additional buildings for communications, data, or video
networks along the distribution cable. Due to SONET, Ethernet, and other communications
equipment working in a ring configuration, the same strands can be assigned to a number of
buildings for distribution cable sizing. It is important to know the number of allowable nodes a
certain equipment application can have.
Projection Planning
Typically, feeder cable size planning is based on a comparison of the cost of reinforcing a
route and the cost of investing in idle capacity until some future date and also consideration of
technological advances that may emerge during the period. The future date is determined by
the area’s growth rate and the provided facilities’ consumption.
Since the planning is on a multi-year basis, the plans should be periodically reviewed to ensure
that the underlying assumptions are still valid. Some planners establish a specific horizon for
their planning cycle (e.g., a five-year projection or sales projections by the sales staff).
Following are some application-specific examples:
• In aerial plant, additional cable can be overbuilt onto the support strand of the initial cable
or sufficient clearance can be provided for additional cable placement on the pole line.
This is based on load calculations.
• In underground plant, additional cable can be placed in spare conduit or innerducts within
the duct bank route.
Construction Documents
After the site survey and schematic designs have been completed, the designer has the
necessary proposed information for plotting the final information onto a set of drawings. These
drawings will be issued to the construction crew for the placement of the proposed OSP
facilities. Table 10.1 describes the construction document process.
The size of the work print medium should be large enough to be read and small enough to be
easily handled by construction personnel in the field. Typically, 11 x 17 in drawings are the
easiest to handle in the field. However, it is not uncommon to use a larger document produced
on a plotter when a larger picture of a construction project is required.
Black-and-white documents are also easier to read in the field and are generally preferred.
Some companies use blue colored lines for aerial plant construction and green colored lines for
buried plant construction. Multiple sets are usually distributed for bidding, construction, or
reference purposes. Distribution lists should be compiled to track the routing of initial and
revised issues. A routing cover (i.e., transmittal) sheet should accompany the set of drawings
and specifications. Drawings are dated and the author is identified to track revisions.
Final work prints must follow the OSP design and construction checklists (see Tables 10.2 and
10.3) for all applicable items. Construction document prints should be checked and approved
before issuing. These prints will become a final as-built upon completion. Approved and dated
revisions must be plotted and reissued when required.
Once all work is completed and the job is tested and accepted, the as-built prints become a
final record that must be maintained for reference.
Table 10.1
Construction document specifications process
Site Survey
Introduction
In the design and construction of telecommunications facilities, documentation, evaluations,
research, and identification of information are required to successfully build an OSP facility.
An accepted method for organizing this information is with the use of checklists.
Checklists are used to generate a thought process about various questions that need to be
answered regarding any project. Checklist contents (i.e., types of questions and issues) vary
throughout the world and within the many different companies involved in this type of work.
The following is an explanation of the OSP design and construction checklist.
Table 10.2
Outside plant design checklist
Reference Title and Reference Title and
3 Number Subtitles 3 Number Subtitles
• Conduit selection (8.3)—Based on the most feasible and efficient route for placing and
splicing procedures The next placing project should always be considered when selecting
a conduit.
• Cable type information (8.4)—Determines if gel-filled, gopher-proof, or nondielectric
cable will be required; whether the cable meets code requirements; and the environment
on the inside of the building entrance that the cable may pass through.
• Optical fiber cable sections (8.5)—The optical fiber cable should have sufficient cable
ends to be spliced out of the MH and coil wrapped back into the hole (approximately
30.5 m [100 ft]) for future arrangements.
• Maintenance hole numbers (8.6)—Each MH should be numbered in a sequential manner
and identified on the work prints.
Table 10.3
Outside plant construction specifications checklist
3 Ref No. Title and Subtitles 3 Ref No. Title and Subtitles
1. General 5.5 Markers
1.1 City/county 5.6 Obstructions
1.2 Permits required 5.7 Conduit or pipe
1.3 Service date/ship date 5.8 Reel number
1.4 Million conductor feet (MCF) 5.9 Measurements
1.5 Copies to 5.10 Pressurization and buffering material
1.6 Service order information 5.11 Fuse link
1.7 Transmission information 5.12 Final counts
1.8 Billing 5.13 Direct-buried drops
1.9 North arrow
6. Cable Terminals
1.10 Joint-use caution note
6.1 Type/size/count
1.11 Street names
6.2 Protection/grounding (earthing )
1.12 Right-of-way (R/W) and easement
information
information
6.3 Address/wiring limits
1.13 Distance to telecommunications
6.4 Backboard sketch
equipment room (ER)
6.5 Terminal equipment/connecting blocks
1.14 Symbols
1.15 Existing plant 7. Poles
1.16 Joint trench bonding information 7.1 Size/class
1.17 Special services 7.2 Staking informaiton
7.3 Joint use
2. Title Block 7.4 Lead/height
2.1 Nature/necessity 7.5 Span lengths
2.2 Work order number 7.6 Caution notes
2.3 Voltage 7.7 CATV/electric company request
2.4 Maintenance 7.8 Pole removal information
2.5 Date and author
8. Load Coils
3. Safety Requirements 8.1 Type case
3.1 Clearances/separations 8.2 Pair count
3.2 Traffic lights
3.3 Other utilities 9. Maintenance Holes (MHs)
3.4 Special notes for work personnel 9.1 Length/width/height
3.5 Pole condition 9.2 Number
3.6 Direct-buried power 9.3 Frame and cover/collar
3.7 Safety requirements 9.4 Diagram/detail
9.5 Windows entrance
4. Notes 9.6 Ventilation
4.1 Existing facilities
4.2 Shield continuity/conformance 10. Conduit
4.3 Cable acceptance 10.1 Wall-to-wall measurements
4.4 Building terminal sketch 10.2 Conduit identification
4.5 Cutover drops 10.3 Placement method
4.6 Contact owner 10.4 Depth
4.7 Sequence of splicing operations 10.5 Laterals
4.8 Scheduling 10.6 Maintenance hole (MH) size
5. Cable and Stubs 11. Removals
5.1 Reenterable/encapsulate 11.1 Facilities lifecycle data
5.2 Type/gauge/size 11.2 Cable length
5.3 Cable ID/pair count 11.3 Retire in place facilities
5.4 Attachment height 11.4 Record measurements
© 2007 BICSI® 10-17 OSP Design Reference Manual, 4th edition
Chapter 10: Design Documentation
• Existing plant (1.15)—Any existing plant that may affect the successful completion of this
project or may be an integral part of the project; any utility company or third-party plant
that passes through the project work area; the owner of the plant, the telephone number,
and any limitations or cautions associated with their plant.
• Joint trench bonding information (1.16)—Any grounding (earthing) or bonding information
or configurations appropriate for joint trench operations. Consult the most current edition
of local codes.
• Special services (1.17)—Any special service circuits or lit strands working in the existing
cable that may require special handling.
Figure 10.1
Splicing together two sections of same cable
1
2
BKMA-200
01, 1-200
Figure 10.2 shows splicing in a section of cable where a cable order may have been shorted.
This causes an additional splice, noted in a change order, with the additional splice noted as
3A.
Figure 10.2
Splicing a shorted cable order
3 3A
52' BKMA-200
02, 1-200
Figure 10.3
Splicing two cables of different sizes
4 Future cable
BKMA-900 BKMA-400
03, 1-900 03, 1-400
Figure 10.4 shows splicing a new branch cable to a feed cable. A pressure plug is placed after
the splicing.
Figure 10.4
Splicing a new branch cable to a feed cable
6
BKMG-900
05, 1-500
100 XD
05, 601-900
BKMG-900
05, 1-900
P
BKMA-100
05, 501-600
Figure 10.5
New cables and a terminal spliced
BKMA-50 BHMA-50
08, 1-16
NF-16P
08, 1-50 08, 1-50
Figure 10.6
Cross-connect cabinet terminating gel-filled cables
AFMW-900 SA46
10, 901-1800 10, 901-1800
SA46, 1-1800
4
AFMW-900
SA46, 1-900
AFMW-900
SA46, 901-1800
Figure 10.7
Removal of NF-16 terminal
12, 51-66
NF-16P
X X
BKMA-100 16
12, 1-100
Figure 10.8
Replacing an NF-16 terminal with an NF-25 terminal
14
12 N P
F-
, 16 25 5
51 F- -7
X
P
-6 N 51
,
X
6
12
BKMA-100
12, 1-100
Figure 10.9
Energizing dead pairs
BKMA-100 BKMA-100
14, 1-100 (50 XD) 14, 51-100
14, 1-50 + 14, 51-100
Figure 10.10
Remove cross-connect terminal
Figure 10.11
200-Pair cable transfer at splice
BKMH-600 BKMH-400
4, 1-600 3 (4, 1-400)
200 4, 401-600 + 200 XD
Figure 10.12
300-Pair cable transfer to new feeder cable
BKMA-600 300
12,1-600
BKMA-300 BKMA-300
14, 1-300 (14, 1-300) 12, 1-300
Figure 10.13
Section replacement on 300-pair cable
X X X X
BKMH-3 BKMH-300
BKMA-300
16, 301-600 4 16, 301-600
(16, 301-600)
Figure 10.14
Protector placement
Material
PL 145' ARMM-18
PL 18 302B-100
W/50' STUB
PL 1800 4B1E protector units
A PL 145' ARMM-18
34
35
36
37
Vertical
5-302B1-100
5-302B1-100
5-302B1-100
3-302B1-100
1
INS.JT
See print #2
A B
ARMM-18 AFMW-1800
24, 1-1800 3 24, 1-1800
2
Figure 10.15
Sample maintenance hole plan and profile drawing
Rountdree Dr.
Pannel Pl.
03 MH30
02
6' Williamson Rd.
01 6'
50' 04 M
P 1497 H
31
Plan view
Profile
MH = Maintenance hole
Figure 10.16
Butterfly detail worksheet
Locator coordinates:
Inspector: Reinspection? Y N
Butterfly detail
Notes:
Figure 10.17
Butterfly detail
To MH E
900 PR, 09 (2) 24M/12S
2301-3200 F8 & F9
900 PR, 09
2301-3200
3" Conduit
(Typ 4 places)
(1) 100 PR (Unknown) 900 PR Telco
(1) 50 PR (Unkown) Telco fiber
BICSI XYZ
8610 Hidden River Pkwy.
Tampa, FL 33637-1000
800.242.7405
+1 813.979.1991
Sheet No.
Ref.
Drawn XX Check XX Date XX Scale Proj. No. XXX Dwg. X-XX
Table of Contents
Figures
Figure 11.1 New construction proposal to ABC corporate office ......................... 11-11
Tables
Introduction
Cost estimating is one of the keys to success in business life. The difference between survival
and elimination as a businessperson is being successful in business by engaging in one’s
endeavor and having a positive end result. Both the buyer and the seller should estimate the
cost of a project realistically. By doing so the:
• Buyer receives a product that meets the designated requirements without paying an
excessive amount.
• Seller makes enough profit after expenses to continue in business.
Because this arrangement is important to both parties, considerable effort should be spent in
developing cost estimates that both are accurate and provide some margin for comfort. Larger
entities could have separate organizations that provide this service, but a one-person
organization (e.g., plumber, electrician) must cover its costs and realize a profit to stay in
business.
Even a personal transaction (e.g., purchasing a car or an appliance) involves cost estimating.
Most people have an idea of what they are willing to spend before they enter the marketplace
to buy something. The figure could be accurate or inaccurate, and the consequences could be
of great or little significance. The more important the transaction, the more time a person will
spend getting the numbers right. The benefits are obvious, but the methodology for developing
the numbers is not.
Comparison shopping, seeking advice, or paying another to make the purchase in your name
are some methods used. Similarly, cost estimating in the industrial or commercial arena is not
done uniformly. Some rely heavily on experience and use historical records from past designs,
while others prefer to approach each new project as a unique entity.
Cost estimating is both an art and a science. It requires:
• An understanding of the work that has to be done.
• Breakdown and quantification of the work by the labor skills required.
• Identification and quantification of the material and equipment requirements.
• Knowledge of the price of labor, material, and equipment.
• Recognition of any special circumstances that will affect the project.
• Familiarity with the site conditions.
• Availability of the resources needed.
• An understanding of direct management cost.
• An awareness of unique conditions that will be present.
Introduction, continued
The estimator gains the knowledge to bid by developing or reviewing a scope of work (SoW)
and by being familiar with the actual site where the work will be accomplished. This will
establish the particulars for a project. The knowledge of prices, availability of resources, and
other factors then can be applied.
The difference between cost and price is significant. The estimator should determine the
cost to the organization for doing the work described in the SoW. The price that is quoted
to a buyer will allow the contractor to recover the costs and other financial requirements
(e.g., overhead, operating expenses, profit). The words cost and price are not interchangeable.
Site Conditions
Identification of work that has to be completed to comply with the SoW normally will include
an invitation to do a site survey. This will provide availability to examine the site to validate or
understand the SoW prepared by others.
A site survey is a desirable and essential part of preparing a cost estimate for a client, whether
the client is seeking an engineering design only, a construction price only, or a turnkey project
where the bidder will offer a price to design and build. It also can be useful when a change
order or change in plan is requested for either the design or construction, although site
familiarity is normally assumed for these situations. A site visit, whether done alone or with
competitors for the work opportunity, will provide a chance to ask clarifying questions and to
evaluate site conditions that will affect costs.
Situations exist in which a site survey does not occur because of time constraints or the
expense involved with a site visit, but a cost estimate is still requested. In those cases,
the contractor would have to rely on the SoW alone, supplement the SoW with his own
knowledge of the site conditions, or rely on personal judgment and experience in producing
a price. Failure to conduct a site survey puts both parties at risk. A general rule is that site
surveys are necessary for most projects.
If a site survey is not conducted, some problems that could be encountered by the bidding
contractor are:
• Contingencies that can be added for protection that makes the estimate noncompetitive.
• A costly impediment that is omitted in the pricing, which will obtain the contractor the
award but not the money needed to cover expenses.
Introduction
There are several ways to develop costs. For example, a craftsman could earn $XX per hour
and could earn this regardless of the actual time worked (e.g., sick time, vacation, training,
holidays). The employer has to cover these costs, plus other business expenses (e.g., Federal
Income Contributions Act [FICA], unemployment insurance).
In addition, employees could need to be provided with tools, uniforms, motor vehicles, and
other items. Some estimators include a factor to determine the price that should be charged
(e.g., loaded labor rate), while others use the raw costs (e.g., labor, material, equipment) and
subsequently factor them up to address overhead (e.g., other direct costs, general and
administrative costs). Others could rely on historical records from prior jobs and apply a price
per unit of property placed (e.g., inclusive of labor, material). In any case, the contractor has
to cover the cost of maintaining a properly equipped employee base while also making a profit.
The development of cost estimates requires the expenditure of time and labor for the bidder.
There is a balance between how thoroughly information is developed at the site visit and how
closely the actual cost of designing and building can be estimated. The extra time and cost
associated with a rigorous breakdown and pricing of work elements cannot be warranted.
Assuming that there are five contractors of equal competence, it would be reasonable to
figure that each will be awarded 20 percent of all opportunities over some period of time.
Therefore, the cost of the site survey and subsequent development of a cost estimate can be
factored five-fold to get the cost of estimating per job won. The profit margin on the job has
to cover these initial costs and still provide a profit.
Consequently, the more effective the cost estimating cycle is, the better the chances of
profitability for the contractor. The purpose of this chapter is to discuss how to effectively
prepare cost estimates that reasonably approximate the cost of doing the work but are not
too expensive to develop.
One approach to estimating costs is to quantify the work requirement by the type of labor
skill or crew required. Because outside plant (OSP) projects have conditions that warrant
specialized crews, cost estimating can be organized under crew assignments. This also
helps to determine scheduling issues associated with material availability and labor hour
assignments. When developing the cost of an OSP project, one of the first things the designer
should do is list all crew responsibilities.
Figure 11.1 illustrates one approach to estimating the costs for a small project.
NOTES: This drawing is not a fully detailed engineering document, but rather a basic repre-
sentation to demonstrate basic components for the purpose of a cost estimate.
Prices quoted in this example are used to show the designer one possible way to
estimate a job and should not be used on actual bids since the cost for labor, mate-
rial, and equipment varies from state to state and in different countries.
Figure 11.1
New construction proposal to ABC corporate office
1 3 5
Place 9 m (30 ft) Place new anchor and guy Place ANMW-50
Class 7 Pole 3, 501-550
4
137 m (450 ft) 1
Place u-guard on pole
6
Pole 4 B B B B
2 30' 7 Building entrance 50
Place 6.6 M
strand between
Office complex
poles 8
x
Remove existing guy and anchor 7
Pole 3
Splice to existing
Pole 2
BKMA-100
3, 501-600
Pole 1
MH 1
ANMY-6 ANMY-6
3, 1-600 3, 1-500+
100 XD 1 = Splicing operation with sequence number
= Splice ft = Foot
m = Meter
= Anchor and guy
MH = Maintenance hole
B = Buried cable
= Protected terminal
Services Needed
ABC Corporation requires 30 pairs for telecommunications.
Given
The existing cable in MH 1 feeds a 100-pair aerial cable that extends from Pole 1 to Pole 3.
New 50-pair cable and strand (shown in bold) will be placed from existing Pole 3 to a new
Pole 4. The cable will extend vertically to the base of the pole and be placed in a 0.6 meter (m
[2 foot (ft)]) deep trench to the building. Cable will be routed up the wall and placed into the
building at a height of 2.4 m (8 ft). A U-guard will serve to protect the cable on the outside of
the building and up the pole.
The cable will terminate on a 50-pair protected terminal that is properly bonded and grounded.
Assumptions
There are no unusual factors that would adversely affect the bid. The design as shown is not
negotiable. The design engineer has completed the site survey.
Requirement
Develop the cost of constructing this project. The information from the site survey should
allow the job to be broken into the following elements:
• Length and type of cable to be placed
• Whether the route will be aerial, buried, or in conduit (or some portion of each)
• Numbers of poles to place or make ready
• Numbers of splices to design
• Route followed
• Any special equipment requirements (e.g., road boring equipment, digger trucks, plows)
This information is further divided into the:
• Estimated length of each type of cable.
• Number of pairs to be spliced.
• Characteristics of the route (e.g., field or roadside pole attachments, rocky or swampy
soil, private property, public R/Ws).
Labor
A crew will be required to remove an anchor and guy at Pole 3, set a new pole (4), and place
a new anchor and guy. The crew will place 66 m (216 ft) of 50 pair cable and 6M strand
between poles 3 and 4. Extend the cable down the pole and trench 137 m (450 ft) into the
building.
A splicing crew will splice 50 pairs on a fixed count protected terminal that will be properly
bonded and grounded. They also will straight splice the new cable into the existing at Pole 3.
Surfaces will be restored to original or better condition upon completion of the work activities.
Material
Major components include:
• Cable types and lengths.
• Poles, guys, and anchors.
• Protected terminals.
These pieces are identified and priced individually. Miscellaneous hardware (e.g., bolts,
clamps, U-guards) usually is not priced separately unless requested by the customer.
Equipment
Heavy equipment will be required to place the pole and anchor and to remove the existing
anchor.
Estimating Costs
Once the job components have been identified, they can be inserted into existing tables that
contain unit prices based on experience or actual compilation of data locally developed.
Table 11.1 is one example that can be used.
NOTE: The unit price data shown is totally illustrative and not representative
of any actual job.
Table 11.1
Matrix for estimating costs
Note that no schedule is provided. A complicated job will require a schedule to be factored
into the estimating process. One product of a cost estimate is the calculation of the hours
needed to complete the tasks. This allows a schedule to be established. Most SoWs specify
a target completion date. The amount of time available from the award of a contract to the
delivery date sets the parameters in which the required labor hours or equipment hours for
completing the design or construction should be accomplished (or for acquiring the licenses
and permits). This establishes the crew sizes, equipment usage, and material delivery intervals.
If any of these result in an unusual drain on the available resources, it could affect the:
• Number of crews that are required.
• Need for extraordinary schedules (e.g., shift work, weekends, overtime).
• Substitution of materials that cannot be acquired in the time available.
• Need to modify the design to avoid time-consuming impediments.
These factors could affect the initially developed cost estimate. A final cost estimate can
require several iterations of the estimating process to ensure that all influencing factors have
been considered.
Any tabular system for estimating should be checked for rationality once a number has been
developed. Reliance on a spreadsheet price estimate without doing a sanity check can lead to
considerable discrepancy from the actual cost. For example, although a unit labor cost can be
historically accurate, if unusual conditions are experienced (e.g., night work only, double shifts,
limited access time during the work period, mandatory overtime), the rates will have to be
adjusted or the overall labor price will have to be modified.
Additionally, if a job takes six labor hours to complete, it is unlikely that the employee will
be able to gainfully perform other tasks that day, so it suggests that a full eight-hour cost be
estimated. Similarly, if vendors’ prices fluctuate, a more costly substitute has to be used
because of schedule demands, or the product normally used is unavailable, adjustments should
be made.
The effort in placing a 50-pair cable is not much different than placing a 25-pair. Whether
the estimating template used should address such fine differences is up to the estimator to
determine. Usually, reliance on judgment and experience is used to supplement the basic
number produced from the spreadsheet.
Table of Contents
Tables
Introduction
The establishment of guidelines for managing and maintaining communications systems and
infrastructure is essential to the support of telecommunications infrastructure in any
environment.
There are differences between the maintenance and the restoration of outside plant (OSP)
infrastructure, even though both fall under the general description of maintenance.
Maintenance is associated with ensuring the continued operability of an existing facilities
network within the operating boundaries of the owner. Restoration requires the reestablish-
ment of components following their failure. The information in this chapter applies to balanced
twisted-pair, optical fiber, or any other transmission medium.
Maintenance Practices
Maintenance practices can be divided into several categories. One such basic separation is
the distinction between routine and demand maintenance. Every OSP infrastructure requires
ongoing maintenance. Age, exposure to weather, and other factors may cause the need for
maintenance. The purpose of maintenance is to extend the useful life of the installed plant.
OSP products have varying life expectancies. Items like poles and conduit are expected to last
for many years. Cables have a shorter duration but still can be useful for 30 to 40 years. It is
not uncommon to find creosoted wood duct still carrying lead-sheathed cables, although for
many reasons (e.g., capacity, service, environmental concerns) these are unusual situations.
The initial capital investment is only a fraction of the total cost of maintaining the facility
during its useful life. Consequently, there is a strong need to design the OSP in the above
standard manner from the initial installation minimizing the long-term cost of keeping it in
service. The facility shall be maintained during its life cycle with routine inspection and
maintenance of all spaces, pathways, and splice enclosures to extend and enhance the
network performance capabilities.
Many of today’s OSP products are associated with analog and digital electronic technology.
The development and evolution of these products continue even after they have been put into
service, so each succeeding generation may be smaller, faster, more competent, more robust,
or another combination of desirable features.
The decision of when to replace existing OSP is usually an economic one. It may be better to
remove a component with a remaining life in order to upgrade the capability of the OSP
infrastructure, rather than to extend the life and live with a (comparatively) reduced capability.
The choice to augment the existing plant or to remove and replace it is determined by the age
and the condition of the facility. This decision also is influenced by the available capacity of
the support structure (e.g., joint-use or solely owned pole lines, available conduits, utility
tunnels, right-of-way [R/W] access).
This chapter is concerned with how to obtain the maximum use of installed components.
Determining when to replace OSP that has remaining life is an economic one and will not be
addressed in this chapter. The OSP engineer or information transport systems (ITS)
distribution designer must be prepared to provide cost justification documentation for the
expenditure of funds to augment the network.
Routine Maintenance
Routine maintenance is the periodic and continued examination of the facilities for abnormal
conditions (see Table 12.1). This may be done by physical inspection or by using sophisticated
network monitoring and surveillance systems that can detect abnormalities in the facilities
(e.g., changes in resistivity, indications of loss of sheath integrity, moisture intrusion, similar
indications of degradation).
Table 12.1
Routine maintenance checklist
Frequency of
Description Maintenance Note:
Inspect all ground locations and Ongoing Report any defective conditions for
connections. immediate corrective action.
Inspect building entry points for Ongoing Inspect after any work is performed in
possible seepage. building entry room.
Inspect all conduit duct systems. Ongoing After any and all work in MHs and EFs
seal all ducts.
Inspect and pump MHs, vaults, Ongoing After all heavy rains and in areas prone to
and PBs. freezing during and after all thaws.
Cleaning of MHs, vaults, and PBs. Ongoing Work activity shall dictate. Prepare report
if required.
Seal all ducts vacant and occupied. Ongoing Work activity shall dictate. Prepare report
if required.
Outside splice enclosure inspection. Ongoing Work activity shall dictate. Prepare report
if required.
Route inspection of buried routes for Ongoing To determine if any activity has impacted
potential damage. the route, prepare report and
take corrective action.
Routine inspection of utility tunnels in Ongoing To determine if any activity has impacted
large campus sites. the route, prepare report and
take corrective action.
EF = Entrance facility
MH = Maintenance hole
P B = Pull box
Routine maintenance frequently gets less support because it is difficult to place a value on
trouble reports not received and repaired as opposed to the cost of the routine maintenance
program. Routine maintenance involves more than looking for potential problems. It ensures
that the OSP infrastructure is safe and that employees and the public are not exposed to
dangerous conditions.
As a result, maintenance includes ensuring cabling/optical fiber integrity, as well as verifying
that:
• Poles, guys, and anchors are sound.
• Route markers are in place to protect buried and underground routes of the OSP network.
• No dangerous electrical conditions have developed from unauthorized attachments,
defective grounds, or missing grounds. Verification also includes compliance with safety
regulations of the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ).
Some specific programs that would fall under routine maintenance include:
• “T” zone inspections for aerial plant—The area includes the cable attached to a pole and
extending 0.91 meters (m [3 feet (ft)]) to either side (effectively forming a “T” when
viewed as a segment), which can be a major area of trouble. This zone normally includes
the terminal, service wire attachments, and splices. It is a location for high technician
activity. Owners will focus their routine maintenance efforts here, checking that splices
and splice cases have integrity, terminals are clean (e.g., no dead service drops, no wasp
nests or rodent intrusion, no open covers), poles are structurally sound, clearances are up
to standard, and any attachments by foreign companies are authorized and compliant.
• Tree trimming—Periodic tree trimming is necessary to prevent problems of sheath
abrasion or damage that degrades transmission capabilities. Routine tree trimming and
vegetation management is required in pathways that are off-premises and cross-country
or along R/Ws with overhanging tree branches. Annual work is usually required for this
process. Chemical foliage management may be utilized, providing the AHJ allows for its
use and it adheres to environmental regulations.
• Pole inspections—Poles are periodically checked for pole deterioration, sufficient pole
height to carry the facilities, unauthorized attachments (this is similar to “T” zone
inspections but does not involve climbing the pole to check for grounding, bonding
(earthing), and terminal face plate conditions), or any other abnormalities (e.g., defective
guys and anchors or ground wires). Pole inspections ensure employee and public safety
and that clearance infractions are reported and cleared.
Demand Maintenance
Demand maintenance may be caused by requirements, such as:
• Responding to facility location requests from underground location services or one-call
centers. This is a mandated requirement in many jurisdictions and usually has a finite time
frame for the response. It is a significant factor in reducing the amount of service
interruptions caused by earth removal.
• Responding to customer service demands.
• Relocation of OSP due to road improvements—OSP located within a public R/W may
require relocation at the owner’s expense because of road rebuild or relocation. This
requirement varies by jurisdiction. With a secured easement, the cost for relocations may
allow for billing back to the agency doing the improvements, but the relocation will still be
required at the agency’s schedule. The property owner has the right to improve or widen
within their area.
• Site improvements (e.g., drainage problems).
• Property additions that conflict with existing OSP (e.g., new buildings, driveways),
whether aerial, underground, or buried.
• Changes in clearance, separation, and general pole spacing.
• Obligations under joint-use agreements—One advantage of joint-use agreements is that
the cost of occupancy for the parties is reduced. An obligation exists to rearrange the
OSP to accommodate the other user, replace the pole for additional height and clearance,
or conduct periodic inspections to ensure compliance with joint-use regulations.
Recordkeeping is an administrative requirement since both the user and the owner want to
be sure that the costs are properly allocated. Joint-use administration is generally
processed and the records updated through a third-party organization (e.g., joint pole
authority). The administrative costs are shared by the member parties, and the obligations
under each of these situations are understood when the agreement is negotiated. These
obligations may include:
– Rearrangement—Whenever the OSP is located on joint-use pole lines, the require-
ments of other authorized tenants or the pole owner may necessitate rearrangements
of the cables. This may be as simple as transfering and raising the facilities or as
complex as relocating to newly located poles. An OSP engineer or designer should be
assigned to address these requests and to handle design, negotiation, and administra-
tive requirements.
– Pole replacement—Poles may need to be replaced because of damage, clearances, or
other reasons. Depending on the agreement, the pole owner may do the replacement
and plant transfers for all parties (this is rarely done due to safety issues handling the
facilities of others) or may require each tenant to do its own. This requirement should
be understood in advance (joint-use documentation spells out what is to be done by
the occupants of the pole in question). If the owner of the pole does the work, this
cost will be billed back to the OSP owner. If the OSP owner performs the work, an
appropriate contractor workforce should be available on demand to provide this
service.
Table 12.2
Demand maintenance
Frequency of
Description Maintenance Note:
Network monitoring and surveillance Ongoing All detection reports reviewed and
systems. dispatched if required.
All reports logged and disposition. Ongoing All incident reports cleared and
recorded.
Inspect and pump MHs, vaults, and PBs. Monthly After all heavy rains and in areas prone
to freezing during/after all thaws.
Cleaning of MHs, vaults, and PBs. Ongoing If the MH/PB is entered, it should be
left clean. An incident report is to be
written and logged for follow-up work.
Seal all ducts vacant and occupied. Ongoing Incident report to be written and logged
for follow-up work.
Outside splice enclosure inspection. Seasonally Visual inspection only unless cause for
breaking the seal.
Route inspection of buried routes for Ongoing
potential damage.
Inspection of utility tunnels in large Ongoing Work activity shall dictate. Prepare a
campus sites. report if necessary to involve other
utilities.
Inspect and tighten all grounding (earthing) Ongoing Work activity shall dictate. Prepare a
and bonding connections. report if necessary to involve other
utilities.
Pole inspections. On-demand Tagging unsafe conditions.
MH = Maintenance hole
PB = Pull box
Restoration Issues
Maintenance will keep OSP in service, but there are occasions when a system or facility
failure occurs. Customers expect that outages will be infrequent and of short duration. A plan
for addressing any outage must exist and must be understood and implemented by the
responsible parties (see Table 12.3).
Table 12.3
Emergency restoration issues
Description Requirement Note:
Infrastructure records Ongoing, keep current information Maintain CAD files and send updates
to the field forces. Access provided to
the restoration forces on demand.
Work order activity marked Current ongoing, keep current All activity posted to the master. Access
on the records information provided to the restoration forces on
demand.
Facility records Current ongoing, keep current MACs updated daily. Access provided to
information the restoration forces on demand.
On call information Current ongoing, keep current On call responsible party has the
information necessary contact information at all
times.
All emergency agencies, police, Current ongoing, keep current MACs updated daily. Access provided
fire, medical information information to the restoration forces on demand.
Contractor on call person Current ongoing, keep current
information
Outside supply source list Current ongoing, keep current Visual inspection only unless cause for
information braking seal.
Notification of critical users As soon as possible Estimated time of restoral to be provided
in case of outage as soon as possible.
Placement of temporary air As soon as possible To protect the remainder of the plant
supplies if required from further damage during the outage.
C A D = Computer-aided design
M A C = Move, add, or change
Summary
In order for the client to consistently implement cable systems, including the supporting
infrastructure, standards must be developed and consistently adhered to as network
implementation goes forward. The quality of the planning, design, and construction of the OSP
network will become very apparent through the OSP maintenance and restoration records and
is essential for the survivability and reliability of the facilities. Establishing a routine
maintenance schedule for the network is necessary to support the network and the customers.
Unforeseen events cannot be forecast, but proper procedures and training can minimize the
impact on the organization’s network. It is imperative to budget for possible outages. With
good planning and procedures, the funding will be sufficient to service the network. As
discussed in previous chapters, these items will affect the performance and longevity and
reduce the maintenance costs for the life of the OSP infrastructure.
Table of Contents
Figures
Tables
Introduction
Air pressure systems are used to protect air core cables from water and other liquid
contaminants that could be introduced through cable sheath cracks, breaks, or leaky splice
closures. They subject the inner core of the cable under the outer sheath to a dry, or low
water content, constant pressure air source and may extend the life of a cable plant. Although
generally used in underground conduit systems, air pressure systems also may be used in
direct-buried and aerial plants.
Air pressure systems shall be maintained to ensure service integrity. Extensions on existing
systems may appear to be cost-efficient; however, new (initial) outside plant (OSP) designs
that require the use of air pressure systems should be avoided because they require substantial
maintenance. In addition, alternate and more reliable plant designs are available.
The evolution of technology has provided for more effective cable construction. The sheath
has higher integrity, and the core of the cable contains materials that are resistant to water
penetration. Consequently, many owners of air core cable that is protected by air pressure
systems are removing that type of cable as they provide route relief or facility upgrades. The
references section of this chapter provides a list of industry standards that offer suggestions
and information for customers maintaining existing air pressure systems. These standards
typically require that all air core cables placed in subsurface pathways be pressurized. A
recommendation for venting of aerial cables is included.
Generally, new OSP cabling systems are designed to eliminate the need for air pressure
systems. The number and extent of legacy air systems are diminishing. The cost of continually
investing in monitoring systems and air pressure equipment and deploying technicians to
maintain target pressure levels makes the expansion of networks that use air pressure
unattractive. Still, the amount of air core cable that is in service—whether aerial, underground,
or buried—represents a sizable capital investment. An effective program that uses air
pressure to minimize troubles and to protect an investment still can return value during the
remaining useful life of the cabling system.
Air pressure systems are still commonly used for radio frequency (RF) waveguide in
connecting antennas to radio transmitters. For more information, see the BICSI Wireless
Design Reference Manual (WDRM).
A method using a pipe system for cable pressurization is essentially a configuration that
applies air pressure through an air pipe to cables. Air pressure also is supplied at selected
maintenance holes (MHs) or handholes (HHs) along an underground cable route. This is
accomplished by connecting individual cables to a parallel air feeder pipe that carries
pressurized dry air from an air source. The flow resistance of the pipe is low with typical
pressure drops of 14 to 21 kilopascals (kPa [2 to 3 pound-force per square inch (psi)]) over
several kilometers (km [miles (mi)]) (e.g., 5 km [3.1 mi]) from the sources.
Introduction, continued
The components of a complete air pressure system vary with configuration and design
requirements. The assembly units for a typical system are:
• Air pipe (i.e., feeder, distribution).
• Air dryer (i.e., compressor, dehydrator).
• Manifold assembly.
• Automatic shutoff valve.
• Pressure transducer unit.
• Cable pressure monitoring system.
Air Dryers
Air dryers are the initial dry air source (see Figure 13.1). They generate the required air
pressure that is fed through the manifold system and into the cables. Air dryers also can be
placed in remote field locations. These remote dryers are designed to extend air pressure to
the points in the system where the main unit cannot sustain pressure requirements.
A dual dryer system at the main cross-connect (MC [campus distributor (CD)]) ensures air
pressure to the cables. An automatic transfer switch ensures that the idle dryer activates if the
on-line dryer fails.
Figure 13.1
Air dryer
Master
stop-start
Lifting lug
switch
NOTE: The air dryer shown is representative of units that could be in the field. Check with
manufacturers for the latest products.
Manifold Assembly
A manifold assembly is a unit that facilitates the connection between the air dryer and OSP
cables. A manifold is usually equipped with an automatic shutoff valve and could have a
number of ports for attaching air pipes to cables. One of the more commonly used units has
five ports, threaded pipe connections, and individual valves to measure pressure to each cable.
Figure 13.2
Manifold assembly and shutoff valve
Valve for
Connection
for tubing from
testing
pipe line individual
cable
pressure
Automatic
shutoff valve
Figure 13.3
Transducer housing mounted on framing channels
Figure 13.4
Example of pressure transducer installation
Pressure
transducer
housings
Plastic tubing to
cable or pipe
Framing channel
Underground
pressure
transducer
Transducer
housing
stub cables
Junction box
Pressure
testing
valve
Junction
box stub
cable Framing channel
Splice closure
Figure 13.5
Flow transducer
Channel Channel
Flow
transducer
Serial
port
Table 13.1
Typical minimum pressure
The typical minimum pressure for… Is…
Air pipes 52 kPa (7.5 psi)
Underground cable 34 kPa (5 psi)
Direct-buried cable 21 kPa (3 psi)
Aerial cable 14 kPa (2 psi)
kPa = Kilopascal
psi = Pound-force per square inch
The typical flow per sheath kilometer is 0.025 m3/h or 0.60 m3/d (0.88 ft3/h or 21.19 ft3/d).
(Flow per sheath is 0.035 m3/h [1.24 ft3 /h] or 0.85 m3/h [30.02 ft3/d].)
In addition to the above standards, all:
• Main entrance facility (EF) airflows (e.g., pipe panels, distribution panels) should be
monitored with a properly sized flow transducer.
• Air dryers should be monitored remotely 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, for proper
operation.
• Main EFs with dual air dryers must have an alternator installed, and both dryers must be
properly alarmed.
• Underground air core cables should be monitored at properly spaced intervals the entire
length of the cable run.
• Air pipes should be monitored for pressure at all end points.
Figure 13.6
Typical air pressure schematic design
Entrance facility
01 CA
02 CA
03 CA
04 CA
05 CA
Manifold
Flow transducer
Pressure transducer
CA Cables
End cables
End pipe pressure transducer
Design Considerations
Figure 13.7
Typical schematic of air pressure system
Cables Cables
Low Meter
Air pressure panel
dryer
MF
MF
Monitoring points
Pipe route B
V V
Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx.
UG
900 m 900 m 900 m 900 m
cables
(3000 ft) (3000 ft) (3000 ft) (3000 ft)
PP B
PP A
MF MF MF
Approximately Approximately Approximately
1830 m (6000 ft) 1830 m (6000 ft) 1830 m (6000 ft)
ft = Foot
m = Meter
MF = Pipe manifold. Connected to each designated cable in maintenance hole.
PP = Air feeder pipe. The letter following the symbol PP is the pipe route designation.
UG = Underground.
V = High valve. Pressure testing valves located in neck of maintenance hole and
connected with plastic tubing to each designated cable.
Air pressure design drawings should show the pipe routes, assigned conduits, locations of
manifold, and both flow and pressure transducers.
Buried Design
When a buried cable leaves the underground system (see Figure 13.8) within 450 m (1476 ft)
of an underground manifold, the next transducer should be installed on the buried cable at the
normal spacing interval, or approximately 900 m (3000 ft) from the underground manifold. It is
desirable to place a bypass at the point where the cable leaves the underground system to
install a pressure controller (adjusted to maintain a minimum of 21 kPa [3 psi] at the cable
end).
Figure 13.8
Example of buried cable leaving underground
Field
Buried cable
Air pipe
MH
MC Field
(CD)
MC Field
(CD)
Pressure plug
Aerial Design
When an air core cable transitions from underground to aerial cable, the pressure transducer
spacing should be treated as a continuation of the underground system. At the point the cable
leaves the underground, a bypass arrangement with a pressure controller set from 14 kPa
(2 psi) to 28 kPa (4 psi) is installed. The objective is to maintain a pressure of 14 kPa (2 psi) at
the end of the aerial cable (see Figure 13.9).
Figure 13.9
Underground to aerial interface
MC
Field
(CD)
Cable
Device Logs
A device log is a recordkeeping tool that cross-identifies the air pressure system or device to
the cable and the cable count it feeds.
Buffering Information
Cable buffering is a means of supporting the air pressure at cable sheath openings during
splicing activities. This is achieved by introducing supplemental air sources (e.g., nitrogen
cylinders, truck-mounted compressors). By adding this supplemental source to the cable
sheath, the open splice does not act as a zero leak or endanger the pressure network and its
surrounding cables. Multiple methods and configurations can be used to buffer a cable sheath
break adequately. The key is to ensure that cable pressure is maintained during splicing or
repair operations.
Figure 13.10 shows an example of cable buffering. A supplemental air source is introduced to
the field side of the cable opening and, in combination with the air supplied from the MC (CD)
side, positive air pressure is maintained.
IMPORTANT: Nitrogen gas is used to buffer the pressure system because nitrogen is a
noncombustible gas.
Figure 13.10
Buffering arrangement at a splice
Air pipe
Manifold
Open splice
Plug
60 m
(197 ft)
ft = Foot
m = Meter
Introduction
An overbuild design generally is utilized when a company intends to build new aerial plant on
strand and cable they already own. Typically, an OSP design engineer designs a plant for 10 or
more years of service growth. When the aerial cable facility is about to exhaust the copper
cable pairs or optical strands, an additional aerial cable may be the choice for supplementing
the plant.
An overbuild also can be used when:
• The aerial route is attractive as a route to another area
• Optical fiber or coaxial cable is placed on the existing aerial route to upgrade the type of
service or technology that the original cable plant cannot support.
• An aerial plant is added to a pole that has other communications vendors already
attached.
When these overbuilds are identified, the OSP engineer has several design issues to consider
before the additional cabling is added to the pole line.
Design Considerations
The OSP aerial design engineer has to know who owns the poles to which the existing aerial
plant is attached. If the pole line is owned by others, attachment contracts, attachment fees,
and fees to upgrade the poles may be required. A contract with the pole owner has to be
reviewed so that everyone’s responsibilities are understood.
Poles are identified by their owners with a tag that lists the owner and the pole and route
number. When manufactured, the pole has a class identification system and length embedded
in the pole so that the engineer knows the amount of weight the pole will support. All of this
information, including the length between pole spans, is used by the engineer and the pole
owner’s engineer to determine whether an overbuild is possible with the existing poles.
An overbuild will increase the weight on the poles, support strand, and hardware. Consider-
ations for the weight can include ice loading in areas where winter weather can create this
hazard. The design engineer must know the weight of the cable being placed, the lashing wire,
and the existing strand and cable. The weight of the hardware, cross-connect boxes, and
splice closures also must be considered.
When the OSP design engineer has created an engineering drawing with all of the information,
this is included with a pole attachment request to the pole owner. The pole owner’s engineer
will meet with the OSP design engineer at the overbuild route to ensure the accuracy of the
information provided. The pole owner’s design engineer then will perform calculations to
ensure that the overbuild meets the codes and regulations for the type of pole line that is
currently built.
Pole Ownership
An overbuild request to the pole owner should be submitted months in advance of the required
overbuild. The design engineer’s request can be among several for the pole owner to consider
throughout the whole plant. If the pole owner determines that a pole or several poles will have
to be replaced, it could take months before the work can be completed by the pole owner.
In some instances, the aerial plant may be sharing the pole with multiple communication
vendors. It is not uncommon for a pole line within a city to have three or more vendors
attached to the poles. The pole owner also must consider the weight factors of those facilities.
Typically, the vendor who places the pole line in jeopardy with the codes and regulations is the
responsible party for paying the pole owner to replace the poles. This is an expensive
undertaking by the pole owner, who will pass those costs to the offending vendor. This process
sometimes is referred to as makeready. In some cases, it may be less expensive to consider
making a transition to underground for short distances and then back to aerial.
The pole owner will notify all of the vendors attached to the pole when a pole has to be
replaced. Some cities have a color-coded cable tagging system so that everyone can easily
identify ownership of the plant facilities. It is up to the individual plant owners to transfer their
strand, hardware, and cable facilities to the new poles after construction.
An overbuild design is not difficult, but performing the weight load calculations takes a lot of
time. The OSP design engineer and the pole owner’s engineer always must consider safety
when an overbuild is considered. Electrical shock, pole breaking, and strand and cable
dropping between the poles are some of the dangerous hazards that a properly designed
overbuild avoids.
Makeready Design
The design work required to specify the attachments of new aerial plant onto existing poles
sometimes may be done as a separate project. In such case, a utility owns the pole and the
designer determines sufficient space and specifies construction work for attachments.
Whenever sufficient space is not available, the designer would produce specified drawings to
propose rearrangements, replacements, or additional poles. The generic term for this process
is makeready design.
Calculations will be provided to verify and secure separations and clearances required in
attaching to existing pole lines. These calculations require company-by-company comparisons
and do not reflect the only space allocations provided by pole owners.
Figure 13.11
Typical pole space allocations
Power
based on remaining
space left on pole
Negotiated
space
Communications 0.91 m
generally (3 ft)
1.2 m (4 ft)
5.5 m
Clearance
(18 ft)
Generally
5.5 m (18 ft)
1.83 m
Depth (6 ft)
generally
1.98 m 10.7 m (35 ft)
Pole depth
(6.5 ft) Pole
based on
size of pole 12 m (40 ft)
Pole
13.7 m (45 ft)
15 m (50 ft) Pole
16.8 m (55 ft) Pole
Pole
ft = Foot
m = Meter
NOTE: Generally, negotiated requirements are adjusted with the power company’s space.
It is important to keep in mind that each joint-use agreement is different and will be based on
what the pole owners and other concerned parties have included in the agreements. When
additional attachment heights or separations are required, the designer and the pole owner will
determine where appropriated space allows them to attach and what dictates their
responsibilities of costs for rearrangements, replacements, or increases in pole sizes.
The designer generally can determine how much makeready work will be required if a pre-
survey with the pole owners is conducted first to determine agreements, costs, and flexibility
of the owners. When considering utilizing a pole line owned by others, the owners are entitled
to determine how, how much, and when anyone else will be allowed to attach.
The other consideration is a project timeline. If the project is required by a certain schedule, it
will be important to determine whether the schedule can be accomplished within the pole
owner’s workloads.
Introduction
The term overbuilding as it relates to this section is defined as the addition of conduit to an
existing underground MH and duct system.
Existing underground pathways (e.g., cables installed in a conduit system) may need
overbuilding for several reasons:
• The existing underground pathway is full of in-use or abandoned cables that cannot be
removed or overidden.
• One or more ducts are collapsed between MHs.
• New cable installation requirements call for additional duct space.
Design Considerations
The designer should consider overbuild actions if any of the conditions discussed previously
apply.
Installing a complete underground system can be very costly, which is why many designers
choose to overbuild an existing underground pathway rather than replace the entire system.
Some of the key questions that must be considered when designing an underground pathway
that will be overbuilt include:
• Is there enough room in the existing MH to support additional conduit and cables?
• Are there any obstructions or utilities along the current pathway?
• Are there any special security considerations for the pathway?
• Has enough labor been estimated for hand digging around existing MHs and utilities?
• Will an MH need to be upgraded with racks and termination hardware to support
additional cables?
• Will the underground pathway cross any roads or parking lots? If so, concrete casing is
recommended at those locations.
• Can adequate placement depths be achieved to protect the new ducts from damage?
Introduction
A cable vault is a telecommunications space, typically subterranean, located within or between
buildings and used for distributing, splicing, and terminating cables.
The expansion of a telecommunications cabling plant can create space limitation problems at
the cable vaults and telephone switching central office location. It is very costly to build a new
telephone switching central office and cable vault system to support new infrastructure
requirements.
Design Considerations
It is very expensive to relocate a telephone switch and cable plant to a new location. To save
time and money, many engineers and customers choose to extend the length and sometimes
width of an existing cable vault to support the new cable plant requirements.
Some key questions that must be considered when designing a cable vault extension include:
• Will any utilities obstruct the extension of the new cable vault?
• Will the cable vault extension be precast or poured construction?
• Has a licensed structural engineer or civil engineer approved the modification to the
building and cable vault?
• Will the cable vault extension enter into a roadway?
• Will the building be extended over the top of the cable vault?
• Will there be an exterior entrance to the cable vault?
• Can the existing submersible pump, if applicable, support the extended area, or will an
additional pump be needed?
• Will electricity be added for lighting or submersible pumps in the extended area?
• Has long-term growth been considered in designing the cable vault?
• Has the proper amount of labor for hand trenching been included?
• Have the proper number of temporary forms been calculated to support the existing
conduits and cables during construction?
• Will the cables be racked in the center of the cable vault, on the walls, or both?
• Will additional core drills be required to route conduits or cables?
• Are the appropriate pulling eyes in the proper locations for installing large balanced
twisted-pair cables?
• Will there be adequate ventilation in the cable vault once it is extended?
• Will downtime be required to reconfigure existing cables and equipment to facilitate this
overbuild?
• Will the overbuild areas allow the proper cable bend radius and cable and splice support in
its final configuration?
References
References, continued
———. ANSI/ICEA S-84-608. Telecommunications Cable, Filled Polyolefin Insulated
Copper Conductor. Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association, 2002.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-85-625. Aircore, Polyolefin Insulated, Copper Conductor
Telecommunications Cable. Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association, 2002.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-90-661. Category 3, 5, & 5e Individually Unshielded Twisted-Pair
Indoor Cable for Use In General Purpose and LAN Communication Wiring Systems.
Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association, 2000.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-98-688. Broadband Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cable,
Aircore, Polyolefin Insulated Copper Conductors. Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable
Engineers Association, 1997.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-99-689. Broadband Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cable Filled
Polyolefin Insulated Copper Conductors. Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable Engineers
Association, 1997.
———. ICEA S104-696. Standard for Indoor-Outdoor Optical Cable. Carrollton, GA:
Insulated Cable Engineers Association, 2003.
National Fire Protection Association, Inc. NFPA 70. National Electrical Code®, 2005 edition.
Quincy, MA: National Fire Protection Association, Inc., 2005.
———. NFPA 72®. National Fire Alarm Code®, 2007 edition. Quincy, MA: National Fire
Protection Association, Inc., 2007.
———. NFPA 75®. Standard for the Protection of Electronic Computer/Data Processing
Equipment. Quincy, MA: National Fire Protection Association, Inc., 2003.
———. NFPA 101®. Life Safety Code®. Quincy, MA: National Fire Protection Association,
Inc., 2006.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.® UL 94. Test for Flammability of Plastic Materials for
Parts in Devices and Appliances. Northbrook, IL: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., 2000.
———. UL 497. Standard for Protectors for Paired-Conductor Communications
Circuits. Northbrook, IL: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., 2001.
———. UL 497A. Secondary Protectors for Communications Circuits. Northbrook, IL:
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., 2001.
U.S. Department of the Army. FM 11-486-5. Telecommunications Engineering Outside
Plant, Telephone. Washington, DC: U.S. Department of the Army, 1978.
References, continued
U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). Code of
Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1910: Occupational Safety and Health Standards.
Washington, DC: U.S. National Archives and Records Administration, Federal Register, 2001.
———. Code of Federal Regulations. Title 29, Part 1926: Safety and Health Regulations
for Construction. Washington, DC: U.S. National Archives and Records Administration,
Federal Register, 2003.
U.S. Government Printing Office. Bulletin 1751F-630. Design of Aerial Plant. Washington,
DC: Rural Utilities Service, 1996.
———. Bulletin 1751F-635. Aerial Plant Construction. Washington, DC: Rural Utilities
Service, 1996.
———. Bulletin 1751F-640. Design of Buried Plant-Physical Considerations. Washington,
DC: Rural Utilities Service, 1995.
———. Bulletin 1751F-641. Construction of Buried Plant. Washington, DC: Rural Utilities
Service, 1995.
———. Bulletin 1751F-642. Construction Route Planning of Buried Plant. Washington,
DC: Rural Utilities Service, 1995.
———. Bulletin 1751F-643. Underground Plant Design. Washington, DC: Rural Utilities
Service, 2002.
———. Bulletin 1751F-644. Underground Plant Construction. Washington, DC: Rural
Utilities Service, 2002.
———. Bulletin 1751F-650. Aerial Plant Guying and Anchoring. Washington, DC: Rural
Utilities Service, 1996.
———. Bulletin 1751F-815. Electrical Protection of Outside Plant.Washington, DC: Rural
Utilities Service, 1995.
———. Bulletin 1751F-642. Construction Route Planning of Buried Plant. Washington,
DC: Rural Utilities Service, 1995.
———. Bulletin 1751F-643. Underground Plant Design. Washington, DC: Rural Utilities
Service, 2002.
———. Bulletin 1751F-644. Underground Plant Construction. Washington, DC: Rural
Utilities Service, 2002.
———. Bulletin 1751F-650. Aerial Plant Guying and Anchoring.Washington, DC: Rural
Utilities Service, 1996.
———. Bulletin 1751F-815. Electrical Protection of Outside Plant. Washington, DC: Rural
Utilities Service, 1995.
Table of Contents
Industry-Related Organizations
BICSI®
BICSI® is a professional association supporting the information transport systems (ITS)
industry with information, education, and knowledge assessment for individuals and
companies. BICSI serves more than 24,000 ITS professionals, including designers, installers,
and technicians. These individuals provide the fundamental infrastructure for telecommunica-
tions, audio/video, life safety, and automation systems.
Through courses, conferences, publications, and professional registration programs, BICSI
staff and volunteers assist ITS professionals in delivering critical products and services and
offer opportunities for continual improvement and enhanced professional stature. Headquar-
tered in Tampa, FL, BICSI supports members in nearly 100 countries.
Publications
BICSI® Publications
In addition to standards, BICSI publishes four reference manuals that provide supplemental
information in the design and installation of OSP:
• Information Transport Systems Installation Manual (ITSIM)
• Outside Plant (OSP) Design Reference Manual
• Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM)
• Wireless Design Reference Manual (WDRM)
These manuals provide the methods and practices by which industry standards and codes are
implemented.
References
American National Standards Institute. ANSI J-STD-607-A. Commercial Building
Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications. Arlington, VA:
Telecommunications Industry Association, 2002.
American National Standards Institute/Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic
Industries Alliance. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Commercial Building Telecommunications
Cabling Standard, Part 1: General Requirements. Arlington, VA: Telecommunications
Industry Association, 2001.
———. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1-3. Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard, Part 1: General Requirements: Addendum 3–Supportable Distances and
Channel Attenuation for Optical Fiber Applications by Fiber Type. Arlington, VA:
Telecommunications Industry Association, 2003.
———. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard, Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components. Arlington, VA: Telecom-
munications Industry Association, 2001.
———. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3. Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard. Arlington,
VA: Telecommunications Industry Association, 2000.
———. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3-1. Optical Fiber Cabling Component Standard–
Addendum 1–Additional Transmission Performance Specification for 50/125 μm Optical
Fiber Cables. Arlington, VA: Telecommunications Industry Association, 2002.
———. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B. Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications
Pathways and Spaces. Arlington, VA: Telecommunications Industry Association, 2004.
———. ANSI/TIA/EIA-570-B. Residential Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard.
Arlington, VA: Telecommunications Industry Association, 2004.
———. ANSI/TIA/EIA-598-B. Optical Fiber Cable Color Code. Arlington, VA:
Telecommunications Industry Association, 2001.
———. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A. Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunica-
tions Infrastructure. Arlington, VA: Telecommunications Industry Association, 2002.
———. ANSI/TIA/EIA-758-A. Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications
Infrastructure Standard. Arlington, VA: Telecommunications Industry Association, 2004.
AT&T Network Systems. Customer Education and Training. Outside Plant Engineering
Handbook. Edminster, NJ: AT&T, 1994.
Bell Atlantic Network Services. Outside Plant Engineering Reference Manual. South
Plainfield, NJ: Bell Atlantic Network Services, 1987.
References, continued
BICSI®. Information Transport Systems Installation Manual, 4th edition. Tampa, FL:
BICSI, 2004.
______. OSP 100. Introduction to Outside Plant. Tampa, FL: BICSI, 2007.
———. OSP 110. Cable Plant Design. Tampa, FL: BICSI, 2007.
______. Outside Plant Design Reference Manual, 4th edition. Tampa, FL: BICSI, 2007.
______. Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, 11th edition. Tampa, FL:
BICSI, 2006.
______. Wireless Design Reference Manual, 2nd edition. Tampa, FL: BICSI, 2006.
Common Ground Alliance. One-Call Systems International. Alexandria, VA: Common
Ground Alliance, 2003.
GTE. OSP Engineering. Volumes I and II. Dallas, TX: GTE Technical Documentation, 1991.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. National Electrical Safety Code®.
Piscataway, NJ: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc., 2002.
Insulated Cable Engineers Association. ANSI/ICEA P-61-694. Coding Guide for Copper
Outside Plant and Riser Telecommunications Cables. Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable
Engineers Association, 1999.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-83-596. Fiber Optic Premises Distribution Cable. Carrollton, GA:
Insulated Cable Engineers Association, 2001.
______. ANSI/ICEA S-84-608. Telecommunications Cable, Filled Polyolefin Insulated
Copper Conductor. Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association, 2002.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-85-625. Aircore, Polyolefin Insulated, Copper Conductor
Telecommunications Cable. Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association, 2002.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-86-634. Buried Telecommunications Wire Filled, Polyolefin
Insulated, Copper Conductor Technical Requirements. Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable
Engineers Association, 2004.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-86-648. Standard for Aerial Service Wire Technical Requirements.
Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association, 2000.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-90-661. Category 3, 5, & 5e Individually Unshielded Twisted-Pair
Indoor Cable for Use In General Purpose and LAN Communication Wiring Systems.
Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association, 2000.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-91-674. Coaxial and Coaxial/Twisted-Pair Composite Buried
Service Wires Technical Requirements. Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable Engineers
Association, 2006.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-98-688. Broadband Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cable,
Aircore, Polyolefin Insulated Copper Conductors. Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable
Engineers Association, 1997.
References, continued
———. ANSI/ICEA S-99-689. Broadband Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cable Filled
Polyolefin Insulated Copper Conductors. Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable Engineers
Association, 1997.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-104-696. Standard for Indoor-Outdoor Optical Cable. Carrollton,
GA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association, 2003.
International Electrotechnical Commission. IEC 60794-5. Optical Fibre Cables—Part 5:
Sectional Specification—Microduct Cabling for Installation by Blowing. Geneva,
Switzerland: International Electrotechnical Commission, 2006.
National Fire Protection Association, Inc. NFPA 70. National Electrical Code®, 2005 edition.
Quincy, MA: National Fire Protection Association, Inc., 2005.
———. NFPA 72®. National Fire Alarm Code®, 2007 edition. Quincy, MA: National Fire
Protection Association, Inc., 2007.
———. NFPA 75. Standard for the Protection of Electronic Computer/Data Processing
Equipment. Quincy, MA: National Fire Protection Association, Inc., 2003.
———. NFPA 101®. Life Safety Code®. Quincy, MA: National Fire Protection Association,
Inc., 2006.
Telecommunications Industry Association. TIA-526-7. OFSTP-7— Measurement of Optical
Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant. Arlington, VA: Telecommunica-
tions Industry Association, 2002.
———. TIA-526-14-A. OFSTP-14—Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed
Multimode Fiber Cable Plant. Arlington, VA: Telecommunications Industry Association,
1998.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. UL 94. Test for Flammability of Plastic Materials for
Parts in Devices and Appliances. Northbrook, IL: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., 2000.
———. UL 497. Standard for Protectors for Paired-Conductor Communications
Circuits. Northbrook, IL: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., 2001.
———. UL 497A. Secondary Protectors for Communications Circuits. Northbrook, IL:
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., 2001.
U.S. Department of the Army. FM 11-486-5. Telecommunications Engineering Outside
Plant, Telephone. Washington, DC: U.S. Department of the Army, 1978.
U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration. Code of Federal
Regulations, Title 29, Part 1910: Occupational Safety and Health Standards. Washington,
DC: U.S. National Archives and Records Administration, Federal Register, 2001.
———. Code of Federal Regulations. Title 29, Part 1926: Safety and Health Regulations
for Construction. Washington, DC: U.S. National Archives and Records Administration,
Federal Register, 2003.
References, continued
U.S. Government Printing Office. Bulletin 1751F-630. Design of Aerial Plant. Washington,
DC: Rural Utilities Service, 1996.
———. Bulletin 1751F-635. Aerial Plant Construction. Washington, DC: Rural Utilities
Service, 1996.
———. Bulletin 1751F-640. Design of Buried Plant-Physical Considerations. Washington,
DC: Rural Utilities Service, 1995.
———. Bulletin 1751F-641. Construction of Buried Plant. Washington, DC: Rural Utilities
Service, 1995.
———. Bulletin 1751F-642. Construction Route Planning of Buried Plant. Washington,
DC: Rural Utilities Service, 1995.
———. Bulletin 1751F-643. Underground Plant Design. Washington, DC: Rural Utilities
Service, 2002.
———. Bulletin 1751F-644. Underground Plant Construction. Washington, DC: Rural
Utilities Service, 2002.
———. Bulletin 1751F-650. Aerial Plant Guying and Anchoring. Washington, DC: Rural
Utilities Service, 1996.
———. Bulletin 1751F-815. Electrical Protection of Outside Plant. Washington, DC: Rural
Utilities Service, 1995.
———. Bulletin 1751F-642. Construction Route Planning of Buried Plant. Washington,
DC: Rural Utilities Service, 1995.
———. Bulletin 1751F-643. Underground Plant Design. Washington, DC: Rural Utilities
Service, 2002.
———. Bulletin 1751F-644. Underground Plant Construction. Washington, DC: Rural
Utilities Service, 2002.
———. Bulletin 1751F-650. Aerial Plant Guying and Anchoring. Washington, DC: Rural
Utilities Service, 1996.
———. Bulletin 1751F-815. Electrical Protection of Outside Plant. Washington, DC: Rural
Utilities Service, 1995.
Agostini, John. “Legal Aspects and Risk Management of Design/Build Contracts.” Web
article. a/e ProNet, 1996. www.aepronet.org/pn/vol9-no1.html (accessed January 3, 2007).
American Arbitration Association. “Dispute-WiseSM Business Management: Is Your Company
Dispute-Savvy? Study Reveals Positive Outcomes of Effective Conflict Management.” Web
article. American Arbitration Association, 2004. www.adr.org/dw (accessed January 3, 2007).
American National Standards Institute. ANSI J-STD-607-A. Commercial Building
Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications. Arlington, VA:
Telecommunications Industry Association, 2002.
American National Standards Institute/Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic
Industries Alliance. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Commercial Building Telecommunications
Cabling Standard, Part 1: General Requirements. Arlington, VA: Telecommunications
Industry Association, 2001.
———. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1-3. Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard, Part 1: General Requirements: Addendum 3–Supportable Distances and
Channel Attenuation for Optical Fiber Applications by Fiber Type. Arlington, VA:
Telecommunications Industry Association, 2003.
———. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard, Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components. Arlington, VA: Telecom-
munications Industry Association, 2001.
———. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3. Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard. Arlington,
VA: Telecommunications Industry Association, 2000.
———. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3-1. Optical Fiber Cabling Component Standard–
Addendum 1–Additional Transmission Performance Specification for 50/125 μm Optical
Fiber Cables. Arlington, VA: Telecommunications Industry Association, 2002.
———. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B. Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications
Pathways and Spaces. Arlington, VA: Telecommunications Industry Association, 2004.
———. ANSI/TIA/EIA-570-B. Residential Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard.
Arlington, VA: Telecommunications Industry Association, 2004.
———. ANSI/TIA/EIA-598-B. Optical Fiber Cable Color Code. Arlington, VA:
Telecommunications Industry Association, 2001.
———. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A. Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunica-
tions Infrastructure. Arlington, VA: Telecommunications Industry Association, 2002.
———. ANSI/TIA/EIA-758-A. Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications
Infrastructure Standard. Arlington, VA: Telecommunications Industry Association, 2004.
AT&T Network Systems. Customer Education and Training. Outside Plant Engineering
Handbook. Edminster, NJ: AT&T, 1994.
Bell Atlantic Network Services. Outside Plant Engineering Reference Manual. South
Plainfield, NJ: Bell Atlantic Network Services, 1987.
BICSI®. Information Transport Systems Installation Manual. Tampa, FL: BICSI, 2006.
______. OSP 100. Introduction to Outside Plant. Tampa, FL: BICSI, 2007.
———. OSP 110. Cable Plant Design. Tampa, FL: BICSI, 2007.
______. Outside Plant Design Reference Manual, 4th edition. Tampa, FL: BICSI, 2007.
______. Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, 11th edition. Tampa, FL:
BICSI, 2006.
______. Wireless Design Reference Manual, 2nd edition. Tampa, FL: BICSI, 2006.
Common Ground Alliance. One-Call Systems International. Alexandria, VA: Common
Ground Alliance, 2003.
Construction Specifications Institute. MasterFormat™. Divisions 1, 25, 27, and 28.
Alexandria, VA: Construction Specifications Institute, 2004.
Dixon, Sheila (ed.). Lessons in Professional Liability. DPIC’s Loss Prevention Handbook
for Design Professionals. Monterey, CA: DPIC, 1996.
GTE. OSP Engineering. Volumes I and II. Dallas, TX: GTE Technical Documentation, 1991.
Gumbiner, Kenneth J. “Alternative Dispute Resolution: There is a Better Way.” Web article.
a/e ProNet, 1995. www.aepronet.org/pn/vol8-no1.html (accessed January 3, 2007).
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.® National Electrical Safety Code®.
Piscataway, NJ: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc., 2002.
Insulated Cable Engineers Association. ANSI/ICEA P-61-694. Coding Guide for Copper
Outside Plant and Riser Telecommunications Cables. Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable
Engineers Association, 1999.
______. ICEA S-83-596. Fiber Optic Premises Distribution Cable. Carrollton, GA:
Insulated Cable Engineers Association, 2001.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-84-608. Telecommunications Cable, Filled Polyolefin Insulated
Copper Conductor. Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association, 2002.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-85-625. Aircore, Polyolefin Insulated, Copper Conductor
Telecommunications Cable. Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association, 2002.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-86-634. Buried Telecommunications Wire Filled, Polyolefin
Insulated, Copper Conductor Technical Requirements. Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable
Engineers Association, 2004.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-86-648. Standard for Aerial Service Wire Technical Requirements.
Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association, 2000.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-90-661. Category 3, 5, & 5e Individually Unshielded Twisted-Pair
Indoor Cable for Use In General Purpose and LAN Communication Wiring Systems.
Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association, 2000.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-91-674. Coaxial and Coaxial/Twisted-Pair Composite Buried
Service Wires Technical Requirements. Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable Engineers
Association, 2006.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-98-688. Broadband Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cable,
Aircore, Polyolefin Insulated Copper Conductors. Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable
Engineers Association, 1997.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-99-689. Broadband Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cable Filled
Polyolefin Insulated Copper Conductors. Carrollton, GA: Insulated Cable Engineers
Association, 1997.
———. ANSI/ICEA S-104-696. Standard for Indoor-Outdoor Optical Cable. Carrollton,
GA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association, 2003.
International Electrotechnical Commission. IEC 60794-5. Optical Fibre Cables—Part 5:
Sectional Specification—Microduct Cabling for Installation by Blowing. Geneva,
Switzerland: International Electrotechnical Commission, 2006.
National Fire Protection Association, Inc. NFPA 70. National Electrical Code®, 2005 edition.
Quincy, MA: National Fire Protection Association, Inc., 2005.
———. NFPA 72®. National Fire Alarm Code®, 2007 edition. Quincy, MA: National Fire
Protection Association, Inc., 2007.
———. NFPA 75. Standard for the Protection of Electronic Computer/Data Processing
Equipment. Quincy, MA: National Fire Protection Association, Inc., 2003.
———. NFPA 101®. Life Safety Code®. Quincy, MA: National Fire Protection Association,
Inc., 2006.
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. GR-110-CORE. Thermoplastic Insulated Steam-Resistant
Metallic Cable. Piscataway, NJ: Telcordia Technologies, Inc., 1994, 2003.
______. GR-111-CORE. Thermoplastic Insulated Riser Cable. Piscataway, NJ: Telcordia
Technologies, Inc., 1995.
______. GR-421-CORE. Generic Requirements for Metallic Telecommunications Cables.
Piscataway, NJ: Telcordia Technologies, Inc., 1998.
______. GR-492-CORE. Generic Requirements for Metallic Telecommunications Wire.
Piscataway, NJ: Telcordia Technologies, Inc., 1994.
Terms
A
acceptance test A test or set of tests performed to demonstrate satisfactory
completion of a predetermined task or group of tasks on which project acceptance is
dependent.
access floor A system consisting of completely removable and interchangeable floor
panels that are supported on adjustable pedestals or stringers (or both) to allow access to the
area beneath.
access provider (AP) 1. A company (e.g., a telephone company) that provides a
circuit path between a service provider (SP) and the client user. An AP also can be the SP.
2. The operator of any facility that is used to convey telecommunications signals to and from a
customer premises. See also service provider (SP).
adapter A device that enables any or all of the following: different sizes or types of
plugs to mate with one another or to fit into a telecommunications outlet; the rearrangement of
leads; large cables with numerous conductors to fan out into smaller groups of conductors;
and interconnection between cables. (TIA)
administration 1. The methodology defining the documentation requirements of a
cabling system and its containment, the labeling of functional elements, and the process by
which moves, additions, and changes (MACs) are recorded. (ISO) See also labeling system.
2. See network administration.
aerial cable Telecommunications cable installed on aerial supporting structures (e.g.,
poles, sides of buildings, other structures). (TIA)
air feeder pipe An underground pipe that parallels cable runs and is used to supply air
for pressurized cables.
all dielectric self-support (ADSS) A type of aerial optical fiber cable that is
nonconductive/nonmetalic and requires no messenger strand for installation.
alternate entrance A supplementary entrance facility into a building using a different
routing to provide diversity of service and for assurance of service continuity. (TIA)
alternate route A secondary communications path used to reach a destination. See
also diverse route.
analog See analog signal.
analog signal An analog signal is a continuous function of time. Contrast with digital
signal.
anchor 1. A fastening device. 2. In an outside plant (OSP) environment, a device made
up of a single plate or series of flat plates and combined with a rod having a connecting eye.
anchor rod The portion of an anchor assembly that extends above the anchor plate
below ground level to a point above ground level.
antenna entrance A pathway facility installed from the antenna to the associated
equipment. (TIA)
approved ground A grounding (earthing) source approved for use by the authority
having jurisdiction. See also earth ground and ground.
architectural assemblies Walls, partitions, or other barriers that are not load bearing.
(TIA)
architectural structure Walls, floors, floor/ceilings, and roof/ceilings that are load
bearing. (TIA)
armoring Method used for protecting cables against crush, impact, rodents, etc. Can be
achieved through the use of corrugated steel, fiber-reinforced polymer rods, steel wire, glass
yarns, or other suitable materials under or over the outer sheath of the cable.
array fiber Optical fiber cable with multiple fiber strands formed together by encasing
the fibers into 12-fiber horizontal array units. Array fiber cables offer high-fiber density and
are ideal for mass fusion splicing or for quick terminations. Also called ribbon fiber.
attenuation The decrease in magnitude or the power loss of a signal that propagates
between points, expressed in dB as the ratio of received signal to transmitted signal level.
See also insertion loss.
attenuator A device used to reduce the amplitude of an electrical signal without
appreciable distortion.
B
backbone 1. A facility (e.g., pathway, cable, conductors) between any of the following
spaces: telecommunications rooms (TRs), telecommunications enclosures (TEs), common
TRs, floor-serving terminals, entrance facilities (EFs), equipment rooms (ERs), and common
ERs. (TIA) 2. In a data center, a facility (e.g., pathway, cable, conductors) between any of
the following spaces: entrance rooms (ERs) or spaces, main distribution areas, horizontal
distribution areas, and TRs.
backbone cable See backbone and backbone cabling.
backbone cabling Cable and connecting hardware that provide interconnections
between telecommunications rooms (TRs), equipment rooms (ERs), and entrance facilities
(EFs). See also backbone.
backfill Earth placed outside foundation walls, or in cable trenches, for filling and
grading back to a finished state.
backscatter The scattering of light into a direction opposite to the original direction.
buffer tube A supplemental loose-fitting cover, which is applied over the primary coated
optical fibers at the time of installation.
building entrance The point where services media enter and leave the building.
See also entrance room or space (telecommunications) and entrance facility (EF
[telecommunications]).
bundled cable An assembly of two or more cables continuously bound together to form
a single unit. (TIA) Contrast with hybrid cable.
buried cable A cable installed under the surface of the ground in such a manner that it
cannot be removed without disturbing the soil. (TIA) See also direct-buried cable and
underground cable.
bus topology (physical) 1. Networking topology, in which each communications
device or network has a single connection to a shared medium that serves as the
communications channel. Also called a point-to-multipoint topology. 2. A linear configuration
where all network devices are connected using a single length of cable. It requires one
backbone cable to which all network devices are connected.
butterfly detail A maintenance hole (MH) diagram showing all four walls and detailing
route and splicing locations of cable passing through the MH.
C
C wire Aerial drop wire used for extended span lengths. Typically 19 AWG [0.91 mm
(0.036 in)].
cabinet A container that may enclose connection devices, terminations, apparatus,
wiring, and equipment. (TIA)
cable An assembly of one or more insulated conductors or optical fibers within an
enveloping sheath. (TIA) .
cable assembly A cable that has connectors installed on one or both ends. See also
jumper and pigtail.
cable dip Aerial cable that is transitioned down a utility pole and placed below grade
distribution, typically occurring at the pole closest to the building. Also called a pole dip.
cable fill 1. The number of cables permitted in a pathway. Expressed as a percentage
of the total cross-sectional area of the pathway. 2. The number of working pairs/optical fibers
in a cable.
cable infrastructure pull tension The pulling force that cannot be exceeded on the
cable-holding infrastructure without affecting the structural integrity of the facility during cable
pulling and installation operations or rodding operations.
cable rack The vertical or horizontal open support structure (usually made of aluminum
or steel) that is attached to a ceiling or wall.
cable sheath A covering over the optical fiber or copper conductor assembly that may
include one or more metallic members, strength members, or jackets. (TIA)
compound curve A series of two or more circular curves, each with a different radius,
all turning in the same direction.
concrete-encased electrode An electrode encased in concrete that is in direct
contact with the earth.
concrete fill A minimal-depth concrete pour to encase single-level underfloor duct.
(TIA)
concrete universal enclosure (CUE) Aboveground environmentally enclosed
cabinets.
conduit 1. A raceway of circular cross-section. 2. A structure containing one or more
ducts. (TIA)
conduit system Any combination of ducts, conduits, maintenance holes (MHs),
handholes (HHs), and vaults joined to form an integrated whole. (TIA)
cone of protection A cone-shaped space, the apex of which is the top of the conductor
or lightning protective mast and with the base being a circle at the earth surface. See also
zone of protection.
connecting hardware A device, or a combination of devices, used to connect cables or
cable elements.
controlled environment An outside plant (OSP)-rated enclosure with humidity,
temperature, flood, and wind controls to provide protected conditions for sensitive electronic
equipment.
control point A physical location on a feeder route located by precise surveying that is
used to measure existing facilities and present and future requirements. These control points
are based on design judgment, which usually involves cable size changes.
converter 1. A device that changes a signal from one transmission medium type to
another (e.g., from copper to optical fiber). 2. A device that changes from one signaling type
to another (e.g., analog to digital).
core hitch The weaving of copper conductors or pairs through a pulling eye for the
purpose of pulling the cable.
corrosion area A space that is subject to a high degree or risk of deterioration to
elements.
crossbar An electromechanical switching system.
cross-connect A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their
interconnection or cross-connection. (TIA)
crossover The junction unit at the point of intersection of two cable trays, raceways, or
conduit (pathways) on different planes. (TIA)
culvert A sewer, drain, or channel crossing under a road, embankment, or sidewalk.
D
deadend In outside plant (OSP) aerial cabling, a type of attachment that is used at the
end of an OSP cable run or when the pull on a corner exceeds 15 m (50 ft). Deadends and
corners in pole lines usually require guying to support the cable or wire facility.
decibel (dB) A logarithmic unit for measuring the relative voltage, power (in watts) or
strength (in voltage or current) of a signal. A decibel is one tenth of a bel. See also bel.
delta power system A three-legged nongrounded configuration with one equal
potential between legs.
demarcation point 1. A point where the operational control or ownership changes.
(TIA) 2. The point of interface between service providers (SPs) and customer facilities.
demultiplexer (DP) A device that separates two or more signals that have been
combined into a multiplexed signal.
depressed clad An optical fiber, usually singlemode, that has double cladding, with the
outer cladding having a refractive index ratio between that of the inner cladding and the core.
This reduces macrobending losses and provides lower dispersion over a wider wavelength
range. Also called a dual clad.
dielectric A material that is nonmetallic and nonconductive and used to insulate a
conductor.
dielectric cable A nonconducting cable (e.g., optical fiber cable with no metallic
members).
dielectric constant A unit or relative permittivity of an insulator.
diffraction The bending of radio, sound, or lightwaves around an object, barrier, or
aperture edge.
digital See digital signal.
digital signal A signal that encodes information in the form of a sequence of discrete
states. For example, a binary signal uses two states to encode the two states (0,1). Contrast
with analog signal.
direct-buried cable A telecommunications cable designed to be installed under the
surface of the earth, in direct contact with the soil. (TIA) Contrast with underground cable.
dispersion shifted A singlemode optical fiber that has a nominal zero-dispersion point
at a wavelength of 1550 nanometer. Contrast with dispersion unshifted.
dispersion unshifted A singlemode optical fiber that has a nominal zero-dispersion
point at a wavelength of 1300 nanometer. Also called conventional or unshifted optical fiber.
distortion A change in the shape of a signal’s waveform.
distribution frame A structure with terminations for connecting the cabling of a facility
in such a manner that interconnection or cross-connections may be readily made. (TIA)
diverse route An alternative routing for cables and/or services to provide a different
pathway for resilience or security. See also alternate route.
double deadend In outside plant (OSP) aerial cabling, if the pull is greater than a
45-degree angle, two head guys are required. Another name for two head guys is a double
deadend.
down guy A steel messenger (strand) that connects the suspension strand, span guy, or
other items of aerial plant to an anchor and rod.
drag line Pull cord or line installed in a cable pathway. The line may be used for pulling
in a stronger strength rope to pull cable(s) of greater mass and weight into the finished
conduits.
drip loop The length of cable, usually on the exterior of a building, placed above the
entry hole of the building, extended to below the entry hole, and looped back up to the entry
hole of the structure. The use of such cable installation will impede moisture infiltration.
drop wire An aerial cable that connects a serving outdoor terminal to a building or
structure.
duct 1. A single enclosed raceway for conductors, wires, or cables. See also raceway.
2. An enclosure in which air is moved. Generally part of the heating, ventilating, and air-
conditioning system of a building.
ductbank (DB) An arrangement of ducts, for wires or cables, in tiers. (TIA)
ductpic Plastic insulated conductor cables designed for placement underground.
duct plug A fitting capping the end of a duct, or fittings to surround cables within the
duct, designed to provide a gas- and liquid-tight seal.
E
earth ground An electrical connection to earth obtained by a grounding electrode
system. See also approved ground and ground.
easement A right acquired by one party to use land belonging to another party for a
specific purpose.
effective ground Intentional connection to earth through a ground connection or
connections of sufficiently low impedance (whose value is specified in suitable grounding/
earthing/bonding standards) and having sufficient current-carrying capacity to prevent the
buildup of voltages that may result in undue hazards to connected equipment or to persons.
(NEC)
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) The ability of the design and operation of
equipment in a manner that makes them immune to certain amounts of electromagnetic
interference, while keeping the interference generated by them within specific limits.
electromagnetic induction Current flow in telecommunications conductors produced
by coupling of a magnetic field (e.g., by current in power lines, the cable shield, or other cable
pairs).
electromagnetic interference (EMI) Radiated or conducted electromagnetic energy
that has an undesirable effect on electronic equipment or signal transmissions. (TIA)
encapsulant A permanent or removable filling compound for a splice enclosure to
prevent water intrusion.
encroachment The private use of another person’s right-of-way (R/W) for an
indefinite term, with or without permission, usually involving obstructions (man-made
structures).
encumbrance Any lien, claim, or liability attached to the land that affects or limits the
fee simple title to property.
end user The ultimate consumer of a delivered good or service.
entrance facility (EF) 1. An entrance to a building for both public and private network
service cables (including wireless) including the entrance point at the building wall and
continuing to the entrance room or space. (TIA) 2. A facility that provides all necessary
mechanical and electrical services for the entry of telecommunications cables into a building
and that complies with all relevant regulations. (ISO)
entrance point (EP [telecommunications]) The point of emergence for
telecommunications cabling through an exterior wall, a floor, or from a conduit. (TIA)
entrance room or space (telecommunications) A space in which the joining of
inter- or intrabuilding backbone facilities takes place. (TIA)
equipment grounding conductor The conductor used to connect the noncurrent-
carrying metal parts of equipment, raceways, and other enclosures to the system-grounded
conductor, the grounding electrode conductor, or both at the service equipment.
equipment rack Typically a vertical aluminum or steel support rack that holds
equipment and cable terminations.
equipment room (ER [telecommunicatoins]) An environmentally controlled
centralized space for telecommunications equipment that usually houses a main or
intermediate cross-connect. (TIA)
exothermic weld A method of permanently bonding two metals together by a
controlled chemical reaction releasing heat, resulting in a molecular bond. (TIA)
F
facility 1. A building or room that makes possible some specific activity. 2. Sometimes
used to describe outside plant (OSP) cables or pairs to provide service.
factor of safety (FS) In outside plant (OSP) aerial cabling, a mathematical factor used
in the calculation of required pole strength for a given transverse load. This factor varies with
the grade of pole construction.
ferrule (optical fiber) The alignment sleeve portion of an optical connector used to
protect and align the stripped optical fiber.
fiber optic See optical fiber.
fill 1. A sequence of added bits used to meet timing, sizing, or spacing requirements in
and between messages. 2. Use of material (or material used) to equalize or raise earth
topography to a certain elevation.
firestopping The process of installing (specialty) listed fire-rated materials into
penetrations of fire-rated barriers to reestablish the fire-resistance rating of the barrier (TIA).
flying cross In outside plant (OSP) aerial cabling, the term used to describe the
intersection of two perpendicular support strands for aerial cable that makes a 90-degree
change in direction.
foil shield A thin plastic and metal laminated tape wrapped around the cable conductors
and acting as a shield against electromagnetic interference (EMI) and preventing emission of
electromagnetic energy.
franchise A right-of-way (R/W) granted for placement of outside plant (OSP) facilities
within the domain of public or private property.
frequency (freq) The number of cycles that a periodic signal completes in a given time;
if the unit of time is one second, the frequency is stated in hertz (Hz). One Hz is equal to one
cycle per second.
Fresnel zone The circular zone about the direct path between an electromagnetic
wave transmitter and receiver in an unbounded transmission medium free of radiation sources.
frost lift Ground buckling upward as a result of heavy frost.
frost line The deepest level below grade to which frost penetrates in a particular
geographic area. Usually specified in 50-year increments.
frost uplift See frost lift.
G
gap distance The distance between optical fiber ends.
gas tube protector An overvoltage protector featuring metallic electrodes that
discharge in a gas atmosphere within a glass or ceramic envelope. This type of protector does
not require replacement each time it discharges.
grade 1. Another word for degree. The slope of a surface with a vertical rise or fall
expressed as a percentage of the horizontal distance. 2. For a communications circuit, it
defines the level of the circuit’s capability.
ground A conducting connection, whether intentional or accidental, between an
electrical circuit or equipment and the earth, or to some conducting body that serves in place
of earth. (TIA) See also approved ground and earth ground.
ground enhancement material Any material used to enhance the soil for a low
resistance to ground.
ground line In outside plant (OSP) aerial cabling, the ground line is the point where the
pole enters the earth.
ground potential rise (GPR) A voltage difference between a grounding electrode
system and the earth return currents produced by a lightning strike or a power fault current.
ground resistivity The measured direct current resistance of a volume of earth.
ground wire See bonding conductor (BC) and bonding conductor for
telecommunications (BCT).
grounding conductor A conductor used to connect the grounding electrode to the
building’s main grounding busbar. (TIA)
grounding electrode 1. A conductor, usually a rod, pipe, or plate (or group of
conductors), in direct contact with the earth for the purpose of providing a low-impedance
connection to the earth. (TIA) 2. A device that establishes an electrical connection to the
earth. (NEC)
grounding electrode system One or more grounding electrodes bonded to form a
single reliable ground for a structure.
guy A steel stranded wire used to provide counter tension to the pole opposite that of
the installed cable pull tension to keep the pole upright.
guy rod end A single, double, or triple eye at the end of a guy rod for the attachment
of the guy wire to the connect point above the ground anchor.
H
handhole (HH) A structure similar to a small maintenance hole (MH) in which cable
can be pulled, but not large enough for a person to fully enter to perform work.
headend The equipment located at the start of a coaxial cable distribution system
where the signals are processed and combined prior to distribution.
heat coil A device that grounds a conductor when the conductor’s current time limits
are exceeded.
horizontal directional drilling A method for placing underground facilities that uses
a directed horizontal auger or drill to establish the path, place casings or cables, and minimize
restoration costs associated with plowing or trenching.
hybrid cable An assembly of two or more cables, of the same or different types or
categories, covered by one overall sheath. (TIA) Contrast with bundled cable.
hydraulic cement A material used to patch cracks, holes, or gaps in cement or
concrete structures in wet or damp environments.
I
ice load The weight factor calculated from the potential amount of ice that can build up
on outside plant (OSP) structures from storm conditions.
immunity The ability of a device, equipment, or system to perform without degradation
in the presence of an electromagnetic disturbance.
index of refraction (IOR) The ratio of the velocity of light in a vacuum to the velocity
of a signal in a given material. Also called refractive index.
infrastructure (telecommunications) A collection of those telecommunications
components, excluding equipment, that together provides the basic support for the distribution
of all information within a building or campus. (TIA)
ingress 1. An electrical characteristic associated with externally generated noise
induced into cable facilities. 2. A point of entry for a building or property.
innerduct A nonmetallic raceway, usually circular, placed within a larger pathway.
(TIA)
insertion loss The signal loss resulting from the insertion of a component, or link, or
channel, between a transmitter and receiver (often referred to as attenuation). (TIA) See also
attenuation.
J
joint random buried plant Power, cables, and telephone cables that are placed in a
common trench with little or no separation.
jumper 1. An assembly of twisted-pairs without connectors, used to join
telecommunications circuits/links at the cross-connect. (TIA) 2. An optical fiber cable with
connectors installed on both ends. See also cable assembly and pigtail.
K
keying (pole) In outside plant (OSP) aerial cabling, the process of bolting a horizontal
member (e.g., wood or a nonrusting substance) to a pole 152 mm (6 in) below the ground line
to provide a resistance to torsional forces.
L
labeling system See ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A, Administration Standard for
Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure.
laser See light amplification by stimulated emission of radiation.
lateral conduit A conduit placed from the sidewall of a maintenance hole (MH) to the
structure.
lead-to-height ratio In outside plant (OSP) aerial cabling, measured in meters or feet,
lead-to-height ratio is equal to the lead divided by the height of the attachment to a pole.
lease A contract that grants the lessee (tenant) the right to occupy the property of the
lessor (landlord) for a specified period of time.
license An interest in property for a limited time and purpose.
lien A legal right of a party or claimant, such as a subcontractor, to control the improved
property of another or have it sold for payment of a claim. (CSI)
light amplification by stimulated emission of radiation (laser) A device that
produces coherent, highly directional light with a narrow range of wavelengths used in a
transmitter to convert information from electric to optical form.
M
main cross-connect (MC [campus distributor (CD)]) The cross-connect normally
located in the (main) equipment room for cross-connection and interconnection of entrance
cables, first-level backbone cables, and equipment cables. Campus distributor is the
international equivalent term for main cross-connect.
maintenance hole (MH [telecommunications]) 1. A vault located in the ground or
earth as part of anunderground duct system and used to facilitate placing, splicing, and
maintenance of cables, as well as the placing of associated equipment, in which it is expected
that a person will enter to perform work. Formerly called manhole. 2. A hole through which
access to an underground or enclosed structure may be gained.
makeready The process of preparing an existing aerial pole line for new attachments.
mandrel 1. A rod or a shaft. 2. A mechanical device sized to fit the inside diameter of a
conduit. Pulled or pushed through a duct, it ensures concentricity of the structure and frees the
structure from debris. 3. A cylindrical object used to cancel high order modes during testing of
multimode optical fibers.
mass splicing The splicing of factory-made fiber ribbons or field-ribbonized fibers
using a mass fusion splicer.
master group Consists of five super groups and is identified by a manufacturer’s
specific binder string. There are 3000 pairs in a master group. See also super group.
matched clad Optical fibers are made of a core and cladding glass, each with slightly
different compositions. The manufacturing process determines the relationship between these
two glasses. Singlemode optical fiber produced by the outside vapor deposition process
produces a matched-clad fiber with a very low core/cladding concentricity error rate.
mechanical splicing The joining of two optical fibers through mechanical means to
enable a continuous signal.
media (telecommunications) Wire, cable, or conductors used for telecommunications.
(TIA) See also transmission media.
megahertz (MHz) A unit of frequency equal to one million cycles per second (hertz).
megger 1. A device that can be used to measure electrical resistance in a grounding
system. 2. A testing unit used to generate a high voltage between cable conductors to detect
current leakage between conductors or conductor to ground.
membrane penetration An opening through only one surface or side of a barrier.
(TIA)
messenger See support strand (messenger).
metes and bounds A description of a parcel of land by reference to the course’s
bearings and distances (usually measured in feet or chains) of the straight lines that form its
boundary, with one of the corners tied to an established point.
Mie scattering A phenomenon related to free space optics (FSO) that describes light
scattered by particles the size of the optical wavelength (e.g., fog).
modular patch panel (MPP) A facility connecting hardware device enabling the
terminating of cable elements on insulation displacement connector modules and their
connections by means of a patch cord.
modulation 1. Any of several techniques (e.g., AM and FM) used to modulate a
carrier signal with an information bearing signal. 2. The process of coding and decoding
information for transmission.
moment Each transverse load causes a “moment” on the pole that tends to move the
pole in the direction of the applied load. The value of that moment (in newton-meter [Nm] or
equivalent pound-feet [lb-ft]) is equal to the transverse load (in newtons [N] or equivalent
pound-feet [lb-ft]) times the distance (in meters [feet]) from the load point to the point where
the moment is being considered. The moments caused by each of the transverse loads must
be summed together to obtain the total load. A pole with sufficient “resistant moment” must be
selected to handle the total moment.
monolithic pour The single, continuous pouring of a concrete floor or columns of any
given floor of a building structure. (TIA)
monolithic slab The result of a monolithic pour. (TIA)
multiground neutral (MGN) system A utility power system where the neutral
conductor is continuously present along with the phase conductors. The neutral conductor is
connected to earth periodically along its path, typically, four times per 1.6 km (1.0 mi).
multimedia 1. An application that communicates to more than one of the human
sensory receptors. (TIA) 2. Applications that communicate information by more than one
means. (TIA)
multimode optical fiber An optical waveguide that allows many bound modes to
propagate.
N
network administration The set of tasks performed to provide secure and reliable
access to selected network resources.
node Addressable point on the network with processing abilities (e.g., personal
computer, terminal, printer).
nominal velocity of propogation (NVP) The speed of transmission along a cable
relative to the speed of light in a vacuum.
nonzero dispersion shifted A type of optical fiber designed to introduce a small
amount of dispersion without a zero point crossing being in the wavelength division multiplexer
passband. With this type of optical fiber, it is possible to eliminate or at least greatly reduce the
degradation due to four-wave mixing, a distortion mechanism that requires the spectral
components to be phase matched along the optical fiber.
O
one-call system A system created to protect the underground facilities of members
through communication with any person planning to disturb the earth. This communication
network receives and processes line location requests from excavators, contractors, builders,
designers, the general public, and others and disseminates this work location information to all
members based on their service agreements.
optical fiber A transmission media using a thin filament of glass or plastic to transmit
pulse light signals. Its bandwidth is higher than copper and not subject to electromagnetic
interference. The optical fiber consists of a central core (glass or plastic) and an outer
cladding. See also plastic optical fiber.
optical fiber cable Cable made up of one or more strands of glass consisting of a
central core and outer cladding (optical fibers), strength members, and an outer jacket.
outside plant (OSP) Telecommunications infrastructure designed for installation
exterior to buildings and is typically routed into the entrance facility. (TIA)
overbuild Outside plant (OSP) facilities placed in conjunction with existing OSP of a
locally owned or competitive company.
overhead guy In outside plant (OSP) aerial cabling, any pole support strand (guy) that
extends to the top of a pole.
overlashing The practice of lashing a new cable over an existing aerial support strand
and cable bundle.
P
pair loading To raise the power demand (in an electrical circuit), as by adding
resistance.
patch cord A length of cable with a plug on one or both ends used to join
telecommunications circuits/links at the cross-connect. (TIA)
patch panel A connecting hardware system that facilitates cable termination and
cabling administration using patch cords. (TIA) See also modular patch panel.
pathway 1. A sequence of connections that provides the connectivity between devices
on a network or between networks on an internetwork. 2. The vertical and horizontal route of
the telecommunications cable. 3. A facility for the placement of telecommunications cable.
(TIA)
pedestal A protective aboveground enclosure used most commonly to house a splice
point or administrative terminal location.
penetration Opening made in a firestop barrier. See membrane penetration and
through penetration.
permanent link test configuration The transmission path between two mated
interfaces of generic cabling, excluding equipment cords, work area cords and cross-
connections but including the connecting hardware at each end. (ISO)
protocol A set of rules and procedures governing the formatting of messages and the
timing of their exchange between devices on a network covering addressing, transmitting,
receiving, and verifying.
pull 1. The act of placing cable by pulling. 2. A vectorizing method used to estimate the
required strand size for guying.
pull finder In outside plant (OSP) aerial cabling, the pull on a pole can be calculated
using one of three methods. These include using a pull finder, using a tape measure, and
measuring the included angle created by the three points. To use a pull finder: 1) Screw the
threaded end of the pull finder into a pole. 2) Sight down each sight to the next pole in the line
(proposed or existing). 3) Read the pull off the scale.
pulling iron An attachment installed in maintenance holes (MHs) to provide a point of
connection for blocks, sheaves, and other devices used for pulling cable into the duct system.
pull tension The pulling force that can be applied to a cable. (TIA)
push brace Where guying is not feasible, bracing is provided by use of a pole of an
equivalent type to the pole being reinforced.
R
raceway Any enclosed channel designed for holding wires or cables. (TIA)
rack See equipment rack.
radio frequency interference (RFI) The disruption of radio signal reception caused by
any source which generates radio waves at the same frequency and along the same path as
the desired wave. (Newton Telecommunications Dictionary)
Rayleigh scattering The deflection of light from the path it would follow if the
refractive index were uniform or gradually graded. Caused primarily by micro defects,
impurities, and molecular structure in the optical fiber.
rearrangement An action taken to replace, add, adapt, or remove existing premises
wiring system components. (TIA)
record The permanent documentation of installed telecommunications infrastructure
obtained from as-builts.
regulation An authoritative rule (e.g., principle, condition) that controls or governs
behavior leading to uniformity. In cases where government regulation has the force of law, it is
referred to as an executive order.
reinforced concrete A type of construction in which steel (reinforcement) and
concrete are combined, with the steel resisting tension and the concrete resisting compression.
(TIA)
reinforcing bar A steel bar or rod used in concrete construction to provide additional
strength. Also called rebar.
report A presentation of a collection of information from the various records. (TIA)
S
scattering The deflection of light by small particles or inhomogeneities whose size is
similar to or smaller than the wavelength of light. See also Rayleigh scattering and Mie
scattering.
screen A thin metallic wrapping (e.g., aluminum foil) used to isolate cable pairs from
interference. See also foil shield.
section throw Splicing of a new section of cable at both ends into existing cable plant.
service drop In outside plant (OSP) aerial cabling, limited pair count aerial cable
(balanced twisted-pair or optical fiber) that is extended to a residence.
service provider (SP) The operator of any service (e.g., application programming
interfaces) that furnishes telecommunications content (transmissions) delivered over access
provider facilities. (TIA) See also access provider (AP).
service wire An underground or aerial cable that connects a serving outdoor terminal
to a building or structure.
sheath See cable sheath. (TIA)
shield A metallic layer (e.g., copper braids, metal foils, solid tubing) placed around a
conductor or group of conductors. (TIA)
singlemode optical fiber Optical fiber with a relatively small core diameter of
8-9 micron (micrometers) and a cladding diameter of 125 micron; lightwave propagation is
restricted to a single path, or mode, in singlemode optical fiber. (TIA)
sleeve An opening, usually circular, through the wall, ceiling, or floor to allow the
passage of cables. (TIA)
slot An opening through a wall, floor, or ceiling, usually rectangular, to allow the passage
of cables. (TIA)
source The means (usually light-emitting diode [LED] or laser) used to convert an
electrical information-carrying signal into a corresponding optical signal for transmission by an
optical waveguide.
space (telecommunications) An area used for housing the installation and termination
of telecommunications equipment and cable. (TIA)
span The length between two support points. In aerial plant, the span is the space
between two poles or building connection points.
span guy Guying installed across a span placed on straight pole lines to reinforce them
against excess tension placed on them by severe weather conditions. Also called a line guy or
pole-to-pole.
splayed Sloped, slanted, or spread outward. Splayed maintenance hole (MH) duct
entrances are placed toward the outward sides of an entrance wall rather than placed in the
center of the entrance wall.
splice 1. A joining of conductors meant to be permanent. (TIA) 2. A device that joins
conducting or transmitting media. See also straight splice.
splice case A metal or plastic housing with a semicylindrical cavity used in identical
pairs to clamp around a cable splice to provide a closure.
splice closure A device used to protect a splice. (TIA) See also splice case.
splicing The act of joining copper conductors or fiber strands to like products.
standard A collection of requirements that encompass properties of components and
systems that are intended to ensure an accepted degree of functionality and longevity. (ATIS)
star topology A network topology in which services are distributed from or through a
central point. (TIA)
straight splice A splice in which one conductor or optical fiber strand is spliced from
opposite directions.
strand 1. A single string of wire used to make up a larger wire or cable by twisting a
number of strands together. Galvanized steel stranded cable is used as support strand and guy
wire. 2. A single unit of optical fiber within a cable.
stub See push brace.
super group Consists of 24 subgroups and is identified by a manufacturer’s specific
binder string. There are 600 pairs in a super group.
support strand (messenger) A strength element used to carry the weight of the
telecommunications cable. (TIA)
surge arrester 1. A protective device for limiting surge voltages by discharging or
bypassing surge current, and it also prevents continued flow of follow current while remaining
capable of repeating these functions. (NEC) 2. Electrical or lightning arrestors designed to
protect equipment between the power source and the equipment being protected.
surge protective device See surge arrester.
T
tap 1. An electrical connection permitting signals to be transmitted onto or off a bus.
2. The linking between the bus and the drop cable that connects the workstation to the bus in
10BASE-5 Ethernet. 3. A device used on community antenna television cables for matching
impedance or connecting service drops. See also bridged tap.
taper point A splice location where the cable size along a route is reduced.
telecommunications Any transmission, emission, and reception of signs, signals,
writings, images, and sounds; that is, information of any nature by cable, radio, optical, or other
electromagnetic systems. (TIA)
telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) A busbar placed in a
convenient and accessible location and bonded, by means of the bonding conductor for
telecommunications, to the building service equipment (power) ground. (TIA)
telecommunications room (TR) An enclosed architectural space for housing
telecommunications equipment, cable terminations, and cross-connect cabling. (TIA)
tensile strength The longitudinal pulling stress needed to break apart a cable or
material.
terminal (TERM) 1. A point at which information may enter or leave a
telecommunications network. (TIA) 2. A device by means of which wires may be connected
to each other. (TIA)
terminal block (TB) A protected or unprotected unit that serves to terminate cable
conductors and is a transition point between cable conductors.
test hole A hole or group of holes dug along a proposed underground route to
determine what utilities or other obstructions may be present.
thimble eye A device for securing the end of a strand.
thimble eye rod A device used to place the guy wire(s) within the eye opening when
guying from a main pole to a stub pole or when guying to the ground. Also called a thimble
eyebolt.
through penetration A continuous opening that passes through both surfaces of a fire-
rated barrier. (TIA)
thunderstorm day Any day thunder is heard at a specific observation point.
topology The physical or logical arrangement of a telecommunications system. (TIA)
See also logical topology and physical topology.
total moment See moment.
transducer 1. A specific type of converter (see converter) that changes one form of
energy into another. 2. In pressurized systems, a device that permits reading the cable
pressure in a pressurized cable.
transmission budget The calculated limit for quality service available based on
transmission characteristics.
transmission media The physical carriers of signal energy radiation (e.g., copper,
optical fiber, air). See also media.
transverse Lying or extending across or in a cross direction. To pass over, under, or
through.
transverse moment In outside plant (OSP) aerial cabling, each transverse load causes
a “moment” on the pole that tends to move the pole in the direction of the applied load.
traverse See transverse.
trench A furrow dug into the earth for the placement of direct-buried cable or for the
installation of conduit ducts.
twisted-pair Two individually insulated copper wires physically twisted together to form
a balanced pair.
U
U-guard A U-shaped guard, usually 2.4 m (8 ft) in length, placed over a cable, on a
pole, or on a side of a building to protect a cable.
unbalanced tension In outside plant (OSP) aerial cabling, the uneven distribution of
tension (load) on a guy or pole is known as unbalanced tension.
underground Refers to conduit and maintenance hole (MH) systems installed below
the surface of the ground.
underground cable A telecommunications cable designed to be installed under the
surface of the earth in a trough or duct that isolates the cable from direct contact with the soil.
(TIA) Contrast with direct-buried cable.
unshifted singlemode See dispersion unshifted.
utility tunnel An enclosed passageway, usually placed between buildings, for the
distribution of utility services. (TIA)
V
vault A telecommunications space, typically subterranean, located within or between
buildings and used for the distribution, splicing, and termination of cabling. These spaces may
be established as a maintenance hole (MH) in campus environments or they may include
active equipment in addition to passive cabling such as in a controlled environment vault
(CEV).
vertical down lead (VDL) A ground wire placed on a pole that leads down to the
ground electrode at the base of the pole.
W
wavelength The distance between two points in the same phase in consecutive cycles
measured in the direction of propagation.
wire An individually insulated solid or stranded metallic conductor. (TIA)
wye A power system in which only one point (usually the midpoint of a supply
transformer bank) is grounded. If the neutral is present, it is not grounded along the line.
Z
zone of protection The area in close proximity to and within a building’s lightning
protection system. Several factors may make this area relatively immune to direct lightning
strikes.
A
AASHO American Association of State Highway Officials
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
ac alternating current
ACR attenuation-to-crosstalk ratio
A-D or A/D analog-to-digital conversion
ADA Americans with Disabilities Act
ADSL asymmetric digital subscriber line
ADSS all-dielectric self-supporting
A/E architect or engineer
AEC architect/engineer/contractor
AHJ authority having jurisdiction
AIA American Institute of Architects
ALPETH aluminum polyethylene
ALVYN aluminum polyvinyl chloride
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AP access provider
APT American pipe thread
APWA American Public Works Association
ARPAP Aluminum, resin, polyethylene ,aluminum, polyethylene
ARPASP Aluminum, resin, polyethylene, aluminum, steel, polyethylene
ASCII American standard code for information interchange
ASP aluminum, steel, polyethylene
ASTM ® American Society for Testing and Materials
ATIS Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions
ATM asynchronous transfer mode
AT&T American Telephone & Telegraph Company
AWG American wire gauge
B
BC bonding conductor
BCT bonding conductor for telecommunications
BD building distributor
BER bit error rate
BLSR bidirectional line switched ring
BOCA Building Officials and Code Administrators International, Inc.
BOMA Building Owners Managers Association
BRI basic rate interface
BRISDN basic rate integrated services digital network
BSI British Standards Institution
C
CACSP coated aluminum, coated steel, polyethylene
CAD computer-aided design
CALPETH coated aluminum, polyethylene
CASP coated aluminum, steel, polyethylene
CATV community antenna television (cable television)
CCTV closed circuit television
CD campus distributor
CDF combined distribution frame
CDM code division multiplexing
CDMA code division multiple access
CDO community dial office
CEC Canadian Electrical Code
CENELEC Comité Européen de Normalisation Electrotechnique (European Committee for Electro-
technical Standardization)
CEV controlled environment vault
CF cellular floor
CFM cubic feet per minute
D
D-A or D/A digital-to-analog conversion
dB decibel
DB direct-buried
DB ductbank
dBm decibel milliwatt
dc direct current
demarc demarcation point
DEPIC dual-expanded plastic insulated conductor
DLC digital loop carrier
DNR Department of Natural Resources
DoC Department of Commerce
DoT Department of Transportation
DP demarcation point
DP demultiplexer
DSL digital subscriber line
DSX digital signal cross-connect
DTE data terminal equipment
DWDM dense wave division multiplexing
E
EB encased buried
E&C engineering and construction
EF entrance facility
EMC electromagnetic compatibility
EMI electromagnetic interference
EP entrance point
ER equipment room
F
FD floor distributor
FOCIS Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard
freq frequency
FS factor of safety
FSO free space optic
FTTH fiber to the home
FTTN fiber to the node
FTTP fiber to the premise
FTTx fiber to the x
G
ga gauge
GACAN gauge coding area number
GHz gigahertz
GND ground
GPR ground potential rise
GVWR gross vehicle weight rating
H
HC horizontal cross-connect
HDD horizontal directional drilling
HDG heavy-duty galvanized
HDPE high-density polyethylene
HDSL high bit-rate digital subscriber line
HDTV high-definition television
HFC hybrid fiber/coaxial
HH handhole
HVAC heating, ventilating, and air conditioning
Hz hertz
I
IC intermediate cross-connect
ICC International Code Council
ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.
ID identification
ID inside diameter
IDC insulation displacement
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE® Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.®
ILEC incumbent local exchange carrier
J
JAN joint Army Navy
K
km kilometer
kPa kilopascal
kV kilovolt
L
LAN local area network
laser light amplification by stimulated emission of radiation
LATA local access and transport area
LBO line buildout
LCE limited common element
LEC local exchange carrier (now called service provider [SP])
LED light-emitting diode
LLDPE linear low-density polyethylene
LoS line of sight
M
MAC move, add, or change
MAN metropolitan area network
Mb/s megabit per second
MC main cross-connect
MCF million conductor feet
MDF main distribution frame
MDPE medium density polyethylene
MF pipe manifold
MGN multiground neutral
MH maintenance hole
MHz megahertz
mi mile
MM multimode
MMF multimode fiber
modem modulator/demodulator
MOP method of procedure
MPD multiple plastic duct
MPP modular patch panel
MRIL maximum recommended installation load
MSDS Material Safety Data Sheet
MTBF mean time between failure
mux multiplex; multiplexer
N
NBCC ® National Building Code of Canada
NEC ® National Electrical Code®
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NESC® National Electrical Safety Code®
NFPA National Fire Protection Association, Inc.
O
OAU optimum air usage
OCSI One Call Systems International
OD outside diameter
ODN optical data network
OEM original equipment manufacturer
OLT optical line termination
OLTS optical loss test set
ONT optical network terminal
OPE outside plant engineer
OPGW optical power ground wire
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
OSP outside plant
OTDR optical time domain reflectometer
P
PABX private automatic branch exchange
PAP polyethylene, aluminum, polyethylene
PASP polyethylene, aluminum, steel, polyethylene
PBX private branch exchange
PCM pulse code modulation
PE polyethylene
PE professional engineer
PERT program evaluation review technique
R
RCDD ® Registered Communications Distribution Designer
RDUP Rural Development Utilities Program (formerly Rural Utilities Services [RUS])
RF radio frequency
RFI radio frequency interference
RFI request for information
RFP request for proposal
RFQ request for quote
RH relative humidity
rms root mean square
ROM rough-order of magnitude
RR railroad
RT remote terminal
S
SC subscriber connector
SCC Standards Council of Canada
SCFD standard cubic foot per day
SCFH standard cubic foot per hour
SCMD standard cubic meter per day
SCMH standard cubic meter per hour
SCTE Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers, Inc.
SDSL symmetrical digital subscriber line
SE station equipment
SFF small form factor
SI International System of Units (Le Systeme International d’Unites)
SLC subscriber loop carrier
SM singlemode
SMDR station message detail recording
SMF singlemode fiber
SNR signal-to-noise ratio
SONET synchronous optical network
SoW scope of work
SP service provider
SRL structural return loss
SR/WA senior right-of-way agent
STALPETH steel, aluminum, polyethylene
STEAMPETH aluminum, steel, polyethylene, polybutylene
T
TB terminal block
T&C terms and conditions
TDE tube distribution enclosure
TDM time-division multiplexing
TDMA time division multiple access
TDR time domain reflectometer
TDU tube distribution unit
TELCO telephone company
TERM terminal
TGB telecommunications grounding busbar
TIA Telecommunications Industry Association
TMGB telecommunications main grounding busbar
TR telecommunications room
TSB Telecommunications Systems Bulletin (formerly Technical Systems Bulletin)
U
UG underground
UL ® Underwriters Laboratories Inc.®
ULC Underwriters Laboratories of Canada
UM unsoldered mechanical
UP universal pedestal
UPSR unidirectional path switched ring
V
V volt
VDL vertical down lead
VDSL very high bit-rate digital subscriber line
Vrms volts root mean square
W
WBS work breakdown structure
X
xDSL x digital subscriber line
XPE expanded polyethylene
XPE-PVC expanded polyethylene-polyvinyl chloride
Symbols
A 1. Placing stamp
PL 70 m (230 ft)
BKMA - 400 pr
1
or
2. Splice and splice number
#
1
125 3. Transferred pairs in splice
Symbols, continued
Symbols, continued
BKMA-3 16. Cable design, insulation type, gauge, sheath design, and pairs
(greater than or equal to 100 pairs)—3 indicates the number of
100-pair complements; in this example, the 3 may also appear on
drawings as 300, meaning the amount of pairs within the cable.
BKMA-16 Pr 17. Cable containing less than 100 pairs; this symbol is a 16 pair (pr).
The pr symbolizes less than 100 pair.
BKMA-3 BKMA-2 19. Changes in cable size, gauge, count, type, or classification
310 m 103 m
BKMA-3
(1017 ft) (338 ft) 20. Point on cable (other than splice) where a division of measure-
ment or point of record is required
Symbols, continued
Enc
23. Encapsulated splice
Symbols, continued
Type
AT400-25P
P 1347
30. Fixed-count terminal without cable protection
76-100
BKMA-3 PM PM
31. Interface with moisture plug
34. Ground
Symbols, continued
TGR
.
.B
P.
N 38. Power neutral bond
Cable
Bond 39. Bond between separate metallic cable shields
Cable
Symbols, continued
Pole
number
P 1375
25 ft 48. Proposed pole
Length
and class
Symbols, continued
(P 1375)
(25 ft 41)
49. Pole to be removed
55. Multiplexer
Symbols, continued
P 1388
56. Underground conduit, maintenance hole, and subsidiary conduit to
P1388
Type A
57. Proposed maintenance hole (MH) type, length, width, headroom,
3.7 m x 1.5 m x 2 m and type of frame and cover
(12 ft x 5 ft x 6.6 ft)
0.76 m (2.5 ft) B F & C
Symbols, continued
36.6 m
(120 ft)
30.5 m 36.6 m
(100 ft) (120 ft)
67. Mid-span crossover
30.5 m
(100 ft)
V 69. Vault
Symbols, continued
Input Output
70. Single output amplifier
Input Output
71. Multiple output amplifier
or
Symbols, continued
Symbols, continued
# 86. RF terminator
#
87. Self-terminating tap
88. Headend
Symbols, continued
25 mm (1 in)
22 mm (0.875 in)
19 mm (0.75 in)
94. Demultiplexer
Symbols, continued
95. Multiplexer
Symbols, continued
105. Connector
#
# 106. Splitter
#
Index
A
AASHTO. See American Association of State Highway and bell end conduit slip sleeve .................................................. 5-58
Transportation Officials bending moments .................................................... 5-87, 5-109
access provider ...................................................................... 1-1 BICSI® .................................................................................. A-1
accretion ............................................................................... 8-32 blown fiber ........................................................................... 3-24
ADR. See alternative dispute resolution bonded steel, aluminum, polyethylene ................................ 3-62
adverse possession .............................................................. 8-32 bonding electrodes ............................................................... 7-29
aerial cable bonding requirements ........................................................... 7-10
definition ....................................................................... 3-45 boring ................................................................................... 5-81
bonding requirements .................................................... 7-10 branch closure ........................................................................ 6-2
aerial closures ......................................................................... 6-5 breach of duty ........................................................................ 2-7
aerial drop wire .................................................................... 3-67 broadband twisted-pair telecommunications cable .............. 3-43
aerial pathways ........................................................... 5-8, 5-85 building entrance protection ................................................ 7-21
aerial to building transition ................................................ 5-157 bus topology ........................................................................ 4-12
aerial to direct-buried transition ......................................... 5-157 butt closure ............................................................................ 6-2
aerial to underground transition ......................................... 5-156
air core screened cable .......................................................... 3-64
air dryer ............................................................................... 13-3
air feeder pipe ...................................................................... 13-2 C
air pressure systems cabinets .............................................................................. 5-219
sources ............................................................................ 1-7 cable
air-assisted cable installation ............................................... 5-49 assignment ..................................................................... 10-3
ALPETH cable .................................................................... 3-45 pressure monitoring system .......................................... 13-7
ALPETH cable weight ....................................................... 5-113 racking ......................................................................... 5-210
alternative dispute resolution ................................................ 2-8 sizing .................................................................... 3-2, 10-3
American Association of State Highway and Transportation types ....................................................................... 1-7, 3-3
Officials ............................................................................ A-1 cabling
American National Standards Institute ................................. A-1 hardware .......................................................................... 6-9
anchor and guys ................................................................. 5-128 topologies ........................................................................ 4-1
angle bracing ......................................................................... 5-63 campus backbone cabling ....................................................... 4-1
ANSI. See American National Standards Institute causation ................................................................................ 2-7
AP. See access provider CENELEC. See Comité Européen de Normalisation
appraisal .............................................................................. 8-36 Electrotechnique
arbitration .............................................................................. 2-9 centerline description ........................................................... 8-24
attachment clearances ........................................................ 5-121 central tube cable ................................................................. 3-23
attenuation ............................................................................. 3-8 CEV. See controlled environment vault
auger bore system ................................................................ 5-81 chain of title ......................................................................... 8-34
automatic shutoff valve ....................................................... 13-4 change orders ..................................................................... 11-16
chemical electrodes .............................................................. 7-30
clearances ................................................................ 5-21, 5-120
clustered star topology ........................................................ 4-10
B coaxial cabling ...................................................................... 3-68
backbone cabling .................................................................. 10-3 codes ............................................................................. 1-4, 2-2
balanced drop wires ........................................................... 5-105 coefficient of friction ........................................................... 5-36
balanced twisted-pair cable Comité Européen de Normalisation Electrotechnique .......... A-2
definition ......................................................................... 3-3 composite cables .................................................................. 3-28
selection criteria ............................................................ 3-31 concrete universal enclosure .............................................. 5-224
bargain and sale deed ............................................................ 8-31 concrete-encased electrode ................................................... 7-31
I
M
ICEA. See Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.
IEC. See International Electrotechnical Commission maintenance hole
IEEE®. See Institute of Electrical and Electronics definition ..................................................................... 5-203
Engineers, Inc.® frames and covers ........................................................ 5-213
impact moling ...................................................................... 5-84 grounding (earthing) and bonding .................................. 7-17
implied terms ......................................................................... 2-4 location .......................................................................... 5-20
industrial publications .......................................................... A-4 ratings .......................................................................... 5-203
inline splicing method .......................................................... 6-18 types ........................................................................... 5-209
innerduct .............................................................................. 5-31 maintenance practices .......................................................... 12-2
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.® ......... A-2 makeready design ............................................................... 13-16
Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. ......................... A-2 manifold assembly ............................................................... 13-4
integrated contract ................................................................. 2-4 marinas ............................................................................... 5-224
International Electrotechnical Commission .......................... A-2 mass splicing ........................................................................ 6-29
International Organization for Standardization .................... A-3 MasterFormat™ .................................................................. 10-7
International Telecommunication Union ............................... A-3 materials cost estimates ....................................................... 11-8
ISO. See International Organization for Standardization maximum recommended installation load ............................ 5-35
ITU. See International Telecommunication Union mechanical splicing .............................................................. 6-29
mediation ............................................................................... 2-9
Mercator projection system ................................................ 8-17
metes and bounds ................................................................ 8-19
J MGN. See multiground neutral
joint ownership .................................................................... 8-29 MH. See maintenance hole
joint tenancy ........................................................................ 8-29 microduct ............................................................................. 5-51
joint use occupancy ............................................................... 5-6 midspan clearances ............................................................ 5-122
missile bore system ............................................................. 5-84
modular splicing ................................................................... 6-18
mortgage ............................................................................... 8-32
K MRIL. See maximum recommended installation load
multiground neutral ................................................................ 7-4
keying ................................................................................ 5-101
multiground neutral power systems ...................................... 7-5 PBX. See private branch exchange
multiple-bore conduit .......................................................... 5-27 pedestals ............................................................................ 5-219
mutual impedance ................................................................ 7-34 pedestrian tunnel ................................................................. 5-69
permit .................................................................................. 8-43
physical ring topology ........................................................... 4-8
physical star/logical ring topology ......................................... 4-7
N PIC. See plastic insulated conductor cable
National Fire Protection Association .................................... A-3 planning requirements ............................................................ 1-5
negligence ...................................................................... 2-4, 2-6 plastic insulated conductor cable ......................................... 3-44
NFPA. See National Fire Protection Association plowing ................................................................................ 5-78
non-MGN power systems .................................................... 7-5 point description ................................................................. 8-25
norms ..................................................................................... 2-2 pole
classification .................................................................. 5-92
depth ................................................................ 5-99, 5-157
footings ....................................................................... 5-179
O raising .......................................................................... 5-169
OAU. See optimum air usage resistance moments ....................................................... 5-95
Occupational Safety and Health Administration .................. A-3 spacing ........................................................................ 5-110
operations support centers ................................................ 12-12 transverse load ............................................................ 5-103
optical fiber cable ................................................................... 3-4 polyethylene, aluminum, steel, polyethylene ..................... 3-52
closures ........................................................................... 6-7 potholes ................................................................................. 5-5
color coding ................................................................... 3-30 power
connectors ....................................................................... 3-7 contact ............................................................................. 7-3
performance .................................................................... 3-6 induction ......................................................................... 7-3
splicing ......................................................................... 6-28 pressure transducer unit ...................................................... 13-5
types ............................................................................. 3-20 private branch exchange ....................................................... 10-3
uses ................................................................................. 3-5 private easement document ................................................. 8-42
optical fiber ring topology ................................................... 4-11 privity .................................................................................... 2-2
optimum air usage .............................................................. 13-10 professionalism ...................................................................... 1-8
OSHA. See Occupational Safety and Health Administration property
OSP. See outside plant descriptions ..................................................................... 8-9
outside plant ownership types ........................................................... 8-29
construction specifications checklist .......................... 10-16 restrictions .................................................................... 8-35
definition ................................................................ 1-1, 4-1 protector
design checklist ............................................................. 10-9 housing .......................................................................... 7-25
design roles ...................................................................... 2-1 units .............................................................................. 7-26
designer ........................................................................... 1-2 push braces ........................................................................ 5-188
designer duties ................................................................. 2-3
infrastructure ................................................................. 12-1
standardization ................................................................ 1-3
overbuild ............................................................... 13-15, 13-22
Q
qualification requirements ...................................................... 9-4
quitclaim deed ...................................................................... 8-31
P
pair count ............................................................................. 10-5
PASP. See polyethylene, aluminum, steel, polyethylene
R
patent deed .......................................................................... 8-31 R/W. See right-of-way
pathways radial clearances ................................................................. 5-126
definition ......................................................................... 5-7 real estate law ...................................................................... 8-27
types ............................................................................... 1-6 rectangular grid system ........................................................ 8-10
underground cable
definition ....................................................................... 3-59
bonding requirements .................................................... 7-16
underground casings ............................................................. 8-51
underground closures ............................................................. 6-6
underground pathways ................................................. 5-7, 5-9
underground to building transition ..................................... 5-157
underground to direct-buried transition ............................. 5-157
uniform color codes ............................................................... 5-5
units of area ......................................................................... 8-13
units of linear measurement ................................................. 8-13
universal closure .................................................................... 6-2
utility tunnels ...................................................................... 5-69
V
vault closure ........................................................................... 6-2
VDL. See vertical down lead
vehicular tunnels .................................................................. 5-70
vertical clearances .............................................................. 5-123
vertical down lead .................................................................. 7-5
vertical loading ......................................................... 5-87, 5-108
W
warranty ................................................................................ 2-4
warranty deed ...................................................................... 8-31
wind and ice loading ............................................................. 5-88
work print
drawings ...................................................................... 10-23
components ..................................................................... 1-5
wye power system ................................................................ 7-8